WO2023163192A1 - Decorative sheet, decorative member, display system, method for manufacturing plate, method for manufacturinig decorative sheet, and method for manufacturing decorative member - Google Patents

Decorative sheet, decorative member, display system, method for manufacturing plate, method for manufacturinig decorative sheet, and method for manufacturing decorative member Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023163192A1
WO2023163192A1 PCT/JP2023/007175 JP2023007175W WO2023163192A1 WO 2023163192 A1 WO2023163192 A1 WO 2023163192A1 JP 2023007175 W JP2023007175 W JP 2023007175W WO 2023163192 A1 WO2023163192 A1 WO 2023163192A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
linear
decorative sheet
unit
elements
pattern layer
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2023/007175
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
晋 宮崎
貴之 嶋田
景吾 大曲
健太郎 秋山
翼 森田
Original Assignee
大日本印刷株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 大日本印刷株式会社 filed Critical 大日本印刷株式会社
Publication of WO2023163192A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023163192A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C33/00Moulds or cores; Details thereof or accessories therefor
    • B29C33/42Moulds or cores; Details thereof or accessories therefor characterised by the shape of the moulding surface, e.g. ribs or grooves
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C45/00Injection moulding, i.e. forcing the required volume of moulding material through a nozzle into a closed mould; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C45/14Injection moulding, i.e. forcing the required volume of moulding material through a nozzle into a closed mould; Apparatus therefor incorporating preformed parts or layers, e.g. injection moulding around inserts or for coating articles
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C45/00Injection moulding, i.e. forcing the required volume of moulding material through a nozzle into a closed mould; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C45/16Making multilayered or multicoloured articles
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C59/00Surface shaping of articles, e.g. embossing; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C59/02Surface shaping of articles, e.g. embossing; Apparatus therefor by mechanical means, e.g. pressing
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B3/00Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar form; Layered products having particular features of form
    • B32B3/26Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar form; Layered products having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer
    • B32B3/30Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar form; Layered products having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer characterised by a layer formed with recesses or projections, e.g. hollows, grooves, protuberances, ribs
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B33/00Layered products characterised by particular properties or particular surface features, e.g. particular surface coatings; Layered products designed for particular purposes not covered by another single class
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B7/00Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/02Physical, chemical or physicochemical properties
    • B32B7/023Optical properties
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/02Diffusing elements; Afocal elements

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a decorative sheet, a decorative member, a display system, a plate manufacturing method, a decorative sheet manufacturing method, and a decorative member manufacturing method.
  • a linear pattern is used for surface decoration.
  • the linear pattern may be, for example, a hairline pattern in which linear elements extend linearly in a given direction.
  • the linear pattern may be a spin pattern in which linear elements extend in a curved shape in the circumferential direction.
  • a linear pattern can be made by scribing the surface of the metal in a predetermined direction.
  • the linear pattern may be a wood grain pattern that expresses wood grain.
  • the linear pattern may be a woven pattern representing a woven fabric.
  • the linear pattern may be a cloth pattern obtained by weaving plant fibers, as an example of a textile pattern.
  • the linear pattern may be a carbon pattern obtained by weaving carbon fibers, as an example of a woven pattern.
  • the linear pattern may be a denim pattern representing denim, as an example of a textile pattern.
  • a decorative sheet using resin expresses a linear pattern.
  • This decorative sheet includes linear elements as linear protrusions or linear recesses.
  • the linear elements are arranged in a direction perpendicular to their longitudinal direction.
  • Linear elements can be made by resin molding such as embossing.
  • the decorative sheet can be placed over a display device, light source device, or the like that forms an image.
  • a decorative sheet constitutes a display system together with a display device, a light source device, and the like. In the display system, the decorative sheet allows transmission of light from the display device and the light source device to enable transmission observation of the image.
  • the decorative sheet can hide the display device and the light source device when no image is displayed.
  • Patent Document 1 JP2010-52353A
  • Patent Document 2 JP2008-89479A
  • the present disclosure aims at suppressing blurring of image contours in a display system.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure relates to the following ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 54>.
  • the linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements, Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally, A decorative sheet having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
  • the linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
  • the linear element includes a side wall non-parallel to the longitudinal direction at an intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction,
  • a decorative sheet having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
  • the linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements arranged in one direction, Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally, The decorative sheet, wherein the unit elements are unit protrusions or unit recesses.
  • ⁇ 4> The decorative sheet according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, wherein the linear pattern layer displays a hairline pattern, a spin pattern, a wood grain pattern, or a woven pattern.
  • Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally, The decorative sheet according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, wherein the unit element has a maximum length of 1 ⁇ m or more and 50 ⁇ m or less.
  • Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally, The decorative sheet according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, wherein the uneven structure formed by the unit elements has a height difference of 0.3 ⁇ m or more and 20 ⁇ m or less.
  • Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
  • the unit element is a unit convex portion or a unit concave portion,
  • the decorative sheet according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>, wherein the arrangement ratio of the unit recesses differs between two linear elements adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction of the linear elements.
  • Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally, The decorative sheet according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 12>, wherein each unit element is a unit convex portion or a unit concave portion.
  • the unit elements are arranged in a first arrangement direction and a second arrangement direction non-parallel to the first arrangement direction;
  • the unit elements adjacent to the unit recesses in the first arrangement direction are the unit protrusions, and are adjacent to the unit recesses in the second arrangement direction.
  • the matching unit element is the unit protrusion.
  • the unit element adjacent to the unit convex portion in the first arrangement direction is the unit concave portion, and the unit convex portion and the unit convex portion are arranged in the second arrangement direction.
  • Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally, The unit elements are arranged in an array direction, The decorative sheet according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 15>, wherein the wall portion inclination angle specified in the cross section along the arrangement direction is 66° or more.
  • the length of the linear element along the longitudinal direction is 20 ⁇ m or more and 2 m or less
  • a light-shielding pattern sheet superimposed on the linear pattern layer The decorative sheet according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 17>, wherein the light-shielding pattern sheet includes a light-shielding region having a property of blocking visible light and a transmitting region having a property of transmitting visible light.
  • ⁇ 20> The decorative sheet according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 19>, wherein the linear pattern layer contains one or more of a light stabilizer and an ultraviolet absorber.
  • a decorative member comprising: a thermoplastic resin portion joined to the decorative sheet.
  • the linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements, Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
  • the thermoplastic resin portion contains a thermoplastic resin, A decorative member having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
  • the linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements, the linear element includes a side wall non-parallel to the longitudinal direction at an intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction;
  • the thermoplastic resin portion contains a thermoplastic resin, A decorative member having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
  • the linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements arranged in one direction, Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally, The decorative member, wherein the unit elements are unit protrusions or unit recesses.
  • a display system comprising: a display device or a light source device superimposed on the decorative sheet or the decorative member.
  • ⁇ 27> The plate manufacturing method according to ⁇ 26>, comprising the step of blasting the metal surface on which the recesses are formed.
  • a method for producing a decorative sheet comprising a step of producing a resin imprint layer using a plate produced by the production method described in ⁇ 26> or ⁇ 27>.
  • ⁇ 29> A step of producing a linear pattern layer by using the resin-shaped layer peeled off from the plate as a second plate, supplying a resin composition to the resin-shaped layer, and curing the resin composition.
  • the method for producing a decorative sheet according to ⁇ 28> comprising:
  • ⁇ 32> The method for producing a decorative sheet according to any one of ⁇ 28> to ⁇ 31>, comprising the step of forming a design layer overlaid on the linear pattern layer.
  • a method of manufacturing a decorative member comprising: supplying a heated thermoplastic resin into the cavity in which the decorative sheet is arranged to produce a thermoplastic resin portion joined to the decorative sheet.
  • the linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements, The plurality of linear elements are arranged in one direction, Each linear element extends in the other direction intersecting the one direction,
  • the ten-point average roughness Rz defined in JISB0601-1994 and along the one direction is 3.2 ⁇ m or less,
  • the linear pattern layer includes linear protrusions and linear recesses alternately arranged in the one direction,
  • a side wall inclination angle specified in a cross section across the linear protrusions and linear recesses adjacent to each other in one direction is 66° or more
  • the cross section is a cross section along both the normal direction of the decorative sheet and the one direction
  • the side wall inclination angle is an angle between a straight line passing through a first position and a second position on the linear pattern layer and the normal direction in the cross section
  • the first position is the line lower than the highest position by 10% of the height difference between the highest position of the linear protrusion crossed by the cross section and the lowest position of the linear recess adjacent to the linear protrusion.
  • a decorative sheet comprising a linear pattern layer, The total light transmittance is 5% or more and 90% or less
  • the linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements, The plurality of linear elements are arranged in one direction, Each linear element extends in the other direction intersecting the one direction,
  • the plurality of linear elements include linear protrusions and linear recesses alternately arranged in one direction,
  • a side wall inclination angle specified in a cross section that crosses the linear protrusions and linear recesses that are adjacent to each other in one direction is 66° or more
  • the cross section is a cross section along both the normal direction of the decorative sheet and the one direction,
  • the side wall inclination angle is an angle between a straight line passing through a first position and a second position on the linear pattern layer and the normal direction in the cross section,
  • the first position is the line lower than the highest position by 10% of the height difference between the highest position of the linear protrusion crossed by the cross section and the lowest position of the linear recess adjacent to the linear pro
  • ⁇ 39> The decorative sheet according to any one of ⁇ 34> to ⁇ 38>, wherein the linear pattern layer displays a hairline pattern, a spin pattern, a wood grain pattern, or a woven pattern.
  • the length of the linear element along the other direction is 20 ⁇ m or more and 2 m or less
  • ⁇ 41> A light-shielding pattern sheet superimposed on the linear pattern layer, The decorative sheet according to any one of ⁇ 34> to ⁇ 40>, wherein the light-shielding pattern sheet includes a light-shielding region having a property of blocking visible light and a transmitting region having a property of transmitting visible light.
  • ⁇ 42> The decorative sheet according to any one of ⁇ 34> to ⁇ 41>, wherein the linear pattern layer comprises a cured product of an electron beam curable resin composition.
  • ⁇ 43> The decorative sheet according to any one of ⁇ 34> to ⁇ 42>, wherein the linear pattern layer contains one or more of a light stabilizer and an ultraviolet absorber.
  • a decorative member comprising: a thermoplastic resin portion joined to the decorative sheet.
  • the linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements, The plurality of linear elements are arranged in one direction, Each linear element extends in the other direction intersecting the one direction,
  • the ten-point average roughness Rz defined in JISB0601-1994 and along the one direction is 3.2 ⁇ m or less,
  • the linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements, The plurality of linear elements are arranged in one direction, Each linear element extends in the other direction intersecting the one direction,
  • the plurality of linear elements include linear protrusions and linear recesses alternately arranged in one direction,
  • a side wall inclination angle specified in a cross section that crosses the linear protrusions and linear recesses that are adjacent to each other in one direction is 66° or more
  • the cross section is a cross section along both the normal direction of the linear pattern layer and the one direction
  • the side wall inclination angle is an angle between a straight line passing through a first position and a second position on the linear pattern layer and the normal direction in the cross section,
  • the first position is the line lower than the highest position by 10% of the height difference between the highest position of the linear protrusion crossed by the cross section and the lowest position of the linear recess
  • a display system comprising: a display device or a light source device superimposed on the decorative sheet or the decorative member.
  • a method for producing a decorative sheet comprising a step of producing a resin transfer layer using a plate produced by the production method described in ⁇ 48>.
  • ⁇ 50> A step of producing a linear pattern layer by using the resin embossing layer peeled off from the plate as a second plate, supplying a resin composition to the resin embossing layer, and curing the resin composition.
  • ⁇ 51> a step of supplying a first resin composition to the surface of the resin transfer layer peeled off from the plate that was in contact with the plate, and producing a coating layer from the first resin composition; a step of supplying a second resin composition onto the coating layer and curing the second resin composition to produce a linear pattern layer;
  • ⁇ 53> The method for producing a decorative sheet according to any one of ⁇ 49> to ⁇ 52>, further comprising the step of forming a design layer overlaid on the linear pattern layer.
  • a method of manufacturing a decorative member comprising: supplying a heated thermoplastic resin into the cavity in which the decorative sheet is arranged to produce a thermoplastic resin portion joined to the decorative sheet.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining first and second embodiments, and is a perspective view schematically showing an example of a display system, a decorative member, and a decorative sheet.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the first embodiment, and is a sectional view showing the display system, the decorative member, and the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 3 is a front plan view of the display system shown in FIG. 1, shown in a non-operating state;
  • FIG. 4 is a front plan view of the display system shown in FIG. 1, showing an operational state.
  • FIG. 5A is a plan view showing another example of the display system, and is a diagram showing another example of the linear pattern displayed by the display system.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining first and second embodiments, and is a perspective view schematically showing an example of a display system, a decorative member, and a decorative sheet.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the first embodiment, and is a sectional view showing the display system, the decorative member, and the decorative sheet shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 5B is a plan view showing still another example of the display system, and is a diagram showing still another example of the linear pattern displayed by the display system.
  • FIG. 5C is a plan view showing still another example of the display system, and is a diagram showing still another example of the linear pattern displayed by the display system.
  • FIG. 5D is a plan view showing still another example of the display system, and is a diagram showing still another example of the linear pattern displayed by the display system.
  • 6 is an enlarged plan view schematically showing a linear pattern layer that can be included in the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 7A is a partial perspective view showing an enlarged example of the linear pattern layer shown in FIG. 6.
  • FIG. 7B is an enlarged partial perspective view showing another example of the linear pattern layer shown in FIG. 6.
  • FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view showing still another example of the linear pattern layer shown in FIG. 6, taken along both the first direction and the normal direction.
  • FIG. 8 is also a cross-sectional view showing still another example of the linear pattern layer shown in FIG. 6, along both the second direction and the normal direction.
  • 9 is a perspective view showing a plate that can be used to manufacture the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. FIG. 10 is an example of image data of a linear pattern.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a method of manufacturing a plate.
  • FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the plate taken along the line AA in FIG. 10, which is a diagram for explaining the method of manufacturing the resin imprinted layer using the plate.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative sheet, and is a diagram for explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate containing a decorative sheet using a resin-imparting layer.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative sheet, and is a diagram for explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate containing a decorative sheet using a resin-imparting layer.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative sheet, and is a diagram for explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate including a decorative sheet using a resin molding layer.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative sheet, and is a diagram for explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate containing a decorative sheet using a resin-imparting layer.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram illustrating a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram illustrating a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram explaining a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and explaining a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative member. 22 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a linear pattern layer that can be included in the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view showing another example of a linear pattern layer that can be included in the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 2, showing a modified example of the display system, the decorative member, and the decorative sheet.
  • FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 2 and showing another modification of the display system and the decorative sheet.
  • FIG. 26 is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 2 and showing still another modification of the display system and the decorative sheet.
  • FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 1, showing still another modification of the display system and the decorative member.
  • FIG. 28 is a graph showing the relationship between the arrangement ratio of the unit recesses and the ten-point average roughness Rz along the longitudinal direction of the linear element.
  • 29A is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 17 and showing another example of the method for manufacturing the decorative member.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 17 and showing another example of the method for manufacturing the decorative member.
  • FIG. 29B is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 18 and showing another example of the manufacturing method of the decorative member.
  • FIG. 29C is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 19 and showing another example of the method for manufacturing the decorative member.
  • FIG. 29D is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 20 and showing another example of the method for manufacturing the decorative member.
  • FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining the second embodiment, and is a cross-sectional view showing the display system, the decorative member, and the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 31A is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a linear pattern layer that can be included in the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 31B is a cross-sectional view showing another example of a linear pattern layer that can be included in the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the plate taken along the line AA in FIG. 9, which is a diagram for explaining the method of manufacturing the resin transfer layer using the plate.
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of a method for producing a decorative sheet, and explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate containing a decorative sheet using a resin molding layer.
  • FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative sheet, and is a diagram for explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate containing a decorative sheet using a resin-imparting layer.
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a method for producing a decorative sheet, and explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate including a decorative sheet using a resin-imparting layer.
  • FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative sheet, and is a diagram for explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate containing a decorative sheet using a resin-imparting layer.
  • FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram illustrating a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding.
  • FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram explaining a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding.
  • FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram explaining a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding.
  • FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram explaining a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding.
  • FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram illustrating a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding.
  • FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative member.
  • FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 30, showing a modified example of the display system, the decorative member, and the decorative sheet.
  • FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 30 and showing another modification of the display system and the decorative sheet.
  • FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 30 and showing still another modification of the display system and the decorative sheet.
  • FIG. 45 is a plan view showing a problem that has occurred in a conventional decorative sheet.
  • Sheet surface (film surface, plate surface) refers to the target sheet-like member (film-like, plate-like) when viewed as a whole and broadly. means the surface coinciding with the plane of the member).
  • the normal direction to a sheet-like (film-like, plate-like) member is a direction parallel to the normal or perpendicular to the sheet surface (film surface, plate surface) of the sheet-like (film-like, plate-like) member.
  • FIG. 2 An arrow pointing forward from the plane of the drawing along a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing is indicated by a dot in a circle, as shown in FIG. 2, for example.
  • An arrow directed to the depth of the paper along the direction perpendicular to the paper of the drawing is indicated, for example, by a circle with an x in it, as shown in FIG.
  • the numerical range of the parameter is any one upper limit candidate and any one lower limit value.
  • Parameter B may be A1 or greater, A2 or greater, or A3 or greater.
  • Parameter B may be A4 or less, A5 or less, or A6 or less.
  • the numerical range of the parameter B may be A1 or more and A4 or less, A1 or more and A5 or less, A1 or more and A6 or less, A2 or more and A4 or less, A2 or more and A5 or less, or A2 or more and A6 or less.
  • A3 or more and A4 or less may be sufficient, A3 or more and A5 or less may be sufficient, A3 or more and A6 or less may be sufficient.
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view schematically showing one specific example of the display system 10.
  • the display system 10 includes a light source device 12 or a display device 16 and a decorative member 20 or a decorative sheet 30 overlaid on the light source device 12 or the display device 16 .
  • the decorative member 20 includes a decorative sheet 30 and a thermoplastic resin portion 64 joined to the decorative sheet 30, as will be described later.
  • the light source device 12 or display device 16 can be in an operating state and a non-operating state.
  • Light source device 12 or display device 16 emits light in an operational state.
  • Light from the light source device 12 or the display device 16 passes through the decorative member 20 or the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the display system 10 is capable of displaying images.
  • Light source device 12 or display device 16 ceases to emit light in a non-operating state.
  • the decorative member 20 or the decorative sheet 30 may hide the light source device 12 or the display device 16 from the third direction.
  • the decorative member 20 or the decorative sheet 30 displays the design in the non-operating state.
  • the decorative member 20 or the decorative sheet 30 displays a linear pattern 35 as a design.
  • measures are taken to prevent the outline of the displayed image from blurring. According to the first and second embodiments, the contour of the image can be clearly displayed.
  • the display system 10 shown in FIG. 1 includes a decorative member 20 and a light source device 12.
  • a first embodiment and a second embodiment will be described in order below with reference to a specific example in which the display system 10 is configured by the light source device 12 and the decorative member 20 .
  • Some figures such as FIGS. 1 to 5D are common to both the first embodiment and the second embodiment.
  • the decorative member 20 and the light source device 12 are stacked in the third direction D3.
  • the light source device 12 is at least partially covered with the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 from the third direction D3. According to the display system 10 , the light source device 12 can be installed while ensuring harmony with the surroundings by the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the decorative member 20 includes a plurality of constituent elements stacked in the third direction D3. Therefore, the third direction D3 is the stacking direction.
  • the decorating member 20 and components described later that constitute the decorating member 20 spread in the first direction D1 and the second direction D2.
  • the first direction D1 and the second direction D2 are orthogonal.
  • the third direction D3 is orthogonal to the first direction D1 and also orthogonal to the second direction D2.
  • the third direction D3 is parallel to the normal direction of the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the third direction D3 is parallel to the normal direction of the below-described constituent elements that constitute the decorative member 20 .
  • the display system 10 can be applied to various uses.
  • the display system 10 may be applied to interiors and exteriors of moving bodies.
  • a mobile is a device that can move. Examples of mobile objects include automobiles, railroad vehicles, ships, and airplanes.
  • display system 10 may be applied to the interior of an automobile.
  • the display system 10 may be applied to walls, doors, ceilings, etc. as the interior of a building.
  • the display system 10 may be applied to various devices such as furniture and home appliances.
  • the light source device 12 lights up in the operating state. In the lighting state, the light source device 12 emits light.
  • the light source device 12 may be a light emitter itself such as a light emitting diode or cold cathode tube light, or may be a surface light source device in which a light emitter and an optical member are combined.
  • the wavelength range of light emitted from the light source device 12, the amount of light, the size of the light emitting surface, the light distribution characteristics, and the like can be appropriately selected according to the application of the display system 10 and the like.
  • the light source device 12 includes a surface light source device, also called a backlight.
  • the light source device 12 has a rectangular light emitting surface 12a in plan view.
  • the surface light source device may be of various types such as an edge light type or a direct type. All or part of the light emitting surface 12a may be covered with the decorative sheet 30 from the third direction D3. All or part of the light source device 12 may be covered with the decorative sheet 30 from the third direction D3.
  • the display system 10 including the light source device 12 may include the light shielding pattern sheet 66.
  • the light-shielding pattern sheet 66 includes light-shielding regions 66a and transmissive regions 66b.
  • the light shielding region 66a has a visible light shielding property.
  • the transmissive region 66b has visible light transmissivity. Light emitted from the light source device 12 is blocked by the light shielding region 66a and transmitted through the transmission region 66b.
  • an image of the same pattern as that of the transmissive area 66b can be displayed. For example, characters, patterns, symbols, marks, illustrations, characters, pictograms, etc. may be displayed as images.
  • the display system 10 displays cross, triangle and square marks.
  • the light shielding area 66a may reflect or absorb visible light.
  • the light shielding region 66a may be, for example, a resin layer containing a black pigment such as carbon black.
  • the transmissive region 66b may be an opening provided in a resin layer containing a black pigment, or may be a transparent resin portion filled in the opening. Visible light is light having a wavelength of 380 nm or more and 780 nm or less.
  • Visible light transmittance means that the total light transmittance is 2% or more, preferably 5% or more.
  • Vehicle light blocking property means that the total light transmittance is 1% or less, preferably 0.1% or less, and more preferably 0.01% or less.
  • the total luminous transmittance is the ratio (%) of the transmitted luminous flux that has passed through the measuring object to the parallel incident luminous flux.
  • the transmitted light flux includes diffusely transmitted light.
  • the total light transmittance is a value measured according to JIS K 7361 using a D65 light source. Total light transmittance is measured at an incident angle of 0°.
  • Transparent means that the total light transmittance is 2% or more, preferably 5% or more.
  • the light shielding pattern sheet 66 may be included in the decorative member 20. As shown in FIG. 24 , the light shielding pattern sheet 66 may be included in the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the display system 10 may include a display device 16 instead of the light source device 12.
  • the display device 16 displays an image in an operating state. In the display state, the display device 16 emits image light.
  • Display device 16 may include various devices capable of displaying images.
  • Display device 16 may include a display surface 16a on which an image is formed. All or part of the display surface 16a may be covered with the decorative sheet 30 from the third direction D3. All or part of the display device 16 may be covered with the decorative sheet 30 from the third direction D3.
  • the display device 16 may include the light source device 12 and the light shielding pattern sheet 66.
  • This display device 16 can display characters, numbers, patterns, colored patterns, symbols, marks, illustrations, characters, pictograms, etc. as images.
  • the display device 16 may be a dot matrix display device.
  • a dot-matrix display device has a plurality of pixels forming each dot. This display device can display a desired image by controlling the light emission state of each pixel. This display device may display either still images or moving images. Examples of the display device 16 include a liquid crystal display device and an electroluminescence display device also called an EL display device.
  • the display device 16 includes a transmissive display panel 17 and a surface light source device 12 that planarly illuminates the display panel 17 from behind.
  • a liquid crystal display panel is exemplified as the transmissive display panel 17 .
  • the surface light source device 12 may be various devices such as an edge light type and a direct type.
  • the decorative member 20 includes a decorative sheet 30 and a thermoplastic resin portion 64 joined to the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the decorative member 20 may contain further components.
  • the decorative member 20 shown in FIG. 2 further includes a light shielding pattern sheet 66.
  • the thermoplastic resin portion 64 is positioned between the decorative sheet 30 and the light shielding pattern sheet 66 in the third direction D3.
  • the light-shielding pattern sheet 66 includes the light-shielding region 66a and the transmissive region 66b, as described above.
  • a separately prepared light shielding pattern sheet 66 may be bonded to the thermoplastic resin portion 64 by a bonding layer containing an adhesive or adhesive material.
  • the light-shielding pattern sheet 66 may be formed on the thermoplastic resin portion 64 by applying and drying a resin composition on the thermoplastic resin portion 64 .
  • thermoplastic resin portion 64 is positioned between the decorative sheet 30 and the light source device 12 or the display device 16 in the third direction D3.
  • the decorative sheet 30 may be positioned between the thermoplastic resin portion 64 and the light source device 12 or the display device 16 in the third direction D3.
  • Light from the light source device 12 and the display device 16 can pass through the thermoplastic resin portion 64 .
  • the thermoplastic resin portion 64 may be transparent.
  • the thermoplastic resin portion 64 may be made by injection molding, as described later. By reinforcing the decorative sheet 30 with the thermoplastic resin portion 64, the application range of the decorative sheet 30 is expanded.
  • the thermoplastic resin contained in the thermoplastic resin portion 64 include polycarbonate, acrylic resin such as polymethyl methacrylate, and ABS (acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene copolymer).
  • the thickness of the thermoplastic resin portion 64 in the third direction D3 is appropriately selected according to the application of the decorative member 20 and the like.
  • the thickness of the thermoplastic resin portion 64 in the third direction D3 may be 100 ⁇ m or more, 200 ⁇ m or more, or 500 ⁇ m or more.
  • the thickness of the thermoplastic resin portion 64 in the third direction D3 may be 5000 ⁇ m or less, 4000 ⁇ m or less, or 3000 ⁇ m or less.
  • the decorative sheet 30 displays the design.
  • the decorative sheet 30 allows transmission of light from the light source device 12 and the display device 16 in a state of being superimposed on the light source device 12 and the display device 16, thereby enabling transmission observation of an image.
  • the total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30 may be 5% or more, 10% or more, 15% or more, or 20% or more.
  • the decorative sheet 30 displays the design.
  • the decorative sheet 30 imparts design to the display system 10 .
  • the decorative sheet 30 imparts designability to the decorative member 20 or members and places to which the decorative sheet 30 is applied.
  • the total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30 may be 90% or less, 80% or less, 70% or less, 60% or less, or 50%. It may be less than or equal to 45% or less, or 40% or less.
  • the decorative sheet 30 enables rich design expression. By setting the upper limit of the total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30, a metallic texture can be expressed.
  • the total light transmittance is a value measured using a D65 light source in accordance with JIS K 7361. Total light transmittance is measured at an incident angle of 0°.
  • the total light transmittance is the total light transmittance measured in the transmission region 66b.
  • the thickness of the decorative sheet 30 in the third direction D3 is appropriately selected according to the use of the decorative member 20 and the like.
  • the thickness of the decorative sheet 30 in the third direction D3 may be 3 ⁇ m or more, or may be 4 ⁇ m or more.
  • the thickness of the decorative sheet 30 in the third direction D3 may be 500 ⁇ m or less, 300 ⁇ m or less, or 50 ⁇ m or less.
  • the decorative sheet 30 includes a linear pattern layer 40. As shown in FIG. 2, the decorative sheet 30 includes a linear pattern layer 40. As shown in FIG. The decorative sheet 30 may contain components other than the linear pattern layer 40 .
  • the decorative sheet 30 shown in FIG. 2 includes a linear pattern layer 40 as well as a joining layer 62 and a design layer 60 . In the example shown in FIG. 2, the linear pattern layer 40, the bonding layer 62 and the design layer 60 are arranged in this order.
  • the design layer 60 and the bonding layer 62 are positioned between the linear pattern layer 40 and the thermoplastic resin portion 64 in the third direction D3.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 may form the surfaces of the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 .
  • the linear pattern layer 40 displays the linear pattern 35.
  • the linear pattern 35 is a linear pattern.
  • Linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 .
  • a plurality of linear elements 45 are arranged in one direction. One direction is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • Each linear element 45 extends in the other direction crossing the one direction.
  • Each linear element 45 may extend in the other direction perpendicular to the one direction.
  • Each linear element 45 has a longitudinal direction, the other direction being the longitudinal direction.
  • Each linear element 45 elongates in the other longitudinal direction.
  • the plurality of linear elements 45 may extend generally parallel.
  • a linear pattern 35 is represented by a set of a plurality of linear elements 45 .
  • a hairline pattern and a spin pattern are exemplified as the linear pattern 35 . 3 and 4 show an example of a hairline pattern.
  • the linear elements 45 linearly extend in the longitudinal direction (the other direction) orthogonal to the arrangement direction (the one direction).
  • the linear elements 45 are arranged in the second direction D2, which is the arrangement direction (one direction).
  • Each linear element 45 extends linearly in a first direction D1 as the longitudinal direction (the other direction).
  • FIG. 5A shows an example of a spin pattern.
  • the arrangement direction (one direction) of the plurality of linear elements 45 is the radial direction or the radial direction centering on one middle position.
  • the longitudinal direction (the other direction) of the linear element 45 is the circumferential direction centered on one intermediate position.
  • Each linear element 45 extends in a curved line.
  • the linear elements 45 extend curvilinearly along concentric arcs centered at one intermediate position.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 may include multiple spin patterns.
  • the center position of one spin pattern may be different from the center position of one spin pattern.
  • the linear element 45 extending in a predetermined direction means that the linear element 45 extends in a predetermined direction (another direction) at any position along its entire length in a strict sense. do not.
  • the angle formed by the extending direction at each position of the linear element 45 with respect to a predetermined direction (other direction) is preferably ⁇ 15° or less, more preferably ⁇ 10° or less, It is more preferable that the angle is ⁇ 5° or less.
  • the angle formed by the direction connecting both ends of the linear elements 45 with respect to the predetermined direction (another direction) is ⁇ 10° or less. ⁇ 5° or less is more preferable, and ⁇ 3° or less is even more preferable.
  • That the linear elements 45 are elongated means that the ratio of the total length to the width of the linear elements 45 is 2 or more, preferably 10 or more, more preferably 20 or more.
  • the total length of the linear element 45 is the length ( ⁇ m) along the longitudinal direction (other direction) of the linear element 45 .
  • the width of the linear elements 45 is the length ( ⁇ m) along the arrangement direction (one direction) of the linear elements 45 .
  • the linear pattern 35 may be a wood grain pattern.
  • the wood grain pattern is a pattern imitating the cross section of wood, and expresses the cross section of the wood.
  • the linear elements 45 may be portions imitating conduit grooves, that is, parts expressing conduit grooves.
  • the linear element 45 may be a portion that imitates the early wood part in the annual ring pattern, that is, a part that expresses the early wood part.
  • the linear element 45 may be a portion that imitates the latewood portion in the annual ring pattern, that is, a portion that expresses the latewood portion.
  • the linear pattern 35 may be a woven pattern.
  • a woven pattern is a pattern imitating a woven fabric, and expresses the woven fabric.
  • a textile is a product obtained by weaving fibers. Fibers are thread-like substances.
  • the linear elements 45 may be portions imitating fibers, that is, portions representing fibers.
  • the textile pattern may be a cloth pattern that expresses a cloth obtained by weaving threads such as vegetable fibers.
  • the linear elements 45 may represent plant fibers by simulating plant fibers.
  • the fabric pattern as the cloth pattern may be a denim pattern representing denim. Denim is a fabric obtained by weaving warp and weft threads. A warp thread passes over a plurality of weft threads, for example two or three weft threads, and under one weft thread. The warp threads are dyed.
  • the linear elements 45 may be portions imitating the warp and weft, that is, portions expressing the warp and weft.
  • the woven pattern may be a carbon pattern obtained by weaving carbon fibers. In the carbon pattern, the linear elements 45 may be carbon fibers.
  • the length of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction (other direction) may be 20 ⁇ m or more, 50 ⁇ m or more, or 100 ⁇ m or more.
  • the length of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction (the other direction) may be 2 m or less, 1 m or less, 0.5 m or less, or 0.1 m or less.
  • the width along the arrangement direction (one direction) of the linear elements 45 may be 10 ⁇ m or more, 15 ⁇ m or more, or 20 ⁇ m or more.
  • the width along the arrangement direction (one direction) of the linear elements 45 may be 1000 ⁇ m or less, 500 ⁇ m or less, or 300 ⁇ m or less.
  • Each linear element 45 may be a linear protrusion 45A or a linear recess 45B. As shown in FIG. 2, even if the average height in the third direction D3 differs between two linear elements 45 adjacent in the second direction D2, which is the arrangement direction (one direction) of the linear elements 45, good. Thereby, two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example) may be identified.
  • Each linear element 45 may include multiple unit elements 48 .
  • the unit elements 48 may be unit convex portions 48A or unit concave portions 48B.
  • the unit convex portion 48A and the unit concave portion 48B are distinguished by their position (height) in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 (the third direction D3 in the illustrated example).
  • a reference position (reference height) in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is set, and the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B are distinguished based on the reference position.
  • a unit element 48 protruding closer to the observer than the reference position in the normal direction is the unit convex portion 48A.
  • the unit element 48 that is recessed away from the viewer from the reference position becomes the unit recess 48B.
  • the reference position is the average position (average height) of the linear pattern layer 40 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 .
  • linear protrusions 45A or linear recesses 45B By relative comparison of the average position (average height) of the linear elements 45 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 (the third direction D3 in the illustrated example), two linear elements 45 adjacent in the arrangement direction are , linear protrusions 45A or linear recesses 45B.
  • a reference position (reference height) in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is set, and the linear protrusions 45A and the linear recesses 45B are distinguished based on the reference height.
  • Linear elements 45 whose average position (average height) is closer to the observer than the reference position in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 are linear projections 45A.
  • Linear elements 45 whose average position (average height) is lower than the reference position in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 and which are farther from the observer are linear concave portions 45B.
  • the reference position is the average position (average height) of the linear pattern layer 40 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the average position (average height) of the linear pattern layer 40 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is specified using a scanning white interferometer (model number New View 6300) manufactured by Zygo Corporation. According to the scanning white light interferometer, the average position in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 can be measured for the measurement target area.
  • the average position of the measurement target area is measured at 20 measurement positions. From the 20 measurements obtained, 10 measurements, excluding the 1st to 5th largest measurements and the 5 smallest measurements 1st to 5th smallest to select. The average value of the ten selected measurement values is taken as the average position of the linear pattern layer 40 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the measurement target area is a 216 ⁇ m square (216 ⁇ m ⁇ 216 ⁇ m) area.
  • FIG. 6 is a plan view showing linear protrusions 45A and linear recesses 45B adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example).
  • FIG. 6 shows only a portion of the two linear elements 45 in the longitudinal direction (the first direction D1 in the illustrated example).
  • the height in the third direction D3 is indicated by color.
  • the white portion indicates the unit convex portion 48A
  • the black portion indicates the unit concave portion 48B.
  • a linear region 46 in which one linear element 45 is arranged is divided into a large number of unit regions 49 .
  • a large number of unit areas 49 are set by dividing each linear area 46 .
  • Unit regions 49 are arranged two-dimensionally in each linear region 46 .
  • a two-dimensional array means arrayed in each of two non-parallel directions.
  • the unit regions 49 are arranged in a first direction D1 and a second direction D2 that are orthogonal to each other.
  • One unit element 48 is assigned to each unit area 49 . Therefore, in each linear element 45, unit elements 48 are arranged two-dimensionally. In the illustrated example, the unit elements 48 are arranged in both the first direction D1 and the second direction D2.
  • the unit elements 48 and the unit regions 49 may be arranged in a direction non-parallel to the longitudinal direction D1 of the linear element 45 .
  • the unit elements 48 and the unit regions 49 may be arranged in a direction non-parallel to the arrangement direction D2 of the linear elements 45 .
  • the arrangement ratio of the unit convex portions 48A may differ between two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). Thereby, the average height of two adjacent linear elements 45 in the third direction D3 is different, and the two adjacent linear elements 45 can be distinguished from each other.
  • the arrangement ratio means the ratio (%) of the area where the unit convex portions 48A included in the linear element 45 are arranged with respect to the area where one linear element 45 is arranged. Therefore, assuming that the area in which the linear elements 45 are arranged is the linear area 46, between two linear areas 46 adjacent in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example), the linear area The arrangement ratio of the unit convex portions 48A within 46 may be different.
  • the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B may differ between two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). Between two linear regions 46 adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example), the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B within the linear region 46 may differ. Thereby, the average height of two adjacent linear elements 45 in the third direction D3 is different, and the two adjacent linear elements 45 can be distinguished from each other.
  • At least one of the two linear elements 45 adjacent in the arrangement direction may include the unit convex portion 48A and the other may include the unit concave portion 48B.
  • the average position (average height) in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 differs between the two linear elements 45, and the two linear elements 45 may be distinguished from each other.
  • one or both of the two linear elements 45 adjacent in the arrangement direction may include both the unit convex portion 48A and the unit concave portion 48B. Thereby, the average positions (average heights) in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 are different between the two linear elements 45 and may be distinguished from each other.
  • the average position (average height) of the linear elements 45 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is specified using a scanning white interferometer (model number New View 6300) manufactured by Zygo Corporation. According to the scanning white light interferometer, the average position in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 can be measured for the measurement target area. At five measurement positions in the target linear element 45, the average position of the measurement target area is measured, and the average value of the three measurement values excluding the maximum measurement value and the minimum measurement value is It is the average position of the elements 45 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the measurement target area is a 216 ⁇ m square (216 ⁇ m ⁇ 216 ⁇ m) area. If the measurement target area of 216 ⁇ m square cannot be set because the linear element 45 is thin or the like, a square measurement target area as large as possible centered on the measurement position is set.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 includes a sheet-like base portion 43 and unit convex portions 48A projecting from the base portion 43 in the third direction D3.
  • the base portion 43 is exposed by providing the unit concave portion 48B.
  • the base portion 43 and the unit convex portion 48A may be integrally molded by resin molding. That is, the base portion 43 and the unit convex portion 48A may be seamlessly connected.
  • FIG. 7A is a schematic enlarged view of a portion of the linear region 46 and the linear element 45 shown in FIG.
  • the unit area 49 has a rectangular shape.
  • the unit area 49 may have a square shape.
  • the unit convex portion 48A is a rectangular prism-shaped convex portion.
  • the unit recessed portion 48B is a square prism-shaped recessed portion.
  • the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 and the unit regions 49 is not particularly limited.
  • the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 and the unit regions 49 is not limited to the illustrated example, and may be inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the linear elements 45 (in the illustrated example, the first direction D1).
  • the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 and the unit regions 49 may be inclined with respect to the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example).
  • the unitary elements 48 and unitary regions 49 may not be in the illustrated square array.
  • the unit elements 48 and the unit regions 49 may be arranged in two directions that are inclined with respect to each other.
  • the unitary elements 48 and the unitary regions 49 may be arranged in three directions slanted at 60° with respect to each other. That is, the unit elements 48 and the unit regions 49 may be arranged in a honeycomb pattern.
  • the shape of the unit area 49 in plan view is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of covering the unit areas 49 without gaps, the shape of the unit areas 49 in plan view may be square or rectangular, as shown in FIG. 7A.
  • the shape of the unit region 49 in plan view may be a polygonal shape such as a triangular shape, a right-angled isosceles triangular shape, an equilateral triangular shape, a hexagonal shape, or a regular hexagonal shape.
  • the shape of the unit area 49 in plan view may be circular or elliptical.
  • the unit element 48 extends over the entire corresponding unit area 49 .
  • two unit convex portions 48A adjacent in the arrangement direction are in contact with each other to form one convex portion.
  • two unit recesses 48B adjacent in the arrangement direction are in contact with each other to form one recess.
  • the unit element 48 may be provided in a partial area of one corresponding unit area 49 .
  • unit elements 48 provided in adjacent unit areas 49 may be spaced apart from each other.
  • the unit elements 48 are quadrangular prism-shaped recesses or protrusions.
  • the shape of the unit element 48 is not particularly limited.
  • the unit element 48 may be a cone-shaped recess or protrusion.
  • the unit convex portion 48A and the unit concave portion 48B may not be convex portions and concave portions having complementary shapes.
  • a plurality of unit convex portions 48A may have different shapes.
  • a plurality of unit recesses 48B may have different shapes.
  • the uneven structure 41 configured by the unit elements 48 does not have to have two levels of height.
  • the concave-convex structure 41 may have three or more steps of height by the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B.
  • the concave-convex structure 41 may have heights that continuously change due to the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B.
  • the linear element 45 has side walls 42 formed by unit convex portions 48A and unit concave portions 48B.
  • the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B are arranged two-dimensionally. Therefore, the side walls 42 are two-dimensionally arranged within one linear element 45 (linear region 46).
  • the sidewalls 42 face in various directions.
  • the linear element 45 includes sidewalls 42A that are non-parallel to the longitudinal direction (the first direction D1 in the illustrated example), for example sidewalls 42A facing the longitudinal direction.
  • the linear element 45 may include side walls 42A facing in the longitudinal direction in the middle part in the longitudinal direction, in other words, in addition to both ends in the longitudinal direction.
  • the longitudinally facing side walls 42A may be distributed at various positions between the longitudinal ends of the linear element 45 .
  • the linear elements 45 may include side walls 42A facing the longitudinal direction in the middle portion in the arrangement direction, in other words, other than both ends in the arrangement direction. Side walls 42A facing the longitudinal direction may be dispersed at various positions between both ends of the linear elements 45 in the arrangement direction.
  • the linear elements 45 include side walls 42B non-parallel to the arrangement direction (second direction D2 in the illustrated example), that is, side walls 42B facing the longitudinal direction.
  • the linear elements 45 may include sidewalls 42B facing the arrangement direction in the middle portion in the arrangement direction, in other words, other than both ends in the arrangement direction.
  • the side walls 42B facing the arrangement direction may be dispersed at various positions between both ends of the linear elements 45 in the arrangement direction.
  • the linear element 45 may include side walls 42B facing the arrangement direction at the intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction, in other words, other than at both ends in the longitudinal direction.
  • the side walls 42A facing the arrangement direction may be dispersed at various positions between both ends of the linear elements 45 in the longitudinal direction.
  • lower limits may be set for the wall portion inclination angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2.
  • a lower limit may be set for the wall portion inclination angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 (°).
  • the wall portion inclination angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 are indices representing the magnitude of the inclination angles of the side walls 42A and 42B with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30.
  • FIG. By setting the lower limits of the wall portion inclination angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2, the side walls 42A and 42B are greatly inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 . This weakens the diffusion on the side walls 42A and 42B and suppresses bleeding.
  • the wall portion inclination angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 may be 66° or more, 73° or more, or 76° or more.
  • upper limits may be set for the wall inclination angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2.
  • the wall portion inclination angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 may be 87° or less.
  • the wall inclination angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 are specified in a cross section along the direction in which the unit elements 48 are arranged.
  • the wall portion inclination angle ⁇ 1 is measured in a cross section parallel to both the normal direction of the decorative sheet and the first direction D1.
  • the wall portion inclination angle ⁇ 2 is measured in a cross section parallel to both the normal direction of the decorative sheet and the second direction D2.
  • the wall inclination angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 are angles (°) between a straight line SXL passing through the first position PX and the second position PY on the unit element 48 and the normal direction D3.
  • the wall inclination angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 are 0° or more and 90° or less.
  • the first position PX is lower than the highest position HXP by 10% of the height difference HXD between the highest position HXP of the unit convex portion 48A crossed by the measurement section and the lowest position LXP of the unit concave portion 48B adjacent to the unit convex portion 48A. This is the position on the side wall 42A of the unit convex portion 48A.
  • the second position PY is a position on the side wall 42B of the unit concave portion 48B which is higher than the lowest position LXP by 10% of the height difference HXD.
  • the first position PX is positioned between the highest position HXP and the lowest position LXP in one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 .
  • a plurality of positions lower than the highest position HXP by 10% of the height difference HXD can exist between the highest position HXP and the lowest position LXP in the arrangement direction of the unit element 48 .
  • the position closest to the lowest position LXP in the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 is the first position PX.
  • the second position PY is positioned between the highest position HXP and the lowest position LXP in one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 .
  • a plurality of positions higher than the lowest position LXP by 10% of the height difference HXD can exist between the highest position HXP and the lowest position LXP in the arrangement direction of the unit element 48 .
  • the position closest to the highest position HXP in the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 is the second position PY.
  • the maximum length of the unit element 48, the unit convex portion 48A and the unit concave portion 48B may be 50 ⁇ m or less, 40 ⁇ m or less, 30 ⁇ m or less, or 25 ⁇ m or less.
  • the maximum length of the unit element 48, the unit convex portion 48A, and the unit concave portion 48B may be 1 ⁇ m or longer, 2 ⁇ m or longer, 4 ⁇ m or longer, or 6 ⁇ m or longer.
  • the maximum lengths of the unit elements 48, the unit convex portions 48A, and the unit concave portions 48B are maximum lengths when observed from the third direction D3, in other words, when projected onto a plane orthogonal to the third direction D3.
  • the individual unit elements 48 are suppressed from being observed, and the linear elements are observed as a continuous line. .
  • the lower limits for the maximum lengths of the unit elements 48, the unit convex portions 48A, and the unit concave portions 48B it is possible to prevent the individual unit elements 48 from being unintentionally connected during manufacturing.
  • the height difference of the uneven structure 41 formed by the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B may be 0.3 ⁇ m or more, 0.5 ⁇ m or more, or 1 ⁇ m or more.
  • the height difference of the uneven structure 41 formed by the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B may be 20 ⁇ m or less, 10 ⁇ m or less, or 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the height difference of the uneven structure 41 is the difference between the highest position and the lowest position along the third direction D3.
  • an upper limit may be set for Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 .
  • Rz is the ten-point average roughness ( ⁇ m) according to JISB0601-1994.
  • the ten-point average roughness Rz is a value measured using a scanning white light interferometer (NewView6300) manufactured by Zygo Corporation.
  • the measurement area in this measuring device is 1076 ⁇ m square, and the “cylinder” set in the measuring device is used to remove the undulation component.
  • the wall inclination angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 described above are calculated from the surface shape of the linear pattern layer 40 measured using a scanning white light interferometer (New View 6300) manufactured by Zygo Corporation.
  • the Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 may be 5.5 ⁇ m or less, 5 ⁇ m or less, 4.5 ⁇ m or less, 4 ⁇ m or less, or 3 ⁇ m or less.
  • the Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 is specified by measuring Rz at five points and averaging the three measurements excluding the maximum and minimum measurements.
  • the lower limit of Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 is not particularly set.
  • Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 may be greater than 0 ⁇ m or 1 ⁇ m or more.
  • a lower limit may be set for the difference in Rz of the linear elements 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear elements 45 between two adjacent linear elements 45 .
  • the difference in Rz of the linear elements 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear elements 45 between two adjacent linear elements 45 may be 1 ⁇ m or more, 1.5 ⁇ m or more, 2 ⁇ m or more, or 2 ⁇ m or more. .5 ⁇ m or more, 3 ⁇ m or more, or 4 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit of the difference in Rz of the linear elements 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear elements 45 between two adjacent linear elements 45 is not particularly set.
  • the difference in Rz of the linear elements 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear elements 45 between two adjacent linear elements 45 may be 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the Rz of the linear elements 45 along the longitudinal direction is the arrangement ratio (%) of the unit convex portions 48A and the arrangement of the unit concave portions 48B. It can be adjusted by the ratio (%).
  • FIG. 28 is a graph showing the relationship between the arrangement ratio (%) of the unit concave portions 48B and the Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction.
  • the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B in the linear element 45 may be greater than 0% and 40% or less, may be greater than 0% and 35% or less, or may be greater than 0% and 30%. % or less, greater than 0% and 25% or less, greater than 0% and 20% or less, or greater than 0% and 15% or less.
  • the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B in the linear element 45 may be 60% or more and less than 100%, may be 65% or more and less than 100%, or may be 70% or more. It may be less than 100%, or 80% or more and less than 100%.
  • the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B may be larger than the arrangement ratio of the unit convex portions 48A.
  • the arrangement ratio of the unit recesses 48B may be greater than 50%.
  • FIG. 28 by setting the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B and the arrangement ratio of the unit convex portions 48A in this way, it is possible to suppress the Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction from becoming too large. As a result, blurring of the contour of the image can be suppressed.
  • the unit recesses 48B may not be arranged continuously in the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48.
  • the unit convex portions 48A may not be arranged continuously in the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48.
  • FIG. For example, assume that the unit elements 48 are arranged in a first arrangement direction (eg, first direction D1) and in a second arrangement direction (eg, second direction D2) non-parallel to the first arrangement direction.
  • the unit elements 48 adjacent to any unit recesses 48B in the first arrangement direction are the unit protrusions 48A, and the unit recesses 48B and Unit elements 48 adjacent to each other in the second arrangement direction may be unit convex portions 48A.
  • the ratio of the unit recesses 48B in the linear pattern layer 40 is 60% or more
  • the unit elements 48 adjacent to the arbitrary unit protrusions 48A in the first arrangement direction are the unit recesses 48B
  • the unit element 48 adjacent to the portion 48A in the second arrangement direction may be the unit concave portion 48B.
  • the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B function to express the matt feeling and the gloss feeling. As a result, two adjacent linear elements 45 can be distinguished and observed, and the linear pattern 35 can be clearly observed.
  • the decorative sheet 30 may include a bonding layer 62 for the purpose of improving adhesion between constituent elements.
  • the bonding layer 62 improves adhesion between the linear pattern layer 40 and the design layer 60 .
  • the bonding layer 62 can be formed using various adhesives and adhesives such as acrylic resin and epoxy resin.
  • the thickness of the bonding layer 62 may be, for example, 1 ⁇ m or more and 80 ⁇ m or less.
  • the bonding layer 62 may be omitted.
  • the decorative sheet 30 may include a design layer 60 for the purpose of improving the design.
  • the design layer 60 may be a colored layer as a monochromatic uniform layer.
  • the design layer 60 may be a pattern layer having a pattern.
  • the design layer 60 may be a metal layer containing metal.
  • the design layer 60 may include two or more of a colored layer, a pattern layer and a metal layer.
  • the picture layer may display figures, patterns, designs, colors, pictures, photographs, characters, marks, pictograms, letters and numbers.
  • the pattern layer may perform design expression to display the background. For example, as patterns that can harmonize the surrounding environment in which the display system 10, the decorative member 20, and the decorative sheet 30 are provided, and the decorative sheet, there are wood grain patterns, marble patterns, metallic textures, and geometric patterns. , the pattern layer may be displayed.
  • the colored layer and pattern layer can be made from a coating film of a resin composition.
  • the resin composition may contain a binder resin, a colorant, a solvent, a stabilizer, a plasticizer, a catalyst, a curing agent, an ultraviolet absorber, a light stabilizer, and the like. Colorants may be pigments or dyes.
  • the thickness of the colored layer and pattern layer may be 0.5 ⁇ m or more and 50 ⁇ m or less, 1 ⁇ m or more and 20 ⁇ m or less, or 2 ⁇ m or more and 10 ⁇ m or less.
  • the metal layer may contain one or more of metal elements such as gold, silver, copper, tin, iron, nickel, chromium, and cobalt.
  • Metal layers may include alloys such as brass, bronze, stainless steel, and the like.
  • the thickness of the metal layer may be about 0.1 ⁇ m to 1 ⁇ m.
  • a plate 90 corresponding to the linear pattern 35 to be manufactured is produced.
  • 9 and 12 show an example of the plate 90.
  • FIG. The plate 90 shown in FIG. 9 is a so-called roll plate.
  • the plate 90 has a cylindrical outer shape.
  • the plate 90 is held rotatably around the cylindrical central axis CA.
  • the plate 90 has a plate surface 91 on its cylindrical outer peripheral surface.
  • the plate surface 91 is an uneven surface corresponding to the linear pattern to be transferred.
  • the plate surface 91 is an uneven surface corresponding to the uneven structure 41 of the linear pattern layer 40 displaying the linear pattern 35 .
  • the plate surface 91 of the plate 90 includes a plurality of plate linear elements 92 arranged in an axial direction parallel to the central axis CA.
  • Each plate-like element 92 is a plate-like protrusion 92A or a plate-like recess 92B.
  • the plate line-shaped convex portion 92A protrudes outward away from the central axis CA in the radial direction perpendicular to the central axis CA.
  • the stencil-shaped concave portion 92B is recessed inward and close to the central axis CA in the radial direction perpendicular to the central axis CA.
  • the plate linear projections 92A and the plate linear recesses 92B are alternately arranged in the axial direction.
  • the plate-like elements 92 are elongated in the circumferential direction about the central axis CA.
  • Each plate line element 92 includes plate unit elements 93 arranged two-dimensionally.
  • the plate line element 92 includes a plurality of plate unit elements 93 respectively arranged in two non-parallel directions along the plate surface 91 .
  • the plate unit element 93 is a plate unit convex portion 93A or a plate unit concave portion 93B.
  • the plate unit convex portion 93A protrudes radially outward.
  • the plate line-shaped recess 92B is recessed inward in the radial direction.
  • the plate surface 91 of the plate 90 is manufactured according to the linear pattern to be manufactured.
  • multi-tone grayscale image data 95 for the linear pattern 35 is prepared.
  • the multi-tone grayscale image data 95 is grayscale data.
  • the multi-tone grayscale image data 95 is data of three or more tones.
  • the image data 95 can be prepared by scanning the linear pattern 35 to be manufactured in grayscale.
  • FIG. 10 shows an example of the image data 95. As shown in FIG. Image data 95 shown in FIG. 10 is data relating to a hairline pattern.
  • a pixel area 97 corresponding to each pixel 96 of the image data 95 is set.
  • the pixel area 97 is an area on the metal plate forming the plate 90 and finally becomes an area on the plate surface 91 .
  • a large number of pixel regions 97 are distributed in the same arrangement as the pixels 96 included in the image data 95 .
  • Each pixel region 97 is then divided into a plurality of sub-regions 98, as shown in FIG.
  • the number of sub-regions 98 corresponding to one pixel region 97 is not particularly limited.
  • the number of sub-regions 98 corresponding to one pixel region 97 may be two, four, eight, or sixteen.
  • Each subregion 98 is then assigned to either a first region 99a or a second region 99b.
  • the sub-region 98 displayed in white is set as the first area 99a.
  • a sub-region 98 displayed in black and white is set as a second section 99b.
  • the first area 99a and the second area 99b may be randomly allocated.
  • the proportion of the first area in each pixel area 97 may be determined according to the gradation of the pixel.
  • the proportion of the second area in each pixel area 97 may be determined according to the gradation of the pixel.
  • the image data 95 has 256 levels of gradation
  • all 16 sub-regions 98 may be used as the first regions 99a.
  • the image data 95 has 256 levels of gradation
  • one of the 16 sub-regions 98 may be used as the second region 99b.
  • the image data 95 has 256 levels of gradation
  • the gradation of the pixel 96 is 32 or more and 47 or less
  • one of the 16 sub-regions 98 may be used as the second region 99b.
  • the percentage of the first area in each pixel region 97 corresponding to that pixel may vary from 0% to 100%.
  • the percentage of the first area in each pixel region 97 corresponding to that pixel is increased from 0% to 40% and from 60% to 100%. You can change it. That is, the ratio of the first area in the pixel area 97 may be set so as not to be within the range of more than 40% and less than 60%. As yet another example, as the gradation of a pixel increases from 0 to maximum gradation, the percentage of the first area in each pixel region 97 corresponding to that pixel may vary from 0% to 40%. .
  • the proportion of the first area in each pixel region 97 corresponding to that pixel may vary from 60% to 100%. According to these examples, it is possible to obtain a plate used for producing the linear pattern layer 40 in which the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B is 40% or less or 60% or more. In other words, it is possible to obtain a plate used for producing the linear pattern layer 40 in which the arrangement ratio of the unit convex portions 48A is 40% or less or 60% or more.
  • This kind of processing corresponds to converting the grayscale to monochrome two-tone.
  • Monochrome 2-gradation is not limited to the example described above, and an error diffusion method or a halftone screen may be employed.
  • the error diffusion method when the ratio of the first regions 99a is 40% or less, in other words, when the ratio of the second regions 99b is 60% or more, the first regions 99a are continuous along the arrangement direction. You can avoid it. Further, when the ratio of the first regions 99a is 60% or more, in other words, when the ratio of the second regions 99b is 40% or less, the second regions 99b can be made discontinuous along the arrangement direction.
  • the unit convex portions 48A can be prevented from continuing in the arrangement direction.
  • the first area 99a and the second area 99b can be laid out in a region coextensive with the image data 95 of the linear pattern 35. Then, the metal surface that forms the plate surface 91 is etched in the same pattern as the arrangement pattern of the second areas 99b. A recess is not formed in the metal surface at a position corresponding to the first area 99a.
  • the recesses at positions corresponding to the second areas 99b may be formed by etching using photolithography technology.
  • a recess at a position corresponding to the second area 99b may be formed by laser drawing.
  • the concave portions formed in this manner constitute the plate unit concave portions 93B included in each of the plate linear elements 92 of the printing plate surface 91 .
  • a position corresponding to the first area 99a where no recess is formed constitutes a plate unit convex portion 93A included in each plate linear element 92 of the plate surface 91. As shown in FIG.
  • the metal surface forming the printing plate may be one main surface of a copper plate.
  • a metal plate such as a copper plate constitutes the plate surface 91 by being attached to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical core.
  • the surface of the copper plate may be chrome plated after the formation of the uneven surface is completed.
  • the blasting treatment is performed before the chrome plating treatment described above.
  • the pitch of the fine unevenness provided on the plate surface 91 may be shorter than the arrangement pitch of the plate-unit elements 93 .
  • the height difference of the fine unevenness provided on the plate surface 91 may be smaller than the height difference of the plate unit elements 93 .
  • the degree of fine unevenness can be adjusted by the type, size, and shape of the abrasive used in the blasting process, the ejection conditions of the abrasive, and the like. As will be described later with reference to FIG.
  • FIG. 23 by providing fine unevenness to the plate surface 91, fine unevenness can be imparted to the surface of the linear element 45.
  • FIG. The fine unevenness of the linear elements 45 can weaken the lens effect and light guiding action of the linear elements 45 .
  • the minute unevenness of the linear elements 45 promotes the diffusion of light incident on the linear pattern layer 40, making the linear pattern 35 clearer.
  • the plate 90 is produced as described above. Next, using the produced plate, the decorative sheet 30 is produced.
  • the plate 90 is used to fabricate the resin imprint layer 80 .
  • An uneven structure 81 obtained by transferring the unevenness of the plate surface 91 is provided to the resin imprinting layer 80 .
  • Concavo-convex structure 81 has a configuration complementary to plate surface 91 .
  • the resin transfer layer 80 may be produced using the plate 90 as follows.
  • the plate 90 is rotated around the central axis CA.
  • a long base material 70 is supplied toward the plate 90 .
  • an uncured curable resin composition is supplied between the substrate 70 and the plate 90 .
  • a resin film such as a polyethylene terephthalate film may be used.
  • an ionizing radiation curable resin composition is exemplified.
  • ionizing radiation-curable resin compositions include ultraviolet-curable resin compositions and electron beam-curable resin compositions.
  • the curable resin composition is cured between the plate 90 and the substrate 70 .
  • the ultraviolet curable resin composition is irradiated with ultraviolet rays that have passed through the base material 70 .
  • the electron beam that has passed through the substrate 70 is applied to the electron beam curable resin composition.
  • a resin transfer layer 80 is produced from the cured product of the curable resin composition.
  • the resin imprinting layer 80 is bonded to the base material 70 .
  • the resin imprint layer 80 includes a plurality of second linear elements 82 corresponding to the plate linear elements 92 .
  • the second linear elements 82 are formed corresponding to the plate linear elements 92 .
  • the plurality of second linear elements 82 are arranged in one direction.
  • Each second linear element 82 elongates in the other direction orthogonal to the one direction.
  • the second linear element 82 is a second linear protrusion 82A or a second linear recess 82B.
  • a second linear concave portion 82B is formed corresponding to the plate linear convex portion 92A.
  • a second linear protrusion 82A is formed corresponding to the plate linear recess 92B.
  • the second linear protrusions 82A and the second linear recesses 82B are alternately arranged in one direction.
  • Each second linear element 82 includes second unit elements 83 arranged two-dimensionally. That is, each second linear element 82 includes a plurality of second unit elements 83 arranged in two non-parallel directions.
  • the second unit element 83 is a second unit convex portion 83A or a second unit concave portion 83B.
  • a second unit concave portion 83B is formed corresponding to the plate unit convex portion 93A.
  • a second unit convex portion 83A is formed corresponding to the plate unit concave portion 93B.
  • the base material 70 is separated from the plate surface 91 of the plate 90.
  • the resin imprint layer 80 includes a sheet-like land portion 84 bonded to the base material 70 .
  • the land portion 84 is formed integrally with the second linear convex portion 82A.
  • the land portion 84 is exposed between the two second linear convex portions 82A at the position where the second linear concave portion 82B is provided.
  • the land portion 84 is formed integrally with the second unit convex portion 83A.
  • the land portion 84 is exposed between the two second unit recesses 83B at the position where the second unit recesses 83B are provided.
  • the first resin composition is supplied to the surface of the resin transfer layer 80 peeled off from the plate 90 that was in contact with the plate 90 to form a coating film of the first resin composition. do.
  • the coating layer 72 is formed by drying or curing the coating film of the first resin composition. Concavities and convexities corresponding to the concavo-convex structure 81 of the resin imprinting layer 80 remain on the surface of the coating layer 72 .
  • the coating layer 72 may contain a thermoplastic resin.
  • the coating layer 72 may contain a cured product of a curable resin composition.
  • the curable resin composition may be a thermosetting resin composition or an ionizing radiation curable resin composition.
  • the coating layer 72 may contain a material having releasability such as silicone.
  • the coating layer 72 functions as a release layer 73 by containing the peelable material. However, the production of the coating layer 72 may be omitted and the linear pattern layer 40 may be formed on the resin imprinting layer 80 .
  • the uneven structure 41 of the linear pattern layer 40 produced by transferring the uneven structure 81 of the resin imprint layer 80 can be smoothed.
  • the smoothness of the uneven structure 41 can be adjusted by the thickness of the coating layer 72, the viscosity of the first resin composition, the drying speed, the curing speed, and the like.
  • the thickness of the coating layer 72 may be 5% or more, 10% or more, 20% or more, or 30% or more of the height difference of the uneven structure 81 of the resin molding layer 80 .
  • the thickness of the coating layer 72 By setting the thickness of the coating layer 72 to be 5% or more of the height difference of the uneven structure 81, the lens effect and the light guiding action of the linear elements 45 can be weakened.
  • the thickness of the coating layer 72 By setting the thickness of the coating layer 72 to be 5% or more of the height difference of the concave-convex structure 81, the diffusion of incident light to the linear pattern layer 40 can be promoted and the linear pattern 35 can be made clearer.
  • a second resin composition is supplied onto the resin imprinting layer 80 and the coating layer 72 to form a coating film of the second resin composition.
  • the second resin composition may be a curable resin composition.
  • the curable resin composition may be a thermosetting resin composition or an ionizing radiation curable resin composition. Examples of ionizing radiation-curable resin compositions include ultraviolet-curable resin compositions and electron beam-curable resin compositions.
  • the curable resin composition is cured on the resin transfer layer 80 and the coating layer 72 .
  • the linear pattern layer 40 is produced from the cured product of the curable resin composition.
  • the curing treatment of the curable resin composition at this timing may be complete curing or semi-curing. If the effect treatment at this timing is semi-curing, the curing treatment may be performed at any later timing.
  • the produced linear pattern layer 40 is bonded to the resin imprinting layer 80 or the coating layer 72 .
  • a concave-convex structure 41 corresponding to the concave-convex structure 81 of the resin molding layer 80 is applied to the linear pattern layer 40 .
  • Linear elements 45 of the linear pattern layer 40 are formed corresponding to the second linear elements 82 .
  • Linear recesses 45B of the linear pattern layer 40 are formed corresponding to the second linear protrusions 82A.
  • Linear protrusions 45A of the linear pattern layer 40 are formed corresponding to the second linear recesses 82B.
  • a unit element 48 of the linear pattern layer 40 is formed corresponding to the second unit element 83 .
  • a unit concave portion 48B of the linear pattern layer 40 is formed corresponding to the second unit convex portion 83A.
  • Unit convex portions 48A of the linear pattern layer 40 are formed corresponding to the second unit concave portions 83B.
  • the base portion 43 is also formed by the cured product of the curable resin composition.
  • the base portion 43 is formed integrally with the linear convex portion 45A.
  • the base portion 43 is exposed between the two linear convex portions 45A at the position where the linear concave portion 45B is provided.
  • the base portion 43 is formed integrally with the unit convex portion 48A.
  • the base portion 43 is exposed between the two unit convex portions 48A at the position where the unit concave portion 48B is provided.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 may contain a cured product of an electron beam curable resin composition.
  • the second resin composition may be an electron beam curable resin composition.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 containing the cured product of the electron beam curable resin composition has excellent durability. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the surface of the linear pattern layer 40 including the fine uneven structure 41 from flattening due to long-term use.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 containing the cured product of the electron beam curable resin composition may contain an ultraviolet absorber and a light stabilizer in order to further improve durability.
  • the second resin composition may contain an electron beam-curable resin composition and at least one of an ultraviolet absorber and a light stabilizer.
  • the ultraviolet curable resin composition cannot contain an ultraviolet absorber depending on its curing process. Therefore, unlike the linear pattern layer containing the cured product of the ultraviolet curable resin composition, the linear pattern layer containing the cured product of the electron beam curable resin composition can contain an ultraviolet absorber.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 containing an ultraviolet absorber can further improve durability and suppress flattening during long-term use.
  • ultraviolet absorbers examples include benzotriazole-based ultraviolet absorbers, benzophenone-based ultraviolet absorbers, triazine-based ultraviolet absorbers, and hydroxyphenyltriazine-based ultraviolet absorbers.
  • light stabilizers include hindered amine light stabilizers such as piperidinyl sebacate light stabilizers.
  • a bonding layer 62 is formed over the linear pattern layer 40 .
  • the bonding layer 62 may be produced by supplying a resin composition onto the linear pattern layer 40 to form a coating film of the resin composition, and drying or curing the coating film.
  • the design layer 60 is formed over the bonding layer 62 .
  • the design layer 60 may be formed by gravure printing, screen printing, or thermal transfer printing using an ink ribbon.
  • the decorative sheet 30 is formed over the resin molding layer 80 .
  • the decorative sheet 30 is bonded to the resin molding layer 80 and the coating layer 72 .
  • the decorative sheet 30 constitutes the decorative sheet laminate 25 together with the resin imprint layer 80 .
  • the decorative sheet laminate 25 includes the decorative sheet 30, the coating layer 72, the resin molding layer 80 and the substrate 70 in order in the third direction D3.
  • the decorative member 20 is produced using the decorative sheet 30 .
  • An injection molding device 110 is prepared as shown in FIG.
  • Injection molding apparatus 110 includes mold 111 .
  • Mold 111 includes a first mold 111A and a second mold 111B.
  • the first mold 111A and the second mold 111B can be separated from each other as shown in FIG. 17 and can be close to each other as shown in FIG.
  • a cavity 112 is formed between the first die 111A and the second die 111B in the closed state in which the first die 111A and the second die 111B are in contact with each other.
  • Mold 111 has a gate 113 leading to cavity 112 .
  • the gate 113 is connected to a supply device for the injection resin 114 (not shown).
  • An injection resin 114 is supplied into the cavity 112 through the gate 113 .
  • the first mold 111A and the second mold 111B are heated by a heater (not shown) and maintained at a high temperature.
  • the decorative sheet laminate 25 is accommodated in the cavity 112 within the molding die 111 .
  • the decorative sheet laminate 25 is arranged in the second mold 111B such that the decorative sheet 30 is exposed in the cavity 112.
  • molten injection resin 114 is injected into cavity 112 through gate 113 .
  • the injected resin 114 is cooled in the cavity 112, welded to the decorative sheet 30 and solidified.
  • the thermoplastic resin portion 64 joined to the decorative sheet 30 is obtained from the solidified injected resin 114 .
  • the material of the thermoplastic resin portion 64 is as described above.
  • the first die 111A and the second die 111B are separated from each other.
  • the thermoplastic resin portion 64 is joined to the first mold 111A.
  • the base material 70 may be fixed to the second mold 111B.
  • the base material 70 and the resin transfer layer 80 are separated from the decorative sheet 30 as the first mold 111A and the second mold 111B are separated. . Peeling is promoted by the coating layer 72 functioning as a release layer 73 .
  • the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 are manufactured.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 may be hardened on the decorative member 20 removed from the mold 111 . After forming at least one of the bonding layer 62 and the design layer 60, the linear pattern layer 40 may be cured.
  • the decorative sheet 30 may be produced from the decorative sheet laminate 25 by the injection molding process shown in FIGS. 29A to 29D.
  • a pattern laminate 26 is formed on the decorative sheet laminate 25 as shown in FIG. 29A.
  • the pattern laminate 26 is formed on the surface of the decorative sheet laminate 25 opposite to the decorative sheet 30 .
  • patterned laminate 26 is formed on the surface of substrate 70 .
  • the pattern laminate 26 may be made by printing, eg silk printing. Pattern laminate 26 covers only a portion of the surface of substrate 70 .
  • the thickness of the pattern laminate 26 may be 5 ⁇ m or more and 50 ⁇ m or less. Subsequent steps may be the same as the steps described above. That is, as shown in FIG.
  • the decorative sheet laminate 25 including the pattern laminate 26 may be arranged in the cavity 112.
  • Injected resin 114 may be injected into cavity 112, as shown in FIG. 29C.
  • the thermoplastic resin portion 64 joined to the decorative sheet 30 is produced from the injection resin 114 .
  • FIG. 29D the separation of the first die 111A and the second die 111B separates the decorative sheet 30 from the decorative sheet laminate 25, and the decorative member including the decorative sheet 30 and the thermoplastic resin portion 64 is removed. 20 is obtained.
  • the injection resin 114 presses the decorative sheet laminate 25 toward the second mold 111B.
  • the surface of the decorative sheet laminate 25 on which the pattern laminate 26 is provided is flattened along the second die 111B, and unevenness corresponding to the pattern of the pattern laminate 26 is formed on the decorative sheet 30.
  • the thermoplastic resin portion 64 is joined to the decorative sheet 30 including unevenness corresponding to the pattern of the pattern laminate 26 .
  • concave portions 27 are formed in a pattern corresponding to the pattern laminate 26 in the linear pattern layer 40 of the obtained decorative member 20 .
  • the decorative member 20 can express two types of unevenness: large unevenness due to the concave portions 27 and fine unevenness due to the linear pattern layer 40 . That is, the decorative sheet 30 can express a delicate and complicated design.
  • the depth of the concave portion 27 may be 5 ⁇ m or more, 10 ⁇ m or more, or 20 ⁇ m or more.
  • the depth of the concave portion 27 may be 50 ⁇ m or less, 40 ⁇ m or less, or 30 ⁇ m or less.
  • the depth of the concave portions 27 may be two times or more, three times or more, or four times or more the height difference of the unevenness caused by the linear elements 45 in the linear pattern layer 40 .
  • the depth of the recesses 27 may be 10 times or less, 8 times or less, or 6 times or less the height difference of the unevenness caused by the linear elements 45 in the linear pattern layer 40 .
  • the pitch of the concave portions 27 along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 20 ⁇ m or more, 50 ⁇ m or more, or 100 ⁇ m or more.
  • the pitch of the concave portions 27 along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 3000 ⁇ m or less, 1000 ⁇ m or less, or 300 ⁇ m or less.
  • the pitch of the concave portions 27 along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be twice or more, three times or more, or five times or more the arrangement pitch of the linear elements 45 in the arrangement direction.
  • the pitch of the concave portions 27 along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 10 times or less, 8 times or less, or 6 times or less than the arrangement pitch of the linear elements 45 in the arrangement direction.
  • the decorative sheet 30 of the decorative member 20 includes a linear pattern layer 40 displaying the linear pattern 35.
  • the decorative sheet 30 of the decorative member 20 includes a design layer 60 that displays designs such as patterns and colors.
  • the design of the design layer 60 is observed through the linear pattern layer 40 .
  • the observer observes the linear pattern 35 of the linear pattern layer 40 and the design of the design layer 60 overlapping each other. For example, along with the dark color due to the design layer 60, the linear pattern 35 due to the linear pattern layer 40 is observed. In the example shown in FIG.
  • the decorative sheet 30 displays a linear pattern imitating a hairline pattern produced by subjecting a metal plate to hairline processing and coloring.
  • the decorative sheet 30 displays a linear pattern imitating a spin pattern produced by spinning and coloring a metal plate.
  • the decorative sheet 30 displays linear elements imitating a wood grain pattern.
  • the decorative sheet 30 displays linear elements imitating a textile pattern.
  • the decorative sheet 30 displays a denim pattern as an example of a cloth pattern.
  • the decorative sheet 30 displays a carbon pattern.
  • the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 can be applied to automobile interiors, building interiors, furniture, home electric appliances, and the like, where design is important.
  • the light source device 12 or the display device 16 can be hidden by a decorative sheet 30 displaying a linear pattern in a non-operating state.
  • the display system 10 including the decorative sheet 30 can be applied to interiors of automobiles, interiors of buildings, furniture, home electric appliances, etc., where design is important.
  • the decorative member 20 includes a light shielding pattern sheet 66. As shown in FIG. The light shielding area 66 a of the light shielding pattern sheet 66 shields the light from the light source device 12 .
  • the transmissive region 66b allows the light from the light source device 12 to pass therethrough.
  • the combination of the light source device 12 and the light shielding pattern sheet 66 forms an image 100 having a shape corresponding to the shape of the transmissive area 66b. Image light forming this image passes through the decorative sheet 30 .
  • An image 100 is viewed by image light emitted from the display system 10 . In the example shown in FIG. 4, display system 10 displays cross, triangle and square marks as image 100 .
  • the display device 16 including the light source device 12 forms image light.
  • Image light emitted from the display surface 16 a passes through the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the display system 10 displays the image observed by the observer.
  • Patent Document 1 JP-A-2010-52353
  • Patent Document 2 JP-A-2008-89479
  • conventional decorative sheets are composed of linear projections or linear recesses. contains a linear element with The linear elements are arranged in a direction perpendicular to their longitudinal direction. Linear elements can be made by resin molding such as embossing.
  • bleeding 101 is a phenomenon in which light leaks to the outside of the area where the image 100 is to be displayed, making the area slightly brighter.
  • the image 100 to be displayed is square shaped.
  • blurring 101 occurs around image 100 . That is, the bleeding 101 occurs in a region adjacent to the image 100 in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). Bleeding 101 also occurs in a region adjacent to image 100 in the longitudinal direction of linear element 45 (first direction D1 in the illustrated example).
  • first direction D1 in the illustrated example Conventional decorative sheets cannot display sharp images.
  • the linear elements have steep side walls in the normal direction of the decorative sheet.
  • the outer contour of the side wall is slightly inclined and curved.
  • the sidewalls can exert a lens effect on the light emitted from the linear element through the sidewalls. It was presumed that the light emitted from the linear elements in the arrangement direction is condensed to some extent by the lens effect on the side wall, and can be observed as blurring 101 spreading in the arrangement direction of the linear elements with respect to the image 100 .
  • Each linear element includes a pair of side walls that face each other in the arrangement direction. If the sidewalls rise in the normal direction, the light traveling through the linear element can repeatedly reflect, especially total internal reflection, at the sidewalls. In this way, the image light travels through the linear element in the longitudinal direction of the linear element. It was speculated that the image light spreads along the linear element due to the light guide action in the linear element, and can be observed as blurring 101 that spreads in the longitudinal direction of the linear element with respect to the image 100 .
  • the linear pattern layer 40 includes multiple linear elements 45 .
  • the plurality of linear elements 45 are arranged in one direction, which is the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example).
  • Each linear element 45 elongates in the other direction, which is the longitudinal direction (the first direction D1 in the illustrated example) perpendicular to the arrangement direction.
  • the linear element 45 includes unit elements 48 arranged two-dimensionally.
  • the unit element 48 is a unit convex portion 48A or a unit concave portion 48B.
  • the linear elements 45 do not include sidewalls extending in the longitudinal direction and facing the arrangement direction.
  • the elongated sidewalls can have a lens effect on the image light.
  • the side walls 42B facing the arrangement direction are dispersed in two directions within each linear element 45 according to the two-dimensional arrangement of the unit elements 48.
  • FIG. the sidewalls 42B facing the arrangement direction are dispersed within the linear regions 46 where the linear elements 45 are located. Therefore, the linear elements 45 are prevented from condensing the image light and guiding it in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . That is, the lens effect on the side wall of the linear element 45 with respect to the image light is weakened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bleeding 101 that spreads from the image 100 in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • the outline of the image 100 facing the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 can be made clear.
  • the linear elements 45 do not include sidewalls extending in the longitudinal direction and facing the arrangement direction. That is, the linear element 45 does not include a pair of side walls that can guide image light.
  • the side walls 42B facing the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 are dispersed in two directions within each linear element 45 according to the two-dimensional arrangement of the unit elements 48 .
  • the side walls 42A facing the longitudinal direction of the linear elements 45 are distributed in two directions within each linear element 45 according to the two-dimensional arrangement of the unit elements 48.
  • FIG. In other words, the side walls 42A facing the longitudinal direction are distributed within the linear regions 46 where the linear elements 45 are located, as are the side walls 42B facing the arrangement direction. Thereby, the light guiding action by the linear element 45 can be weakened.
  • the linear element 45 includes side walls 42A non-parallel to the longitudinal direction at the intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction, in other words, other than at both ends in the longitudinal direction.
  • the side wall 42A regulates the light guiding action of the linear element 45. As shown in FIG. In this way, the light guiding action of the linear element 45 due to repeated reflection between the pair of side walls is weakened. This can suppress the occurrence of blurring 101 spreading from the image 100 in the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 .
  • the outline of the image 100 facing the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 can be clarified.
  • the wall inclination angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 (see FIG. 8) specified in the cross section along the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 may be 66° or more, 73° or more, or 76° or more. It may be 90° as in the example shown in 7B. By setting the angle in this way, it is possible to effectively limit the light guide by the linear elements 45 and effectively suppress the bleeding 101 of the image 100 that occurs in the longitudinal direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • the decorative sheet 30 As described above, according to the decorative sheet 30 according to the first embodiment, blurring of the outline of the image can be suppressed in the operating state of the light source device 12 or the display device 16 . As a result, the outline of the image becomes clear, and blurring of the outline of the image can be suppressed.
  • Display system 10 is capable of displaying sharp images.
  • conventional decorative sheets containing linear elements composed of linear projections or linear recesses could not display linear patterns sufficiently clearly.
  • Conventional decorative sheets have a problem that linear patterns are difficult to recognize.
  • a linear element composed of linear protrusions or linear recesses has reflection directivity.
  • a linear pattern of a conventional decorative sheet is observed by an observer by reflecting light incident on the linear pattern from a specific direction toward the observer. Therefore, if the amount of light incident on the linear pattern from a specific direction and directed toward the observer is small, the observer cannot clearly observe the linear pattern. That is, the linear pattern cannot be clearly observed depending on the observation angle, the environmental conditions such as the arrangement of the external light source, the observation angle, and the like.
  • Conventional decorative sheets cannot express metallic luster because reflection is insufficient. As a result, conventional decorative sheets cannot sufficiently reproduce the texture of linear patterns such as hairline patterns and spin patterns using metal plates.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 includes multiple linear elements 45 .
  • Each linear element 45 is arranged in a linear region 46 .
  • Each linear region 46 is an elongated region.
  • Each linear element 45 also elongates.
  • This linear element 45 includes unit elements 48 .
  • Each unit element 48 is either a unit convex portion 48A or a unit concave portion 48B.
  • the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B may be different between two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in one direction, which is the arrangement direction. Due to the difference in arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B, each linear element 45 can be distinguished from other adjacent linear elements 45 and can be recognized as the linear element 45 by the observer.
  • the ten-point average roughness Rz of the linear elements 45 along the longitudinal direction may be different between two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in one direction, which is the arrangement direction. Due to the difference in Rz of the linear elements 45, each linear element 45 can be distinguished from other adjacent linear elements 45 and can be recognized as the linear elements 45 by the observer. By identifying the linear elements 45 in this way, the linear pattern 35 can be observed.
  • the unit elements 48 are arranged two-dimensionally within the linear element 45 .
  • the unit regions 49 are arranged two-dimensionally within the linear region 46 .
  • Linear element 45 includes sidewalls 42 distributed along its length.
  • the linear elements 45 include sidewalls 42 dispersed in the direction of their arrangement. Therefore, light incident on the decorative sheet 30 from various directions can be reflected by the linear pattern layer 40 toward the viewer.
  • An observer can observe the linear patterns 35 of the linear pattern layer 40 by using ambient light incident on the decorative sheet 30 from various directions. Therefore, the linear pattern 35 of the linear pattern layer 40 can be brightly and clearly observed regardless of the incident direction of the ambient light depending on the external light source or the like, that is, regardless of the environmental conditions.
  • the linear pattern 35 of the linear pattern layer 40 can be observed brightly and clearly regardless of the viewing position.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 using resin has an excellent glossy feeling, and the decorative sheet 30 can sufficiently express the metallic texture.
  • the maximum length of the unit element 48 may be 1 ⁇ m or longer, 2 ⁇ m or longer, or 4 ⁇ m or longer.
  • the maximum length of the unit element 48 may be 200 ⁇ m or less, 100 ⁇ m or less, or 50 ⁇ m or less.
  • the maximum length of the unit element 48 is the maximum length when projected in the third direction D3.
  • the side walls 42 formed by the unit elements 48 are inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30.
  • the wall portion inclination angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 may be 66° or more, 73° or more, or 76° or more.
  • the unit element 48 of the linear element 45 has a shape obtained by chamfering a unit convex portion 48A and a unit concave portion 48B having a rectangular cross section indicated by dotted lines.
  • a unit element 48 of the linear element 45 shown in FIG. 22 is a gently curved unit convex portion 48A or unit concave portion 48B.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 22 can be produced by resin molding using the resin molding layer 80 provided with the coating layer 72 in the manufacturing method described above. Also, the angle formed by the side walls 42 with respect to the normal direction can be adjusted by the thickness of the coating layer 72 . As shown in FIG.
  • the lens effect and light guiding action of the linear elements can be weakened. can.
  • the side wall 42 formed by the unit elements 48 with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 by inclining the side wall 42 formed by the unit elements 48 with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30, the light reflected by the linear elements 45 is directed in various directions, and the linear pattern is formed. 35 can be clearly observed.
  • the surface of the linear pattern layer 40 may be formed with fine unevenness.
  • FIG. 23 shows an example in which the surface of the linear pattern layer 40 is roughened to provide fine unevenness.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 23 similarly to the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 22, the cross-sectional rectangular unit convex portions 48A and unit concave portions 48B indicated by the dotted lines are made smooth. have.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 23 has fine irregularities on its surface.
  • fine irregularities may be provided to the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B having rectangular cross-sections indicated by dotted lines.
  • the pitch of fine unevenness may be shorter than the arrangement pitch of the unit elements 48 .
  • the fine unevenness is arranged in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example).
  • the fine unevenness may be arranged in the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 (the first direction D1 in the illustrated example).
  • the height difference of fine unevenness may be smaller than the height difference of the unit elements 48 .
  • the fine unevenness shown in FIG. 23 can be produced by blasting the plate 90 in the manufacturing method described above.
  • the degree of fine unevenness can be adjusted by the type, size, and shape of the abrasive used in the blasting process, the ejection conditions of the abrasive, and the like.
  • FIG. 23 by providing fine unevenness to the surface of the linear element 45, the lens effect and light guiding action of the linear element can be effectively weakened.
  • the reflected light from the linear elements 45 is directed in various directions, and the linear pattern 35 can be clearly observed.
  • the maximum length of the unit element 48, the unit convex portion 48A, and the unit concave portion 48B may be 1 ⁇ m or longer, 2 ⁇ m or longer, 4 ⁇ m or longer, or 6 ⁇ m or longer.
  • the maximum length of the unit element 48, the unit convex portion 48A and the unit concave portion 48B may be 50 ⁇ m or less, 40 ⁇ m or less, 30 ⁇ m or less, or 25 ⁇ m or less.
  • the height difference of the uneven structure 41 formed by the unit elements 48 may be 0.3 ⁇ m or more, 0.5 ⁇ m or more, or 1 ⁇ m or more.
  • the height difference of the uneven structure 41 formed by the unit elements 48 may be 0.20 ⁇ m or less, 10 ⁇ m or less, or 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the height difference of the uneven structure 41 is the difference between the highest position and the lowest position along the third direction D3.
  • the decorative sheet 30 includes the linear pattern layer 40.
  • Linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 .
  • the total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30 is 5% or more and 90% or less.
  • Each linear element 45 includes unit elements 48 arranged two-dimensionally.
  • the two-dimensionally arranged unit elements 48 can suppress the light guiding action and lens effect of the linear elements 45 . It is possible to suppress blurring of the contour of the image 100 . Therefore, by using the decorative sheet 30, a sharp image can be displayed.
  • the decorative sheet 30 includes the linear pattern layer 40.
  • Linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 .
  • the total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30 is 5% or more and 90% or less.
  • the linear element 45 includes, at its longitudinal intermediate portion, side walls 42A non-parallel to the longitudinal direction, in other words side walls 42A facing the longitudinal direction.
  • the side wall 42A that is positioned at the intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 and that is non-parallel to the longitudinal direction can suppress the light guiding action and lens effect of the linear element 45 . It is possible to suppress blurring of the contour of the image 100 . Therefore, by using the decorative sheet 30, a sharp image can be displayed.
  • the decorative sheet 30 includes the linear pattern layer 40.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 arranged in one direction. Each linear element 45 extends in the other direction perpendicular to the one direction.
  • Each linear element 45 includes unit elements 48 arranged two-dimensionally.
  • the unit element 48 is a unit convex portion 48A or a unit concave portion 48B.
  • the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B differs between two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in one direction. Adjacent linear elements 45 are distinguished from each other because the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B is different.
  • the two-dimensionally arranged unit elements 48 can reflect light from various directions toward the observer.
  • the ambient light can be effectively used to clearly observe the linear pattern 35 as a set of linear elements 45 . Since the linear pattern layer 40 using resin can express various glossiness, it is possible to reproduce the texture similar to the texture of metal, the texture of natural objects such as grain patterns, the texture of cloth, and the like.
  • the decorative sheet 30 includes the linear pattern layer 40.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 arranged in one direction. Each linear element 45 extends in the other direction perpendicular to the one direction.
  • Each linear element 45 includes unit elements 48 arranged two-dimensionally.
  • the unit element 48 is a unit convex portion 48A or a unit concave portion 48B.
  • Rz of the linear element 45 is the ten-point average roughness Rz specified in JISB0601-1994. Since the ten-point average roughness Rz of the linear elements 45 is different, the diffuse reflectance of each linear element 45 is different.
  • adjacent linear elements 45 express different matte or glossy textures and are distinguished from each other. Therefore, the ambient light can be effectively used to clearly observe the linear pattern 35 as a set of linear elements 45 . Since the linear pattern layer 40 using resin can express various glossiness, it is possible to reproduce the texture similar to the texture of metal, the texture of natural objects such as grain patterns, the texture of cloth, and the like.
  • the decorative sheet 30 includes the linear pattern layer 40.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 arranged in one direction. Each linear element 45 extends in the other direction perpendicular to the one direction.
  • Each linear element 45 includes unit elements 48 arranged two-dimensionally.
  • the unit element 48 is a unit convex portion 48A or a unit concave portion 48B.
  • Two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in one direction have different average heights. Adjacent linear elements 45 are distinguished from each other by the different average heights.
  • the two-dimensionally arranged unit elements 48 can reflect light from various directions toward the observer. Therefore, the ambient light can be effectively used to clearly observe the linear pattern 35 as a set of linear elements 45 . Since the linear pattern layer 40 using resin can express various glossiness, it is possible to reproduce the texture similar to the texture of metal, the texture of natural objects such as grain patterns, the texture of cloth, and the like.
  • the linear pattern 35 can be clearly displayed, and the conventional problems can be solved.
  • the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 according to the first embodiment, which can clearly display the linear pattern 35 need not be used in combination with the light source device 12 or the display device 16.
  • the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 according to the first embodiment that can clearly display the linear pattern 35 may not be used in the display system 10 .
  • the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 according to the first embodiment, which can clearly display the linear pattern 35 can be applied to the display system 10 described above.
  • the thermoplastic resin portion 64 may be transparent or colored.
  • the layer structure of the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 may be omitted from the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the decorative sheet 30 may include a light shielding pattern sheet 66.
  • the light shielding pattern sheet 66 may be omitted from the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 may include a protective layer forming the outermost surface of the decorative member 20 or the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the linear pattern layer 40 may include a concavo-convex base layer containing the plurality of linear elements described above, and a protective layer laminated on the concavo-convex base layer.
  • the protective layer may be thinly formed along the uneven surface of the uneven base layer.
  • the protective layer may be provided so as to fill the uneven surface of the uneven base layer so as to form a refractive index interface with the uneven base layer.
  • the protective layer may be a hard coat layer containing a cured product of a curable resin composition.
  • the arrangement of the components included in the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 can also be changed as appropriate.
  • the arrangement of the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 and the arrangement of the components included in the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 can be changed as appropriate.
  • the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 shown in FIGS. 1 and 24 to 26 may be arranged in the opposite direction in the third direction D3.
  • the display system 10 is configured by stacking the decorative member 20 on the light source device 12 or the display device 16 .
  • the display system 10 may be configured by stacking the decorative sheet 30 on the light source device 12 or the display device 16 .
  • the decorative sheet 30 is overlaid on the light source device 12 or the display device 16 from the third direction D3.
  • the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 may be flat. As shown in FIG. 27, the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 may have a three-dimensional shape, in other words, a three-dimensional shape. In the example shown in FIG. 27, the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 are bent on both sides in the first direction D1.
  • a three-dimensional shape may be imparted to the decorative sheet 30 by vacuum forming, pressure forming, or the like.
  • the decorating member 20 having a three-dimensional shape may be produced by insert-molding the decorating sheet 30 preformed by vacuum forming, pressure forming, or the like.
  • the decorating member 20 having a three-dimensional shape may be produced by using the decorating sheet 30 that has not been preformed for in-mold molding.
  • the decorative sheet 30 may be used for TOM molding to produce the decorative member 20 having a three-dimensional shape.
  • TOM molding is a three-dimensional overlay method, and can also be called three-dimensional surface decoration molding.
  • thermoplastic resin portion 64 is flat.
  • the thermoplastic resin part 64 produced by injection molding may have a three-dimensional shape, in other words, a three-dimensional shape.
  • the thermoplastic resin portion 64 may include a portion used for fixing the decorative member 20, for example, a portion to which a fixing member such as a screw is attached.
  • the decorative sheet 30 In the manufacturing method of the decorative sheet 30 described above, an example of producing the resin-imprinted layer 80 using the plate 90 and producing the decorative sheet 30 from the resin-imprinted layer 80 is shown.
  • the decorative sheet 30 may be directly manufactured from the plate 90 without forming the resin imprinting layer 80 . That is, the resin imprint layer 80 may constitute the linear pattern layer 40 .
  • Decorative members according to Examples 1 to 3 and decorative sheets according to Comparative Examples 1 and 2 were produced.
  • the produced decorative sheets according to Examples and Comparative Examples had a design layer, a joining layer and a linear pattern layer, like the decorative sheet shown in FIG.
  • a plate was produced, a laminate of a base material and a resin imprinting layer was produced using this plate, a decorative sheet laminate was produced from this laminate, and decorated.
  • a decorative sheet was produced by peeling off the substrate and the resin transfer layer from the sheet laminate.
  • Comparative Example 1 instead of the laminate of the substrate and the resin imprinting layer, a resin film whose surface was scratched with sandpaper was prepared. A decorative sheet was produced by peeling off the resin film.
  • Example 1 The above-described method described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11 was used to prepare the plate.
  • the image data shown in FIG. 10 was used as the hairline pattern to be manufactured.
  • the image data shown in FIG. 10 are image data of a hairline sheet produced by marking a polyethylene terephthalate film.
  • the image data was converted to monochrome 2 gradation using the error diffusion method using Adobe Photoshop 2021.
  • the input image data was 3200 pixels/inch and the output was also 3200 pixels/inch. Then, by changing 3200 pixels/inch to 12800 pixels/inch, the arrangement pattern of the first area and the second area was created.
  • the width along the arrangement direction of the linear elements was about 40 to 100 ⁇ m.
  • a concave portion was formed on the surface of the metal plate according to the arrangement pattern of the second area.
  • the recess was formed by etching using a photolithographic technique.
  • a copper plate was used as the metal plate. After forming the recesses, the surface of the copper plate was plated with chrome.
  • the plate produced had the configuration described above. That is, the plate produced contained a plurality of plate linear elements. Each plate-like element was either a plate-like protrusion or a plate-like recess. Each plate-like element contained a two-dimensional array of plate-unit elements.
  • the plate unit elements were plate unit protrusions located in the first areas or plate unit recesses located in the second areas.
  • the plate-like elements were arranged in the longitudinal direction of the plate-like elements and in the arranging direction of the plate-like elements.
  • the plate-like element had a side wall facing the longitudinal direction of the plate-like element and a side wall facing the arrangement direction of the plate-like element.
  • the above-described manufacturing method described with reference to FIG. 12 was adopted for manufacturing the laminate including the substrate and the resin transfer layer using a plate.
  • a polyethylene terephthalate film was used as the substrate.
  • the resin imprinting layer was produced using an ultraviolet curable resin.
  • the manufactured resin-imparted layer had the structure described above. That is, the manufactured resin-imprinted layer contained a plurality of second linear elements. Each second linear element was either a second linear protrusion or a second linear recess. Each second linear element contained a two-dimensional array of second unit elements.
  • the second unit element was the second unit protrusion or the second unit recess.
  • the second unit elements were arranged in the longitudinal direction of the second linear elements and in the arrangement direction of the second linear elements.
  • the second unit element had a side wall facing the longitudinal direction of the second linear element and a side wall facing the arrangement direction of the second linear element.
  • the manufacturing method described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16 was adopted for manufacturing the decorative sheet laminate.
  • the linear pattern layer was produced using an ultraviolet curable resin.
  • the joining layer was produced using a thermoplastic resin.
  • the design layer was produced by printing.
  • the design layer was a uniform black layer.
  • the produced linear pattern layer had the structure described above. That is, the produced linear pattern layer contained a plurality of linear elements. Each linear element was a linear protrusion or a linear depression. Each linear element contained a two-dimensional array of unit elements. A unit element was a unit convex portion or a unit concave portion. The unit elements were arranged in the longitudinal direction of the linear elements and in the arrangement direction of the linear elements.
  • the unit element had a side wall facing the longitudinal direction of the linear elements and a side wall facing the arrangement direction of the linear elements.
  • the arrangement ratio of unit recesses was different between two linear elements adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction.
  • the average height was different between two linear elements adjacent to each other in the array direction.
  • the maximum length of the unit element of the linear pattern layer was about 50 ⁇ m.
  • the height difference of the concave-convex structure of the unit element of the linear pattern layer was about 3 ⁇ m.
  • Example 2 The manufacturing method of the decorative sheet according to Example 2 is different from that of Example 1 except that the metal plate having the recesses formed therein is blasted when the plate is produced, and the metal plate after blasting is chromium plated. It was different from the manufacturing method of the decorative sheet. Except for the blasting treatment, the decorative sheet according to Example 2 employs the same manufacturing method and manufacturing conditions as those of the decorative sheet according to Example 1. In Example 2, fine irregularities due to blasting were formed on the plate surface of the plate, the irregular structure of the resin imprinting layer, and the irregular structure of the linear pattern layer.
  • Example 3 The manufacturing method of the decorative sheet according to Example 3 was different from the manufacturing method of the decorative sheet according to Example 2 only in the blasting conditions.
  • the method for manufacturing the decorative sheet according to Example 3 was the same as the method for manufacturing the decorative sheet according to Example 2, except for the blasting conditions.
  • the blasting conditions employed in Example 3 were more severe than the blasting conditions employed in Example 2.
  • Comparative Example 1 In Comparative Example 1, instead of the laminate of the substrate and the resin imprinting layer, a resin film whose surface was scratched with sandpaper was prepared. The resin film was produced by scribing the surface of a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 50 ⁇ m. A linear pattern layer, a bonding layer and a design layer were formed on the resin film to obtain a decorative sheet laminate.
  • the method for producing the linear pattern layer, the bonding layer, and the design layer includes the method, method, conditions, and materials for producing the linear pattern layer, the bonding layer, and the design layer on the resin molding layer in Example 1. assumed to be the same.
  • a decorative sheet according to Comparative Example 1 was obtained by peeling off the resin film from the decorative sheet laminate.
  • the linear pattern layer of the decorative sheet of Comparative Example 1 had a plurality of linear elements.
  • the length along the longitudinal direction of the linear element was approximately the same as the length along the longitudinal direction of the linear element forming the hairline pattern to be manufactured shown in FIG.
  • the width along the arrangement direction of the linear elements was approximately the same as the width along the arrangement direction of the linear elements forming the hairline pattern to be manufactured shown in FIG.
  • the decorative sheet manufacturing method according to Comparative Example 2 differs from the decorative sheet manufacturing method according to Example 1 only in that the image data shown in FIG. 10 is binarized.
  • the plate line-shaped elements of the plate are plate line-shaped convex portions having a substantially constant height, or plate line-shaped concave portions having a substantially constant height. became. That is, the plate linear elements did not contain two-dimensionally arranged plate unit elements.
  • the resin-imparted layer had a plurality of second linear elements with substantially constant heights.
  • the second linear elements did not include second unit elements arranged two-dimensionally.
  • the linear pattern layer had a plurality of linear elements with substantially constant heights.
  • the linear elements did not contain two-dimensionally arranged unit elements.
  • the length of the linear element along the longitudinal direction was approximately the same as the length along the longitudinal direction of the linear element forming the hairline pattern to be manufactured shown in FIG.
  • the width along the arrangement direction of the linear elements was approximately the same as the width along the arrangement direction of the linear elements forming the hairline pattern to be manufactured shown in FIG.
  • a display system shown in FIG. 25 was produced by combining the decorative sheets according to Examples 1 to 3 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 with a display device having a light shielding pattern sheet and a light source device.
  • the light source device was a light emitting diode.
  • the display device was capable of displaying square-shaped images. The sides of the square formed by the image extended in the longitudinal direction and the arrangement direction of the linear elements. It was confirmed whether or not bleeding on the decorative sheet was observed in a state in which the display device was operated to display an image.
  • the evaluation results are shown in the column of “Evaluation 3 (Bleeding)” in Table 1. An example in which no conspicuous bleeding was observed and a sharp image was observed was given "A". "B" was assigned to examples in which bleeding was observed and the image was observed to be blurred.
  • the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the linear elements 45 included in the linear pattern layer 40 .
  • the second embodiment may be configured similarly to the first embodiment except for the configuration of the linear element 45.
  • FIG. In the description and accompanying drawings of the second embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the corresponding components of the first embodiment are used.
  • the display system 10 includes a decorative member 20 or a decorative sheet 30, a light source device 12 or a display device 16, may include
  • the light source device 12 and the display device 16 in the second embodiment may be the same as the light source device 12 and the display device 16 described in the first embodiment, respectively.
  • the light source device 12 and the display device 16 are at least partially covered with the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 from the third direction D3. According to the display system 10 , the light source device 12 and the display device 16 can be installed while ensuring harmony with the surroundings by the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the display system 10 when the light source device 12 and the display device 16 are turned on, the display system 10 can display as shown in FIG. As described in the first embodiment, when the light source device 12 and the display device 16 are turned on, the display system 10 can display the linear pattern 35 by the linear pattern layer 40 as shown in FIG. As described in the first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5D, the linear pattern layer 40 of the decorative member 20 or the decorative sheet 30 according to the second embodiment includes hairline patterns, spin patterns, , grain pattern, or weave pattern.
  • the display system 10, the decorative member 20, or the decorative sheet 30 according to the second embodiment can be applied to various uses as described in the first embodiment.
  • the decorative member 20 may include the decorative sheet 30 and the thermoplastic resin portion 64.
  • the thermoplastic resin portion 64 described in the first embodiment may be used as the thermoplastic resin portion 64 .
  • the decorative member 20 may include components other than the decorative sheet 30 and the thermoplastic resin portion 64, as in the first embodiment.
  • the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 include a linear pattern layer 40, a bonding layer 62, a design One or more of the layer 60, the light-shielding pattern sheet 66, and the surface protective layer may be included.
  • the bonding layer 62, the design layer 60, the light-shielding pattern sheet 66, and the surface protective layer in the second embodiment may each have the configuration described in the first embodiment.
  • the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 in the second embodiment may have the transmission properties described in the first embodiment.
  • the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 in the second embodiment may have dimensions such as thickness and size described in the first embodiment.
  • the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 in the second embodiment may have the optical properties described in the first embodiment.
  • the total light transmittance of the decorating member 20 and the decorating sheet 30 may be the same as the total light transmittance of the decorating member 20 and the decorating sheet 30 according to the first embodiment.
  • the decorative sheet 30 includes the light shielding pattern sheet 66, the total light transmittance is the total light transmittance measured in the transmission region 66b.
  • the decorative sheet 30 includes a linear pattern layer 40.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 displays the linear pattern 35 .
  • the linear pattern 35 is a linear pattern.
  • Linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 .
  • a plurality of linear elements 45 are arranged in one direction. One direction is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • Each linear element 45 extends in the other direction that intersects with one direction, for example, the other direction that intersects perpendicularly.
  • Each linear element 45 has a longitudinal direction, the other direction being the longitudinal direction.
  • Each linear element 45 elongates in the other longitudinal direction.
  • a plurality of linear elements 45 extend generally parallel.
  • a linear pattern 35 is represented by a set of a plurality of linear elements 45 .
  • the linear element 45 extending in a predetermined direction means that the linear element 45 extends in a predetermined direction (another direction) at any position along its entire length in a strict sense. do not.
  • the angle formed by the extending direction at each position of the linear element 45 with respect to a predetermined direction (other direction) is preferably ⁇ 15° or less, more preferably ⁇ 10° or less, It is more preferable that the angle is ⁇ 5° or less.
  • the angle formed by the direction connecting both ends of the linear elements 45 with respect to the predetermined direction (another direction) is ⁇ 10° or less. ⁇ 5° or less is more preferable, and ⁇ 3° or less is even more preferable.
  • That the linear elements 45 are elongated means that the ratio of the total length to the width of the linear elements 45 is 2 or more, preferably 10 or more, more preferably 20 or more.
  • the total length of the linear element 45 is the length ( ⁇ m) along the longitudinal direction (other direction) of the linear element 45 .
  • the width of the linear elements 45 is the length ( ⁇ m) along the direction of arrangement of the linear elements 45 (the one direction 9).
  • the length along the longitudinal direction (other direction) of the linear element 45 may be the same as the length described in the first embodiment.
  • the width along the arrangement direction (one direction) of the linear elements 45 may be the same as the width described in the first embodiment.
  • Each linear element 45 is a linear protrusion 45A or a linear recess 45B.
  • the linear protrusions 45A and the linear recesses 45B are alternately arranged in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example).
  • the average position (average height) of the linear elements 45 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 the third direction D3 in the illustrated example
  • two linear elements 45 adjacent in the arrangement direction are: They are identified as linear protrusions 45A or linear recesses 45B.
  • a reference position (reference height) in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is set, and the linear protrusions 45A and the linear recesses 45B are distinguished based on the reference height.
  • Linear elements 45 whose average position (average height) is closer to the observer than the reference position in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 are linear projections 45A.
  • Linear elements 45 whose average position (average height) is lower than the reference position in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 and which are farther from the observer are linear concave portions 45B.
  • the reference position is the average position (average height) of the linear pattern layer 40 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the average position (average height) of the linear pattern layer 40 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is specified by the method described in the first embodiment.
  • the average position (average height) of the linear elements 45 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is specified by the method described in the first embodiment.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 includes a sheet-like base portion 43 and linear protrusions 45A projecting from the base portion 43 in the third direction D3.
  • the base portion 43 is exposed by providing the linear concave portion 45B between the two linear convex portions 45A adjacent to each other in the second direction D2.
  • the base portion 43 and the linear convex portion 45A may be integrally molded by resin molding. That is, the base portion 43 and the linear convex portion 45A may be seamlessly connected.
  • an upper limit may be set for Rz along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • Rz is the ten-point average roughness ( ⁇ m) according to JISB0601-1994.
  • Rz along one direction in which the linear elements 45 are arranged may be 3.2 ⁇ m or less, 2.5 ⁇ m or less, or 2.4 ⁇ m or less.
  • an upper limit may be set for Ra along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • Ra is the arithmetic mean roughness ( ⁇ m) conforming to JISB0601-1994.
  • Ra along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 1.4 ⁇ m or less, 1.1 ⁇ m or less, or 0.9 ⁇ m or less.
  • an upper limit may be set for the PV along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • PV is the maximum valley depth ( ⁇ m) conforming to JISB0601-1994.
  • the PV along one direction in which the linear elements 45 are arranged may be 4.7 ⁇ m or less, 3.9 ⁇ m or less, or 3.8 ⁇ m or less.
  • an upper limit may be set for rms along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • rms is the root mean square roughness ( ⁇ m) according to JISB0601-1994.
  • the rms along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 1.5 ⁇ m or less, 1.2 m or less, or 1.1 ⁇ m or less.
  • the side walls 42 formed by the linear elements 45 have a height along the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 (the third direction D3 in the illustrated example). height tends to be low. A low side wall 42 along the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is less likely to exhibit a strong lens effect. Further, the linear element 45 tends to have the side wall 42 greatly inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 (the third direction D3 in the illustrated example). Side walls 42 that are greatly inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 are less likely to exhibit a lens effect of concentrating light in a direction inclined with respect to the normal direction. By weakening the lens effect of the side walls 42 in this way, the spread of light around the area where the image should be displayed is suppressed. It is presumed that this suppresses blurring of the contour of the image.
  • 31A and 31B show specific examples of the linear pattern layer 40 having such surface properties.
  • 31A and 31B both show the linear pattern layer 40 on the main cut surface of the decorative sheet 30.
  • FIG. 31A the linear element 45 of the linear pattern layer 40 has a shape obtained by chamfering linear protrusions 45A and linear recesses 45B having rectangular cross sections indicated by dotted lines.
  • the linear elements 45 of the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 31A are gently curved linear protrusions 45A or linear recesses 45B.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 31A can be produced by forming a coating film of a resin composition on a plate surface (mold surface) of a plate (mold) used for resin shaping.
  • a coating layer 72 of a resin composition on the concave-convex structure 81 of a resin molding layer 80 as a plate (mold) used for resin molding, the linear shape shown in FIG. 31A is obtained.
  • a patterned layer 40 may be produced.
  • linear protrusions 45A and linear recesses 45B having rectangular cross sections indicated by dotted lines are smoothly formed. It has a shape. Furthermore, the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 31B has fine unevenness on the surface. The pitch of fine unevenness is shorter than the arrangement pitch of the linear elements 45 . The fine unevenness is arranged in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). The fine unevenness may also be arranged in the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 (in the illustrated example, the first direction D1). The height difference of the fine unevenness is smaller than the height difference of the linear elements 45 .
  • the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 31B can be produced by resin shaping using a plate (mold) whose plate surface (mold surface) has been blasted.
  • a lower limit may be set for Rz along one direction, which is the direction in which the linear elements 45 are arranged.
  • Rz is the ten-point average roughness ( ⁇ m) conforming to JISB0601-1994, as described above.
  • Rz along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 0.5 ⁇ m or more, or may be 1.2 ⁇ m or more.
  • a lower limit may be set for Ra along one direction in which the linear elements 45 are arranged.
  • Roughness Ra is the arithmetic mean roughness ( ⁇ m) conforming to JISB0601-1994, as described above.
  • Ra along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45, may be 0.2 ⁇ m or more, or may be 0.6 ⁇ m or more.
  • a lower limit may be set for the PV along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45.
  • PV is the maximum valley depth ( ⁇ m) conforming to JISB0601-1994, as described above.
  • PV along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 0.9 ⁇ m or more, or may be 2.2 ⁇ m or more.
  • a lower limit may be set for the rms along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45.
  • rms is the root-mean-square roughness ( ⁇ m) according to JISB0601-1994, as described above.
  • the rms along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 0.2 ⁇ m or more, or may be 0.6 ⁇ m or more.
  • a lower limit may be set for the side wall inclination angle ⁇ from the viewpoint of suppressing blurring of the contour of the image.
  • the sidewall inclination angle ⁇ is an index representing the inclination angle of the sidewalls 42 positioned between the linear protrusions 45A and the linear recesses 45B adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 with respect to the normal direction.
  • the lens effect of the side wall 42 can be weakened, and the light guiding action of the linear element 45 can be weakened.
  • the sidewall inclination angle ⁇ may be 66° or more, 73° or more, or 76° or more.
  • an upper limit may be set for the side wall inclination angle ⁇ .
  • the sidewall inclination angle ⁇ may be 87° or less.
  • the side wall inclination angle ⁇ is determined by a straight line SL passing through a first position P1 and a second position P2 on the linear pattern layer 40 on the main cut surface of the decorative sheet 30, is the angle (°) between the normal direction D3 and
  • the sidewall inclination angle ⁇ is 0° or more and 90° or less.
  • the main cutting plane of the decorative sheet 30 is a cross section along both the normal direction of the decorative sheet and one direction in which the linear elements 45 are arranged.
  • the first position P1 is the highest by 10% of the height difference HD between the highest position HP of the linear protrusion 45A crossed by the main cutting plane and the lowest position LP of the linear recess 45B adjacent to the linear protrusion 45A. It is a position on the linear pattern layer 40 lower than the position HP.
  • the second position P2 is a position on the linear pattern layer 40 higher than the lowest position LP by 10% of the height difference HD.
  • the first position P1 is positioned between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in one direction, which is the direction in which the linear elements 45 are arranged.
  • a plurality of positions lower than the highest position HP by 10% of the height difference HD may exist between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • the position closest to the lowest position LP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 is the first position P1.
  • the second position P2 is located between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • a plurality of positions higher than the lowest position LP by 10% of the height difference HD can exist between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • the position closest to the highest position HP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 is the second position P2.
  • Rz, Ra, PV, rms, and side wall inclination angle ⁇ which serve as indicators of the surface properties of the linear pattern layer 40, are obtained by dividing each side of a square region having a side length of 1076 ⁇ m in the linear pattern layer 40 to be measured. It is divided into three equal parts and partitioned into nine small areas, and is specified as the average value of a total of nine measured values measured at approximately the center of each small area.
  • Rz, Ra, PV, and rms are values measured using a scanning white light interferometer (NewView6300) manufactured by Zygo Corporation. The measurement area in this measuring device is 1076 ⁇ m square, and the “cylinder” set in the measuring device is used to remove the waviness component.
  • the sidewall inclination angle ⁇ is calculated from the surface shape of the linear pattern layer 40 measured using a scanning white light interferometer (New View 6300) manufactured by Zygo Corporation.
  • the decorative sheet 30 may include a bonding layer 62 for the purpose of improving adhesion between constituent elements.
  • the bonding layer 62 improves adhesion between the linear pattern layer 40 and the design layer 60 .
  • the bonding layer 62 can be formed using various adhesives and adhesives such as acrylic resin and epoxy resin.
  • the thickness of the bonding layer 62 may be, for example, 1 ⁇ m or more and 80 ⁇ m or less.
  • the bonding layer 62 may be omitted.
  • the decorative sheet 30 in the second embodiment may include layers other than the linear pattern layer, like the decorative sheet 30 in the first embodiment.
  • the decorative sheet 30 may include a design layer 60 for the purpose of improving designability.
  • the design layer 60 in the second embodiment may be the same as the design layer 60 described in the first embodiment.
  • the decorative sheet 30 may include the bonding layer 62 described in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 shows an example of the plate 90.
  • Plate 90 may be the roll plate shown in FIG.
  • the plate 90 has a cylindrical outer shape.
  • the plate 90 is held rotatably around the cylindrical central axis CA.
  • the plate 90 has a plate surface 91 on its cylindrical outer peripheral surface.
  • the plate surface 91 is an uneven surface corresponding to the linear pattern to be transferred.
  • the plate surface 91 is an uneven surface corresponding to the uneven structure 41 of the linear pattern layer 40 displaying the linear pattern 35 .
  • the plate surface 91 of the plate 90 includes a plurality of plate linear elements 92 arranged in an axial direction parallel to the central axis CA.
  • Each plate-like element 92 is a plate-like protrusion 92A or a plate-like recess 92B.
  • the plate line-shaped convex portion 92A protrudes outward away from the central axis CA in the radial direction perpendicular to the central axis CA.
  • the stencil-shaped concave portion 92B is recessed inward and close to the central axis CA in the radial direction perpendicular to the central axis CA.
  • the plate linear projections 92A and the plate linear recesses 92B are alternately arranged in the axial direction.
  • the plate-like elements 92 are elongated in the circumferential direction about the central axis CA.
  • the plate surface 91 of the plate 90 is manufactured according to the linear pattern 35 to be manufactured.
  • the plate 90 may be produced by the following method using image data.
  • image data 95 regarding the linear pattern 35 is prepared.
  • FIG. 10 shows an example of the image data 95.
  • the image data 95 may be multi-tone grayscale image data.
  • Multi-gradation grayscale image data is data of three or more gradations.
  • the image data 95 can be prepared by scanning the linear pattern 35 to be manufactured in grayscale.
  • the image data 95 may be binarized image data.
  • the image data 95 shown in FIG. 10 is data relating to the hairline pattern. Depending on the gradation of each pixel of the image data 95, the height of the area of the plate 90 corresponding to that pixel is determined. As a result, the area coextensive with the image data 95 of the linear pattern 35 can be divided into small areas, and height information can be assigned to the small areas.
  • the plate 90 can be produced by realizing the height distribution assigned to the area coextensive with the image data 95 .
  • Height distribution can be achieved by forming recesses in the metal plate.
  • the height distribution may be imparted to the metal plate by etching the surface of the metal plate.
  • the height distribution may be formed in the metal plate by forming recesses by etching using a photolithographic technique.
  • the formed recesses constitute each plate linear element 92 of the plate surface 91 .
  • the height distribution may be imparted to the metal plate by laser writing the surface of the metal plate.
  • the metal plate forming the printing plate 91 may be a copper plate. By attaching a metal plate such as a copper plate to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical core, the metal plate constitutes the plate surface 91 .
  • the surface of the copper plate may be chrome plated after the formation of the uneven surface is completed.
  • the blasting treatment is performed before the chrome plating treatment described above.
  • the pitch of the fine unevenness provided on the plate surface 91 may be shorter than the arrangement pitch of the plate-unit elements 93 .
  • the height difference of the fine unevenness imparted to the plate surface 91 may be smaller than the height difference of the plate linear elements 92 .
  • the degree of fine unevenness can be adjusted by the type, size, and shape of the abrasive used in the blasting process, the ejection conditions of the abrasive, and the like.
  • fine unevenness By imparting fine unevenness to the plate surface 91, fine unevenness can be imparted to the surface of the linear element 45 as shown in FIG. 31B. As will be described later, the fine unevenness of the linear elements 45 can weaken the lens effect and light guiding action of the linear elements 45 .
  • the plate 90 is produced as described above. Next, using the produced plate 90, the decorative sheet 30 is produced.
  • the plate 90 is used to fabricate the resin imprint layer 80 .
  • An uneven structure 81 obtained by transferring the unevenness of the plate surface 91 is provided to the resin imprinting layer 80 .
  • Concavo-convex structure 81 has a configuration complementary to plate surface 91 .
  • the resin transfer layer 80 may be produced using the plate 90 as follows.
  • the plate 90 is rotated around the central axis CA.
  • a long base material 70 is supplied toward the plate 90 .
  • an uncured curable resin composition is supplied between the substrate 70 and the plate 90 .
  • a resin film such as a polyethylene terephthalate film may be used.
  • an ionizing radiation curable resin composition is exemplified.
  • an ionizing radiation curable resin composition an ultraviolet curable resin composition is exemplified.
  • the curable resin composition is cured between the plate 90 and the substrate 70 .
  • the ultraviolet curable resin composition is irradiated with ultraviolet rays that have passed through the base material 70 .
  • a resin transfer layer 80 is produced from the cured product of the curable resin composition.
  • the resin imprinting layer 80 is bonded to the base material 70 .
  • the resin imprint layer 80 includes a plurality of second linear elements 82 corresponding to the plate linear elements 92 .
  • the second linear elements 82 are formed corresponding to the plate linear elements 92 .
  • the plurality of second linear elements 82 are arranged in one direction.
  • Each second linear element 82 elongates in the other direction orthogonal to the one direction.
  • the second linear element 82 is a second linear protrusion 82A or a second linear recess 82B.
  • a second linear concave portion 82B is formed corresponding to the plate linear convex portion 92A.
  • a second linear protrusion 82A is formed corresponding to the plate linear recess 92B.
  • the second linear protrusions 82A and the second linear recesses 82B are alternately arranged in one direction.
  • the base material 70 is separated from the plate surface 91 of the plate 90.
  • the resin imprint layer 80 includes a sheet-like land portion 84 bonded to the base material 70 .
  • the land portion 84 is formed integrally with the second linear convex portion 82A.
  • the land portion 84 is exposed between the two second linear convex portions 82A at the position where the second linear concave portion 82B is provided.
  • the first resin composition is supplied to the surface of the resin transfer layer 80 peeled off from the plate 90 that was in contact with the plate 90 to form a coating film of the first resin composition. do.
  • the coating layer 72 is formed by drying or curing the coating film of the first resin composition. Concavities and convexities corresponding to the concavo-convex structure 81 of the resin imprinting layer 80 remain on the surface of the coating layer 72 .
  • the coating layer 72 may contain a thermoplastic resin.
  • the coating layer 72 may contain a cured product of a curable resin composition.
  • the curable resin composition may be a thermosetting resin composition or an ionizing radiation curable resin composition.
  • the coating layer 72 may contain a material having releasability such as silicone.
  • the coating layer 72 functions as a release layer 73 by containing the peelable material. However, the production of the coating layer 72 may be omitted and the linear pattern layer 40 may be formed on the resin imprinting layer 80 .
  • the structure 41 can be smoothed.
  • the smoothness of the uneven structure 41 can be adjusted by the thickness of the coating layer 72, the viscosity of the first resin composition, the drying speed, the curing speed, and the like.
  • the thickness of the coating layer 72 may be 10% or more, 20% or more, 30% or more, or 40% or more of the height difference HD of the uneven structure 81 of the resin molding layer 80 .
  • a second resin composition is supplied onto the resin imprinting layer 80 and the coating layer 72 to form a coating film of the second resin composition.
  • the second resin composition may be a curable resin composition.
  • the curable resin composition may be a thermosetting resin composition or an ionizing radiation curable resin composition.
  • an ionizing radiation curable resin composition an ultraviolet curable resin composition is exemplified.
  • the curable resin composition is cured on the resin transfer layer 80 and the coating layer 72 .
  • the linear pattern layer 40 is produced from the cured product of the curable resin composition.
  • the curing treatment of the curable resin composition at this timing may be complete curing or semi-curing.
  • the produced linear pattern layer 40 is bonded to the resin imprinting layer 80 or the coating layer 72 .
  • the second resin composition may be the same as the second resin composition described in the first embodiment.
  • the second resin composition may contain an electron beam-curable resin composition and at least one of an ultraviolet absorber and a light stabilizer.
  • a concave-convex structure 41 corresponding to the concave-convex structure 81 of the resin molding layer 80 is applied to the linear pattern layer 40 .
  • Linear elements 45 of the linear pattern layer 40 are formed corresponding to the second linear elements 82 .
  • Linear recesses 45B of the linear pattern layer 40 are formed corresponding to the second linear protrusions 82A.
  • Linear protrusions 45A of the linear pattern layer 40 are formed corresponding to the second linear recesses 82B.
  • the base portion 43 is also formed by the cured product of the curable resin composition.
  • the base portion 43 is formed integrally with the linear convex portion 45A.
  • the base portion 43 is exposed between the two linear convex portions 45A at the position where the linear concave portion 45B is provided.
  • a bonding layer 62 is formed over the linear pattern layer 40 .
  • the bonding layer 62 may be produced by supplying a resin composition onto the linear pattern layer 40 to form a coating film of the resin composition, and drying or curing the coating film.
  • the design layer 60 is formed over the joining layer 62 .
  • the design layer 60 may be formed by gravure printing.
  • the decorative sheet 30 is formed over the resin molding layer 80 .
  • the decorative sheet 30 is bonded to the resin molding layer 80 and the coating layer 72 .
  • the decorative sheet 30 constitutes the decorative sheet laminate 25 together with the resin imprint layer 80 .
  • the decorative sheet laminate 25 includes the decorative sheet 30, the coating layer 72, the resin molding layer 80 and the substrate 70 in order in the third direction D3.
  • the decorative member 20 is produced using the decorative sheet 30 .
  • An injection molding device 110 is prepared as shown in FIG.
  • Injection molding apparatus 110 includes mold 111 .
  • Mold 111 includes a first mold 111A and a second mold 111B.
  • the first mold 111A and the second mold 111B can be separated from each other as shown in FIG. 37 and can be close to each other as shown in FIG.
  • a cavity 112 is formed between the first die 111A and the second die 111B in the closed state in which the first die 111A and the second die 111B are in contact with each other.
  • Mold 111 has a gate 113 leading to cavity 112 .
  • the gate 113 is connected to a supply device for the injection resin 114 (not shown).
  • An injection resin 114 is supplied into the cavity 112 through the gate 113 .
  • the first mold 111A and the second mold 111B are heated by a heater (not shown) and maintained at a high temperature.
  • the decorative sheet laminate 25 is accommodated in the cavity 112 within the molding die 111 .
  • the decorative sheet laminate 25 is arranged in the second mold 111B such that the decorative sheet 30 is exposed in the cavity 112.
  • molten injection resin 114 is injected into cavity 112 through gate 113 .
  • the injected resin 114 is cooled in the cavity 112, welded to the decorative sheet 30 and solidified.
  • the thermoplastic resin portion 64 joined to the decorative sheet 30 is obtained from the solidified injected resin 114 .
  • the material of the thermoplastic resin portion 64 is as described above.
  • the first die 111A and the second die 111B are separated from each other.
  • the thermoplastic resin portion 64 is joined to the first mold 111A.
  • the base material 70 may be fixed to the second mold 111B.
  • the base material 70 and the resin transfer layer 80 are separated from the decorative sheet 30 as the first mold 111A and the second mold 111B are separated. . Peeling is promoted by the coating layer 72 functioning as a release layer 73 .
  • the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 are manufactured.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 may be hardened on the decorative member 20 removed from the mold 111 .
  • the linear pattern layer 40 may be cured.
  • the pattern laminate 26 may be formed on the decorative sheet laminate 25.
  • the configuration such as the dimensions of the recess 27 that can form the recess 27 in the decorative member 20 may be the same as the configuration such as the dimension described in the first embodiment.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 displays the linear pattern 35 .
  • the linear pattern may be a hairline pattern, a spin pattern, a wood grain pattern, or a woven pattern.
  • the design layer 60 and the design may be displayed.
  • the same effect as in the first embodiment is obtained.
  • an image having a shape corresponding to the shape of the transmissive area 66b can be displayed.
  • a display device 16 displays an image to be viewed by an observer.
  • the linear elements have steep side walls in the normal direction of the decorative sheet.
  • the outer contour of the side wall is slightly inclined and curved.
  • the sidewalls can exert a lens effect on the light emitted from the linear element through the sidewalls. It was presumed that the light emitted from the linear elements in the arrangement direction is condensed to some extent by the lens effect on the side wall, and can be observed as blurring 101 spreading in the arrangement direction of the linear elements with respect to the image 100 .
  • Each linear element includes a pair of side walls that face each other in the arrangement direction. If the sidewalls rise in the normal direction, the light traveling through the linear element can repeatedly reflect, especially total internal reflection, at the sidewalls. In this way, the image light travels through the linear element in the longitudinal direction of the linear element. It was speculated that the image light spreads along the linear element due to the light guide action in the linear element, and can be observed as blurring 101 that spreads in the longitudinal direction of the linear element with respect to the image 100 .
  • the linear pattern layer 40 includes multiple linear elements 45 .
  • the plurality of linear elements 45 are arranged in one arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example).
  • Each linear element 45 extends in the longitudinal direction (the first direction D1 in the illustrated example) that is the other direction orthogonal to the one direction.
  • the ten-point average roughness Rz defined in JISB0601-1994, and the ten-point average roughness Rz along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 3.2 ⁇ m or less, or 2.5 ⁇ m or less. , 2.4 ⁇ m or less.
  • the height of the sidewalls of the linear elements 45 is restricted.
  • the sidewalls 42 tend to be greatly inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 .
  • an upper limit may be set for Rz along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 and an upper limit for Ra defined in JISB0601-1994. In this case, bleeding can be suppressed more effectively.
  • Ra along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 1.4 ⁇ m or less, 1.1 ⁇ m or less, or 0.9 ⁇ m or less. Bleeding can also be suppressed by adjusting Ra together with Rz in this way.
  • An upper limit may be set for Rz along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 and an upper limit for PV defined in JISB0601-1994.
  • the PV along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 4.7 ⁇ m or less, 3.9 ⁇ m or less, or 3.8 ⁇ m or less. Bleeding can also be suppressed by adjusting PV together with Rz in this way.
  • An upper limit may be set for Rz along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45, and an upper limit may be set for rms defined in JISB0601-1994.
  • the rms along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 1.5 ⁇ m or less, 1.2 m or less, or 1.1 ⁇ m or less. Bleeding can also be suppressed by adjusting rms together with Rz in this way.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45.
  • the plurality of linear elements 45 are arranged in one arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). Each linear element 45 extends in the longitudinal direction (the first direction D1 in the illustrated example) that is the other direction orthogonal to the one direction.
  • the plurality of linear elements 45 includes linear protrusions 45A and linear recesses 45B alternately arranged in the arrangement direction.
  • a side wall inclination angle ⁇ specified by a main cutting plane crossing linear protrusions 45A and linear recesses 45B adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction may be 66° or more, 73° or more, or 76° or more.
  • the side wall inclination angle ⁇ is determined by a straight line SL passing through a first position P1 and a second position P2 on the linear pattern layer 40 on the main cut surface of the decorative sheet 30, is the angle (°) between the normal direction D3 and
  • the sidewall inclination angle ⁇ is 0° or more and 90° or less.
  • the main cutting plane of the decorative sheet 30 is a cross section along both the normal direction of the decorative sheet and the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • the first position P1 is the highest by 10% of the height difference HD between the highest position HP of the linear protrusion 45A crossed by the main cutting plane and the lowest position LP of the linear recess 45B adjacent to the linear protrusion 45A. It is a position on the linear pattern layer 40 lower than the position HP.
  • the second position P2 is a position on the linear pattern layer 40 higher than the lowest position LP by 10% of the height difference HD.
  • the first position P1 is positioned between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in one direction, which is the direction in which the linear elements 45 are arranged.
  • a plurality of positions lower than the highest position HP by 10% of the height difference HD may exist between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • the position closest to the lowest position LP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 is the first position P1.
  • the second position P2 is located between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • a plurality of positions higher than the lowest position LP by 10% of the height difference HD can exist between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 .
  • the position closest to the highest position HP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 is the second position P2.
  • the sidewall inclination angle ⁇ specified in this way is 66° or more
  • the sidewall of the linear element 45 is greatly inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative member 20 .
  • the side wall inclination angle ⁇ is 66° or more
  • the height of the side wall 42 along the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 can be reduced.
  • the decorative sheet 30 according to the second embodiment blurring of the outline of the image can be suppressed in the operating state of the light source device 12 or the display device 16 .
  • the outline of the image becomes clear, and blurring of the outline of the image can be suppressed.
  • Display system 10 is capable of displaying sharp images.
  • fine unevenness may be formed on the surface of the linear pattern layer 40 as shown in FIG. 31B.
  • FIG. 31B by providing fine unevenness to the surface of the linear element 45, the lens effect and light guiding action of the linear element can be effectively weakened.
  • a lower limit may be set for the height of the sidewalls of the linear elements 45.
  • the Rz defined in JISB0601-1994 along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 0.5 ⁇ m or more, or may be 1.2 ⁇ m or more.
  • Ra defined in JISB0601-1994, and Ra along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 0.2 ⁇ m or more, or 0.6 ⁇ m or more.
  • the PV defined in JISB0601-1994, and the PV along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 0.9 ⁇ m or more, or may be 2.2 ⁇ m or more. By thus setting the lower limit of the PV, the linear pattern 35 can be displayed clearly.
  • the rms defined in JISB0601-1994 and the rms along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 0.2 ⁇ m or more, or may be 0.6 ⁇ m or more. By setting the lower limit of rms in this way, the linear pattern 35 can be clearly displayed.
  • an upper limit may be set for the side wall inclination angle ⁇ .
  • the sidewall inclination angle ⁇ may be 87° or less.
  • the decorative sheet 30 includes the linear pattern layer 40.
  • Linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 .
  • a plurality of linear elements 45 are arranged in one direction.
  • Each linear element 45 extends in the other direction perpendicular to the one direction.
  • the total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30 is 5% or more and 90% or less.
  • Rz defined in JISB0601-1994, and Rz along one direction is 3.2 ⁇ m or less. According to the linear pattern layer 40 having such Rz, it is possible to suppress the light guiding action and lens effect of the linear elements 45 . It is possible to suppress blurring of the contour of the image 100 . Therefore, by using the decorative sheet 30, a sharp image can be displayed.
  • the decorative sheet 30 includes the linear pattern layer 40.
  • Linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 .
  • a plurality of linear elements 45 are arranged in one direction. Each linear element 45 extends in the other direction perpendicular to the one direction.
  • the plurality of linear elements 45 includes linear protrusions 45A and linear recesses 45B alternately arranged in one direction.
  • the total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30 is 5% or more and 90% or less.
  • a side wall inclination angle ⁇ specified by a main cutting plane crossing the linear convex portion 45A and the linear concave portion 45B adjacent to each other in one direction is 66° or more.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 having such a side wall inclination angle ⁇ , it is possible to suppress the light guiding action and lens effect of the linear elements 45 . It is possible to suppress blurring of the contour of the image 100 . Therefore, by using the decorative sheet 30, a sharp image can be displayed.
  • the layer structure of the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 are possible.
  • either one of the bonding layer 62 and the design layer 60 may be omitted from the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the decorative sheet 30 may include a light shielding pattern sheet 66.
  • the light shielding pattern sheet 66 may be omitted from the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20.
  • the linear pattern layer 40 may include a protective layer forming the outermost surface of the decorative member 20 or the decorative sheet 30 .
  • the linear pattern layer 40 may include a concavo-convex base layer containing the plurality of linear elements described above, and a protective layer laminated on the concavo-convex base layer.
  • the protective layer may be thinly formed along the uneven surface of the uneven base layer.
  • the protective layer may be provided so as to fill the uneven surface of the uneven base layer so as to form a refractive index interface with the uneven base layer.
  • the protective layer may be a hard coat layer containing a cured product of a curable resin composition.
  • the arrangement of the components included in the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 can also be changed as appropriate.
  • the modified example described in the first embodiment may be applied to the second embodiment.
  • the arrangement of the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 and the arrangement of the components included in the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 can be changed as appropriate.
  • the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 may be arranged in the opposite direction in the third direction D3.
  • the display system 10 may be configured by stacking the decorative sheet 30 on the light source device 12 or the display device 16 .
  • the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 may have a three-dimensional shape, in other words, a three-dimensional shape.
  • the decorating member 20 having a three-dimensional shape may be produced by insert-molding the preformed decorating sheet 30 by vacuum forming, pressure forming, or the like.
  • the decorative sheet 30 may be used for in-mold molding.
  • the decorative sheet 30 may be used for TOM molding.
  • the thermoplastic resin part 64 produced by injection molding may have a three-dimensional shape, in other words, a three-dimensional shape.
  • the decorative sheet 30 may be directly manufactured from the plate 90 without forming the resin imprinting layer 80 . That is, the resin imprint layer 80 may constitute the linear pattern layer 40 .
  • a decorative sheet according to Examples 11 to 17 and a decorative sheet according to Comparative Example 11 were produced.
  • the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11 had a design layer, a bonding layer and a linear pattern layer, like the decorative sheet shown in FIG.
  • a plate was prepared, a laminate of a base material and a resin imprinting layer was prepared using this plate, a decorative sheet laminate was prepared from this laminate, and a decorative sheet laminate was prepared from the laminate.
  • a decorative sheet was produced by peeling off the base material and the resin imprinting layer.
  • the production method described above was used to make the plate.
  • the image data was used as a common hairline pattern to be manufactured, and this hairline pattern was created by a designer.
  • the hairline pattern to be manufactured had dimensions of 100 mm ⁇ 100 mm.
  • the linear elements extended over the entire length of the hairline pattern, that is, 100 mm.
  • the width along the arrangement direction of the linear elements was about 20 ⁇ m.
  • the plates used for manufacturing the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 13 were subjected to blasting. Different plates with different degrees of blasting were used to manufacture the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 13.
  • the plates used for manufacturing the decorative sheets according to Examples 14 to 17 and Comparative Example 11 were not subjected to blasting. A common plate was used for manufacturing the decorative sheets according to Examples 14 to 17 and Comparative Example 11. Except for the blasting process, the plate manufacturing conditions were the same for the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11.
  • the height difference of the concave-convex structure due to the plate linear elements formed on the plate surface was about 5 ⁇ m.
  • the plates used for producing the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 13 had a height difference of about 5 ⁇ m in the concave-convex structure due to the plate linear elements formed on the plate surface.
  • the above-described manufacturing method described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33 was adopted for manufacturing the laminate including the base material and the resin transfer layer using a plate.
  • a polyethylene terephthalate film common to the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11 was used as a substrate.
  • the same UV curable resin was used for the resin imprinting layers of the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11.
  • the coating layer described with reference to FIG. 33 was not used.
  • the coating layer described with reference to FIG. 33 was used.
  • the decorative sheets according to Examples 14 to 17 differed in the thickness of the coating layer.
  • the coating layer was produced using a thermosetting resin.
  • the manufacturing method described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36 was adopted for manufacturing the decorative sheet laminate.
  • the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11 used the same manufacturing method and manufacturing conditions for the linear pattern layer, the bonding layer, and the design layer.
  • the linear pattern layer was produced using an ultraviolet curable resin.
  • the joining layer was produced using a thermoplastic resin.
  • the design layer was produced by printing.
  • Comparative Example 11 As described above, in Comparative Example 11, a plate was produced by the method described with reference to FIGS. After that, a decorative sheet laminate is produced by the method described with reference to FIGS. manufactured. No blasting is used in plate manufacture. No coating layer was used in the production of the decorative sheet.
  • Examples 11 to 13 The decorative sheet manufacturing methods of Examples 11 to 13 differed from the decorative sheet manufacturing method of Comparative Example 11 only in that the plate manufacturing method included blasting. Except for the blasting treatment, the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 13 employ the same manufacturing method and the same manufacturing conditions as the decorative sheet according to Comparative Example 11.
  • the blasting conditions were changed between the decorative sheets according to Examples 11-13.
  • the conditions for jetting glass beads and the types of glass beads differed.
  • Example 11 The degree of blasting adopted in Example 11 was evaluated as follows. The blasting treatment employed in Example 11 was performed on the surface of the same flat copper plate as the copper plate used to make the plate. The blasted copper plate was chromium plated in the same manner as the plate. An uncured ultraviolet curable resin was applied to the fine uneven surface formed by blasting the copper plate, and the coating film was cured to produce a transparent diffuser plate. The transmission haze of the transparent diffusion plate was measured. A haze meter (manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory, product number: HM-150) was used to measure the transmission haze. The transmission haze of the transparent diffusion plate produced by blasting used in Example 11 was 48%.
  • Examples 14 to 17 The methods for manufacturing the decorative sheets according to Examples 14 to 17 differed from the decorative sheets according to the comparative examples only in that a coating layer was formed on the uneven surface of the resin imprinting layer before the formation of the linear pattern layer. different from the manufacturing method of The decorative sheets according to Examples 14 to 17 employ the same manufacturing method and the same manufacturing conditions as the decorative sheet according to Comparative Example 11, except for the formation of the coating layer.
  • the thickness of the coating layer was changed between the decorative sheets according to Examples 14-17.
  • the thickness of the coating layer of Example 14 was 1 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the coating layer of Example 15 was 2 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the coating layer of Example 16 was 5 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the coating layer of Example 17 was 10 ⁇ m.
  • the height difference of the concave-convex structure of the resin imprinting layer was 5 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the coating layer of Example 14 was 10% of the height difference of the uneven structure of the resin imprinting layer.
  • the thickness of the coating layer of Example 15 was 20% of the height difference of the concave-convex structure of the resin imprinting layer.
  • the thickness of the coating layer of Example 16 was 100% of the height difference of the uneven structure of the resin imprinting layer.
  • the thickness of the coating layer of Example 17 was 200% of the height difference of the uneven structure of the resin imprinting layer.
  • Each measurement result shown in Table 2 was obtained by dividing each side of a square area having a side of about 1000 ⁇ m in the decorative sheet to be measured into three equal parts and dividing each side into nine small areas. It is the average value of a total of nine measurements taken at the central position.
  • a display system shown in FIG. 43 was produced by combining the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11 with a display device having a light shielding pattern sheet and a light source device.
  • the light source device was a light emitting diode.
  • the display device was capable of displaying square-shaped images. The sides of the square formed by the image extended in the longitudinal direction and the arrangement direction of the linear elements.

Abstract

The decorative sheet includes a linear patterned layer. The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements. Each linear element includes a two-dimensional array of unit elements. The total light transmittance is 5% to 90%.

Description

加飾シート、加飾部材、表示システム、版の製造方法、加飾シートの製造方法及び加飾部材の製造方法Decorative sheet, decorative member, display system, plate manufacturing method, decorative sheet manufacturing method, and decorative member manufacturing method
 本開示は、加飾シート、加飾部材、表示システム、版の製造方法、加飾シートの製造方法及び加飾部材の製造方法に関する。 The present disclosure relates to a decorative sheet, a decorative member, a display system, a plate manufacturing method, a decorative sheet manufacturing method, and a decorative member manufacturing method.
 線状模様が表面装飾に用いられている。線状模様は、例えば、線状要素が一定の方向に直線状に延びるヘアライン模様でもよい。線状模様は、線状要素が周方向に曲線状に延びるスピン模様でもよい。線状模様は、金属の表面を所定の方向にけがくことにより、作製され得る。 A linear pattern is used for surface decoration. The linear pattern may be, for example, a hairline pattern in which linear elements extend linearly in a given direction. The linear pattern may be a spin pattern in which linear elements extend in a curved shape in the circumferential direction. A linear pattern can be made by scribing the surface of the metal in a predetermined direction.
 線状模様は、木目を表現した木目模様でもよい。線状模様は、織物を表現した織物模様でもよい。線状模様は、織物模様の一例として、植物繊維を織って得られた布模様でもよい。線状模様は、織物模様の一例として、カーボン繊維を織って得られたカーボン柄でもよい。線状模様は、織物模様の一例として、デニムを表現したデニム柄でもよい。 The linear pattern may be a wood grain pattern that expresses wood grain. The linear pattern may be a woven pattern representing a woven fabric. The linear pattern may be a cloth pattern obtained by weaving plant fibers, as an example of a textile pattern. The linear pattern may be a carbon pattern obtained by weaving carbon fibers, as an example of a woven pattern. The linear pattern may be a denim pattern representing denim, as an example of a textile pattern.
 例えば特許文献1及び2では、樹脂を用いた加飾シートによって線状模様を表現している。この加飾シートは、線状凸部または線状凹部としての線状要素を含む。線状要素は、その長手方向と直交する方向に配列されている。線状要素は、エンボス加工等の樹脂賦型によって、作製され得る。 For example, in Patent Documents 1 and 2, a decorative sheet using resin expresses a linear pattern. This decorative sheet includes linear elements as linear protrusions or linear recesses. The linear elements are arranged in a direction perpendicular to their longitudinal direction. Linear elements can be made by resin molding such as embossing.
 加飾シートは、画像を形成する表示装置や光源装置等に重ねて配置され得る。加飾シートは、表示装置や光源装置等とともに、表示システムを構成する。表示システムにおいて、加飾シートは、表示装置や光源装置からの光を透過させて、画像の透過観察を可能とする。画像が表示されていない状態において、加飾シートは表示装置や光源装置を隠蔽できる。 The decorative sheet can be placed over a display device, light source device, or the like that forms an image. A decorative sheet constitutes a display system together with a display device, a light source device, and the like. In the display system, the decorative sheet allows transmission of light from the display device and the light source device to enable transmission observation of the image. The decorative sheet can hide the display device and the light source device when no image is displayed.
 特許文献1:JP2010-52353A
 特許文献2:JP2008-89479A
Patent Document 1: JP2010-52353A
Patent Document 2: JP2008-89479A
 しかしながら、従来の加飾シートを用いた表示システムでは、画像の輪郭が滲み、画像の輪郭がぼやけてしまうといった不具合が生じる。 However, in a display system using a conventional decorative sheet, there is a problem that the contour of the image blurs and the contour of the image becomes blurred.
 本開示は、表示システムにおける、画像の輪郭の滲みの抑制を目的とする。 The present disclosure aims at suppressing blurring of image contours in a display system.
 本開示の一実施の形態は、次の<1>~<54>に関する。 An embodiment of the present disclosure relates to the following <1> to <54>.
<1>
 線状模様層を備え、
 前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
 各線状要素は、二次元配列された単位要素を含み、
 全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である、加飾シート。
<1>
Equipped with a linear pattern layer,
The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
A decorative sheet having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
<2>
 線状模様層を備え、
 前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
 前記線状要素は、その長手方向における中間部に、前記長手方向に非平行な側壁を含む、
 全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である、加飾シート。
<2>
Equipped with a linear pattern layer,
The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
The linear element includes a side wall non-parallel to the longitudinal direction at an intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction,
A decorative sheet having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
<3>
 線状模様層を備え、
 前記線状模様層は、一方向に配列された複数の線状要素を含み、
 各線状要素は、二次元配列された単位要素を含み、
 前記単位要素は、単位凸部又は単位凹部である、加飾シート。
<3>
Equipped with a linear pattern layer,
The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements arranged in one direction,
Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
The decorative sheet, wherein the unit elements are unit protrusions or unit recesses.
<4>
 前記線状模様層は、ヘアライン模様、スピン模様、木目模様、又は織物模様を表示する、<1>~<3>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<4>
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the linear pattern layer displays a hairline pattern, a spin pattern, a wood grain pattern, or a woven pattern.
<5>
 各線状要素は、二次元配列された単位要素を含み、
 前記単位要素の最大長さは、1μm以上50μm以下である、<1>~<4>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<5>
Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the unit element has a maximum length of 1 μm or more and 50 μm or less.
<6>
 各線状要素は、二次元配列された単位要素を含み、
 前記単位要素によって構成される凹凸構造の高低差は、0.3μm以上20μm以下である、<1>~<5>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<6>
Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the uneven structure formed by the unit elements has a height difference of 0.3 μm or more and 20 μm or less.
<7>
 前記線状要素の配列方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素の間で、JISB0601-1994に規定された十点平均粗さRzであって前記線状要素の長手方向に沿った前記十点平均粗さRzは、異なる、<1>~<6>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<7>
Between two linear elements adjacent in the arrangement direction of the linear elements, the ten-point average roughness Rz specified in JISB0601-1994 and the ten-point average roughness along the longitudinal direction of the linear elements The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <6>, wherein Rz is different.
<8>
 各線状要素は、二次元配列された単位要素を含み、
 前記単位要素は、単位凸部又は単位凹部であり、
 前記線状要素の配列方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素の間で、前記単位凹部の配置割合は異なる、<1>~<7>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<8>
Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
The unit element is a unit convex portion or a unit concave portion,
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <7>, wherein the arrangement ratio of the unit recesses differs between two linear elements adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction of the linear elements.
<9>
 前記線状要素の配列方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素の間で、平均高さは異なる、<1>~<8>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<9>
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <8>, wherein two linear elements adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction of the linear elements have different average heights.
<10>
 前記線状要素は、その長手方向に分散した側壁を含む、<1>~<9>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<10>
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <9>, wherein the linear elements include side walls dispersed in the longitudinal direction thereof.
<11>
 前記線状要素は、その配列方向に分散した側壁を含む、<1>~<10>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<11>
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <10>, wherein the linear elements include side walls dispersed in the arrangement direction.
<12>
 JISB0601-1994に規定された十点平均粗さRzであって前記線状要素の長手方向に沿った当該線状要素の前記十点平均粗さRzは、5.5μm以下である、<1>~<11>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<12>
<1> The decorative sheet according to any one of <11>.
<13>
 各線状要素は、二次元配列された単位要素を含み、
 各単位要素は、単位凸部または単位凹部である、<1>~<12>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<13>
Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <12>, wherein each unit element is a unit convex portion or a unit concave portion.
<14>
 各線状要素内における前記単位凹部の割合は、40%以下または60%以上である、<13>に記載の加飾シート。
<14>
The decorative sheet according to <13>, wherein the ratio of the unit recesses in each linear element is 40% or less or 60% or more.
<15>
 前記単位要素は、第1配列方向および前記第1配列方向と非平行な第2配列方向に配列され、
 前記単位凹部の割合が40%以下である線状要素において、前記単位凹部と前記第1配列方向に隣り合う前記単位要素は前記単位凸部であり、前記単位凹部と前記第2配列方向に隣り合う前記単位要素は前記単位凸部であり、
 前記単位凹部の割合が60%以上である線状要素において、前記単位凸部と前記第1配列方向に隣り合う前記単位要素は前記単位凹部であり、前記単位凸部と前記第2配列方向に隣り合う前記単位要素は前記単位凹部である、<14>に記載の加飾シート。
<15>
the unit elements are arranged in a first arrangement direction and a second arrangement direction non-parallel to the first arrangement direction;
In the linear element in which the proportion of the unit recesses is 40% or less, the unit elements adjacent to the unit recesses in the first arrangement direction are the unit protrusions, and are adjacent to the unit recesses in the second arrangement direction. The matching unit element is the unit protrusion,
In the linear element in which the ratio of the unit concave portion is 60% or more, the unit element adjacent to the unit convex portion in the first arrangement direction is the unit concave portion, and the unit convex portion and the unit convex portion are arranged in the second arrangement direction. The decorative sheet according to <14>, wherein the adjacent unit elements are the unit recesses.
<16>
 各線状要素は、二次元配列された単位要素を含み、
 前記単位要素は、配列方向に配列され、
 前記配列方向に沿った断面において特定される壁部傾斜角度は、66°以上である、<1>~<15>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<16>
Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
The unit elements are arranged in an array direction,
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <15>, wherein the wall portion inclination angle specified in the cross section along the arrangement direction is 66° or more.
<17>
 前記線状要素の長手方向に沿った長さは、20μm以上2m以下であり、
 前記線状要素の前記長手方向に直交する方向に沿った幅は、10μm以上1000μm以下である、<1>~<16>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<17>
The length of the linear element along the longitudinal direction is 20 μm or more and 2 m or less,
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <16>, wherein the linear element has a width of 10 μm or more and 1000 μm or less along the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction.
<18>
 前記線状模様層と重ねられた遮光パターンシートを備え、
 前記遮光パターンシートは、可視光遮光性を有した遮光領域と、可視光透過性を有した透過領域と、を含む、<1>~<17>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<18>
A light-shielding pattern sheet superimposed on the linear pattern layer,
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <17>, wherein the light-shielding pattern sheet includes a light-shielding region having a property of blocking visible light and a transmitting region having a property of transmitting visible light.
<19>
 前記線状模様層は、電子線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を含む、<1>~<18>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<19>
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <18>, wherein the linear pattern layer comprises a cured product of an electron beam curable resin composition.
<20>
 前記線状模様層は、光安定剤及び紫外線吸収剤の一以上を含む、<1>~<19>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<20>
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <19>, wherein the linear pattern layer contains one or more of a light stabilizer and an ultraviolet absorber.
<21>
 <1>~<20>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シートと、
 前記加飾シートに接合した熱可塑性樹脂部と、を備える、加飾部材。
<21>
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <20>;
A decorative member comprising: a thermoplastic resin portion joined to the decorative sheet.
<22>
 線状模様層と、線状模様層と重ねられた熱可塑性樹脂部と、を備え、
 前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
 各線状要素は、二次元配列された単位要素を含み、
 前記熱可塑性樹脂部は、熱可塑性樹脂を含み、
 全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である、加飾部材。
<22>
comprising a linear pattern layer and a thermoplastic resin part superimposed on the linear pattern layer,
The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
The thermoplastic resin portion contains a thermoplastic resin,
A decorative member having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
<23>
 線状模様層と、線状模様層と重ねられた熱可塑性樹脂部と、を備え、
 前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
 前記線状要素は、その長手方向における中間部に、前記長手方向に非平行な側壁を含み、
 前記熱可塑性樹脂部は、熱可塑性樹脂を含み、
 全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である、加飾部材。
<23>
comprising a linear pattern layer and a thermoplastic resin part superimposed on the linear pattern layer,
The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
the linear element includes a side wall non-parallel to the longitudinal direction at an intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction;
The thermoplastic resin portion contains a thermoplastic resin,
A decorative member having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
<24>
 線状模様層と、線状模様層と重ねられた熱可塑性樹脂部と、を備え、
 前記線状模様層は、一方向に配列された複数の線状要素を含み、
 各線状要素は、二次元配列された単位要素を含み、
 前記単位要素は、単位凸部又は単位凹部である、加飾部材。
<24>
comprising a linear pattern layer and a thermoplastic resin part superimposed on the linear pattern layer,
The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements arranged in one direction,
Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
The decorative member, wherein the unit elements are unit protrusions or unit recesses.
<25>
 <1>~<20>のいずれか一項に記載された加飾シート又は<21>~<24>のいずれか一項に記載された加飾部材と、
 前記加飾シート又は前記加飾部材と重ねられた表示装置又は光源装置と、を備える、表示システム。
<25>
The decorative sheet according to any one of <1> to <20> or the decorative member according to any one of <21> to <24>;
A display system comprising: a display device or a light source device superimposed on the decorative sheet or the decorative member.
<26>
 線状模様を表示する加飾シートの製造に用いられる版を、金属面に凹部を形成することにより製造する、版の製造方法であって、
 線状模様についての多階調グレースケール画像データを用意する工程と、
 画像データの各画素に対応する画素領域を設定し、各画素領域を複数のサブ領域に区分けし、各サブ領域を第1区域および第2区域にいずれかに割り振る工程と、
 前記第2区域の配置パターンにて前記金属面に前記凹部を形成する工程と、を備え、
 各画素領域における第2区域の割合は、当該画素の階調に応じて決定する、版の製造方法。
<26>
A plate manufacturing method for manufacturing a plate used for manufacturing a decorative sheet displaying a linear pattern by forming recesses in a metal surface,
preparing multi-tone grayscale image data for the linear pattern;
setting a pixel region corresponding to each pixel of image data, dividing each pixel region into a plurality of sub-regions, and allocating each sub-region to either a first region or a second region;
forming the recesses in the metal surface in the arrangement pattern of the second regions;
A printing plate manufacturing method, wherein the proportion of the second area in each pixel area is determined according to the gradation of the pixel.
<27>
 前記凹部が形成された前記金属面をブラスト処理する工程を、備える、<26>に記載の版の製造方法。
<27>
The plate manufacturing method according to <26>, comprising the step of blasting the metal surface on which the recesses are formed.
<28>
 <26>又は<27>に記載された製造方法により製造された版を用いて樹脂賦形層を作製する工程を備える、加飾シートの製造方法。
<28>
A method for producing a decorative sheet, comprising a step of producing a resin imprint layer using a plate produced by the production method described in <26> or <27>.
<29>
 前記版から剥がした前記樹脂賦形層を第2版として用い、前記樹脂賦形層に樹脂組成物を供給して、前記樹脂組成物を硬化することにより、線状模様層を作製する工程を備える、<28>に記載の加飾シートの製造方法。
<29>
A step of producing a linear pattern layer by using the resin-shaped layer peeled off from the plate as a second plate, supplying a resin composition to the resin-shaped layer, and curing the resin composition. The method for producing a decorative sheet according to <28>, comprising:
<30>
 前記樹脂賦形層は、前記線状模様層である、<28>に記載の加飾シートの製造方法。
<30>
The method for producing a decorative sheet according to <28>, wherein the resin-shaped layer is the linear pattern layer.
<31>
 前記版から剥がした前記樹脂賦形層の前記版に接触していた面に、第1樹脂組成物を供給し、前記第1樹脂組成物から被覆層を作製する工程と、
 前記被覆層上に第2樹脂組成物を供給して、前記第2樹脂組成物を硬化することにより、線状模様層を作製する工程と、を備える、<28>に記載の加飾シートの製造方法。
<31>
A step of supplying a first resin composition to the surface of the resin imprinting layer peeled off from the plate that was in contact with the plate, and producing a coating layer from the first resin composition;
The decorative sheet according to <28>, comprising a step of producing a linear pattern layer by supplying a second resin composition onto the coating layer and curing the second resin composition. Production method.
<32>
 前記線状模様層に重ねられた意匠層を作製する工程を備える、<28>~<31>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シートの製造方法。
<32>
The method for producing a decorative sheet according to any one of <28> to <31>, comprising the step of forming a design layer overlaid on the linear pattern layer.
<33>
 <28>~<32>のいずれか一項に記載された製造方法により製造された加飾シートを、キャビティ内に配置する工程と、
 前記加飾シートが配置された前記キャビティ内に加熱された熱可塑性樹脂を供給し、前記加飾シートと接合した熱可塑性樹脂部を作製する工程と、を備える、加飾部材の製造方法。
<33>
placing the decorative sheet manufactured by the manufacturing method according to any one of <28> to <32> in the cavity;
A method of manufacturing a decorative member, comprising: supplying a heated thermoplastic resin into the cavity in which the decorative sheet is arranged to produce a thermoplastic resin portion joined to the decorative sheet.
<34>
 線状模様層を備え、
 前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
 前記複数の線状要素は、一方向に配列され、
 各線状要素は、前記一方向に交差する他方向に延び、
 JISB0601-1994に規定された十点平均粗さRzであって前記一方向に沿った前記十点平均粗さRzは、3.2μm以下であり、
 全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である、加飾シート。
<34>
Equipped with a linear pattern layer,
The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
The plurality of linear elements are arranged in one direction,
Each linear element extends in the other direction intersecting the one direction,
The ten-point average roughness Rz defined in JISB0601-1994 and along the one direction is 3.2 μm or less,
A decorative sheet having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
<35>
 前記一方向に沿った前記十点平均粗さRzは、0.5μm以上である、<34>に記載の加飾シート。
<35>
The decorative sheet according to <34>, wherein the ten-point average roughness Rz along the one direction is 0.5 μm or more.
<36>
 前記線状模様層は、前記一方向に交互に配置された線状凸部及び線状凹部を含み、
 前記一方向に隣り合う線状凸部及び線状凹部を横切る断面にて特定される側壁傾斜角度は、66°以上であり、
 前記断面は、前記加飾シートの法線方向および前記一方向の両方に沿った断面であり、
 前記側壁傾斜角度は、前記断面において、前記線状模様層上となる第1位置および第2位置を通過する直線と、前記法線方向と、の間の角度であり、
 前記第1位置は、前記断面が横切る前記線状凸部の最高位置と前記線状凸部に隣り合う前記線状凹部の最低位置との高低差の10%だけ、前記最高位置から低い前記線状模様層上の位置であり、
 前記第2位置は、前記高低差の10%だけ前記最低位置から高い前記線状模様層上の位置であり、
 前記第1位置および前記第2位置は、前記一方向において、前記最高位置および前記最低位置の間に位置する、<34>又は<35>に記載の加飾シート。
<36>
The linear pattern layer includes linear protrusions and linear recesses alternately arranged in the one direction,
A side wall inclination angle specified in a cross section across the linear protrusions and linear recesses adjacent to each other in one direction is 66° or more,
The cross section is a cross section along both the normal direction of the decorative sheet and the one direction,
The side wall inclination angle is an angle between a straight line passing through a first position and a second position on the linear pattern layer and the normal direction in the cross section,
The first position is the line lower than the highest position by 10% of the height difference between the highest position of the linear protrusion crossed by the cross section and the lowest position of the linear recess adjacent to the linear protrusion. is the position on the pattern layer,
The second position is a position on the linear pattern layer higher than the lowest position by 10% of the height difference,
The decorative sheet according to <34> or <35>, wherein the first position and the second position are located between the highest position and the lowest position in the one direction.
<37>
 線状模様層を備える加飾シートであって、
 全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下であり、
 前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
 前記複数の線状要素は、一方向に配置され、
 各線状要素は、前記一方向に交差する他方向に延び、
 前記複数の線状要素は、一方向に交互に配置された線状凸部及び線状凹部を含み、
 前記一方向に隣り合う線状凸部および線状凹部を横切る断面にて特定される側壁傾斜角度は、66°以上であり、
 前記断面は、前記加飾シートの法線方向および前記一方向の両方に沿った断面であり、
 前記側壁傾斜角度は、前記断面において、前記線状模様層上となる第1位置および第2位置を通過する直線と、前記法線方向と、の間の角度であり、
 前記第1位置は、前記断面が横切る前記線状凸部の最高位置と前記線状凸部に隣り合う前記線状凹部の最低位置との高低差の10%だけ、前記最高位置から低い前記線状模様層上の位置であり、
 前記第2位置は、前記高低差の10%だけ前記最低位置から高い前記線状模様層上の位置であり、
 前記第1位置および前記第2位置は、前記一方向において、前記最高位置および前記最低位置の間に位置する、加飾シート。
<37>
A decorative sheet comprising a linear pattern layer,
The total light transmittance is 5% or more and 90% or less,
The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
The plurality of linear elements are arranged in one direction,
Each linear element extends in the other direction intersecting the one direction,
The plurality of linear elements include linear protrusions and linear recesses alternately arranged in one direction,
A side wall inclination angle specified in a cross section that crosses the linear protrusions and linear recesses that are adjacent to each other in one direction is 66° or more,
The cross section is a cross section along both the normal direction of the decorative sheet and the one direction,
The side wall inclination angle is an angle between a straight line passing through a first position and a second position on the linear pattern layer and the normal direction in the cross section,
The first position is the line lower than the highest position by 10% of the height difference between the highest position of the linear protrusion crossed by the cross section and the lowest position of the linear recess adjacent to the linear protrusion. is the position on the pattern layer,
The second position is a position on the linear pattern layer higher than the lowest position by 10% of the height difference,
The decorative sheet, wherein the first position and the second position are located between the highest position and the lowest position in the one direction.
<38>
 前記側壁傾斜角度は87°以下である、<36>又は<37>に記載の加飾シート。
<38>
The decorative sheet according to <36> or <37>, wherein the sidewall inclination angle is 87° or less.
<39>
 前記線状模様層は、ヘアライン模様、スピン模様、木目模様、又は織物模様を表示する、<34>~<38>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<39>
The decorative sheet according to any one of <34> to <38>, wherein the linear pattern layer displays a hairline pattern, a spin pattern, a wood grain pattern, or a woven pattern.
<40>
 前記線状要素の前記他方向に沿った長さは、20μm以上2m以下であり、
 前記線状要素の前記一方向に沿った幅は、10μm以上1000μm以下である、<34>~<39>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<40>
The length of the linear element along the other direction is 20 μm or more and 2 m or less,
The decorative sheet according to any one of <34> to <39>, wherein the linear element has a width along the one direction of 10 μm or more and 1000 μm or less.
<41>
 前記線状模様層と重ねられた遮光パターンシートを備え、
 前記遮光パターンシートは、可視光遮光性を有した遮光領域と、可視光透過性を有した透過領域と、を含む、<34>~<40>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<41>
A light-shielding pattern sheet superimposed on the linear pattern layer,
The decorative sheet according to any one of <34> to <40>, wherein the light-shielding pattern sheet includes a light-shielding region having a property of blocking visible light and a transmitting region having a property of transmitting visible light.
<42>
 前記線状模様層は、電子線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を含む、<34>~<41>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<42>
The decorative sheet according to any one of <34> to <41>, wherein the linear pattern layer comprises a cured product of an electron beam curable resin composition.
<43>
 前記線状模様層は、光安定剤及び紫外線吸収剤の一以上を含む、<34>~<42>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
<43>
The decorative sheet according to any one of <34> to <42>, wherein the linear pattern layer contains one or more of a light stabilizer and an ultraviolet absorber.
<44>
 <34>~<43>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シートと、
 前記加飾シートに接合した熱可塑性樹脂部と、を備える、加飾部材。
<44>
The decorative sheet according to any one of <34> to <43>;
A decorative member comprising: a thermoplastic resin portion joined to the decorative sheet.
<45>
 線状模様層と、線状模様層と重ねられた熱可塑性樹脂部と、を備え、
 前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
 前記複数の線状要素は、一方向に配列され、
 各線状要素は、前記一方向に交差する他方向に延び、
 JISB0601-1994に規定された十点平均粗さRzであって前記一方向に沿った前記十点平均粗さRzは、3.2μm以下であり、
 全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である、加飾部材。
<45>
comprising a linear pattern layer and a thermoplastic resin part superimposed on the linear pattern layer,
The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
The plurality of linear elements are arranged in one direction,
Each linear element extends in the other direction intersecting the one direction,
The ten-point average roughness Rz defined in JISB0601-1994 and along the one direction is 3.2 μm or less,
A decorative member having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
<46>
 線状模様層と、線状模様層と重ねられた熱可塑性樹脂部と、を備え、
 全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下であり、
 前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
 前記複数の線状要素は、一方向に配置され、
 各線状要素は、前記一方向に交差する他方向に延び、
 前記複数の線状要素は、一方向に交互に配置された線状凸部及び線状凹部を含み、
 前記一方向に隣り合う線状凸部および線状凹部を横切る断面にて特定される側壁傾斜角度は、66°以上であり、
 前記断面は、前記線状模様層の法線方向および前記一方向の両方に沿った断面であり、
 前記側壁傾斜角度は、前記断面において、前記線状模様層上となる第1位置および第2位置を通過する直線と、前記法線方向と、の間の角度であり、
 前記第1位置は、前記断面が横切る前記線状凸部の最高位置と前記線状凸部に隣り合う前記線状凹部の最低位置との高低差の10%だけ、前記最高位置から低い前記線状模様層上の位置であり、
 前記第2位置は、前記高低差の10%だけ前記最低位置から高い前記線状模様層上の位置であり、
 前記第1位置および前記第2位置は、前記一方向において、前記最高位置および前記最低位置の間に位置する、加飾部材。
<46>
comprising a linear pattern layer and a thermoplastic resin part superimposed on the linear pattern layer,
The total light transmittance is 5% or more and 90% or less,
The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
The plurality of linear elements are arranged in one direction,
Each linear element extends in the other direction intersecting the one direction,
The plurality of linear elements include linear protrusions and linear recesses alternately arranged in one direction,
A side wall inclination angle specified in a cross section that crosses the linear protrusions and linear recesses that are adjacent to each other in one direction is 66° or more,
The cross section is a cross section along both the normal direction of the linear pattern layer and the one direction,
The side wall inclination angle is an angle between a straight line passing through a first position and a second position on the linear pattern layer and the normal direction in the cross section,
The first position is the line lower than the highest position by 10% of the height difference between the highest position of the linear protrusion crossed by the cross section and the lowest position of the linear recess adjacent to the linear protrusion. is the position on the pattern layer,
The second position is a position on the linear pattern layer higher than the lowest position by 10% of the height difference,
The decorating member, wherein the first position and the second position are located between the highest position and the lowest position in the one direction.
<47>
 <34>~<43>のいずれか一項に記載された加飾シート又は<44>~<46>のいずれか一項に記載された加飾部材と、
 前記加飾シート又は前記加飾部材と重ねられた表示装置又は光源装置と、を備える、表示システム。
<47>
The decorative sheet according to any one of <34> to <43> or the decorative member according to any one of <44> to <46>;
A display system comprising: a display device or a light source device superimposed on the decorative sheet or the decorative member.
<48>
 線状模様を表示する加飾シートの製造に用いられる版の製造方法であって、
 金属面に線状の凹部を形成する工程と、
 前記凹部が形成された前記金属面をブラスト処理する工程と、を備える、版の製造方法。
<48>
A method for manufacturing a plate used for manufacturing a decorative sheet displaying a linear pattern,
forming linear recesses in the metal surface;
and a step of blasting the metal surface on which the recesses are formed.
<49>
 <48>に記載された製造方法により製造された版を用いて樹脂賦型層を作製する工程を備える、加飾シートの製造方法。
<49>
A method for producing a decorative sheet, comprising a step of producing a resin transfer layer using a plate produced by the production method described in <48>.
<50>
 前記版から剥がした前記樹脂賦型層を第2版として用い、前記樹脂賦型層に樹脂組成物を供給して、前記樹脂組成物を硬化することにより、線状模様層を作製する工程を備える、<49>に記載の加飾シートの製造方法。
<50>
A step of producing a linear pattern layer by using the resin embossing layer peeled off from the plate as a second plate, supplying a resin composition to the resin embossing layer, and curing the resin composition. The method for manufacturing a decorative sheet according to <49>.
<51>
 前記版から剥がした前記樹脂賦型層の前記版に接触していた面に、第1樹脂組成物を供給し、前記第1樹脂組成物から被覆層を作製する工程と、
 前記被覆層上に第2樹脂組成物を供給して、前記第2樹脂組成物を硬化することにより、線状模様層を作製する工程と、を備え、
 前記被覆層は、前記版から前記樹脂賦型層に転写されることによって形成された凹凸構造の高低差の10%以上の厚みを有する、<49>に記載の加飾シートの製造方法。
<51>
a step of supplying a first resin composition to the surface of the resin transfer layer peeled off from the plate that was in contact with the plate, and producing a coating layer from the first resin composition;
a step of supplying a second resin composition onto the coating layer and curing the second resin composition to produce a linear pattern layer;
The method for producing a decorative sheet according to <49>, wherein the coating layer has a thickness of 10% or more of the height difference of the uneven structure formed by transferring from the plate to the resin transfer layer.
<52>
 線状の凹部が形成された版を用いて樹脂賦型層を作製する工程と
 前記版から剥がした前記樹脂賦型層の前記版に接触していた面に、第1樹脂組成物を供給し、前記第1樹脂組成物から被覆層を作製する工程と、
 前記被覆層上に第2樹脂組成物を供給して、前記第2樹脂組成物を硬化することにより、線状模様層を作製する工程と、を備え、
 前記被覆層は、前記版から前記樹脂賦型層に転写されることによって形成された凹凸構造の高低差の10%以上の厚みを有する、加飾シートの製造方法。
<52>
A step of producing a resin imprinting layer using a plate in which linear recesses are formed; and supplying a first resin composition to the surface of the resin imprinting layer peeled off from the plate that was in contact with the plate. , a step of producing a coating layer from the first resin composition;
a step of supplying a second resin composition onto the coating layer and curing the second resin composition to produce a linear pattern layer;
A method for producing a decorative sheet, wherein the coating layer has a thickness equal to or greater than 10% of the height difference of the uneven structure formed by transferring from the plate to the resin transfer layer.
<53>
 前記線状模様層に重ねられた意匠層を作製する工程を更に備える、<49>~<52>のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シートの製造方法。
<53>
The method for producing a decorative sheet according to any one of <49> to <52>, further comprising the step of forming a design layer overlaid on the linear pattern layer.
<54>
 <49>~<53>のいずれか一項に記載された製造方法により製造された加飾シートを、キャビティ内に配置する工程と、
 前記加飾シートが配置された前記キャビティ内に加熱された熱可塑性樹脂を供給し、前記加飾シートと接合した熱可塑性樹脂部を作製する工程と、を備える、加飾部材の製造方法。
<54>
placing the decorative sheet manufactured by the manufacturing method according to any one of <49> to <53> in the cavity;
A method of manufacturing a decorative member, comprising: supplying a heated thermoplastic resin into the cavity in which the decorative sheet is arranged to produce a thermoplastic resin portion joined to the decorative sheet.
 本開示の実施の形態によれば、表示システムにおける画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制できる。 According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, it is possible to suppress blurring of the contour of the image in the display system.
 本開示の実施の形態によれば、加飾シートの線状模様を明瞭に表示できる。 According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, it is possible to clearly display the linear pattern of the decorative sheet.
図1は、第1及び第2の実施の形態を説明する図であって、表示システム、加飾部材及び加飾シートの一例を概略的に示す斜視図である。FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining first and second embodiments, and is a perspective view schematically showing an example of a display system, a decorative member, and a decorative sheet. 図2は、第1の実施の形態を説明するための図であって、図1に示された表示システム、加飾部材及び加飾シートを示す断面図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the first embodiment, and is a sectional view showing the display system, the decorative member, and the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 図3は、図1に示された表示システムを正面から示す平面図であって、非動作状態を示している。3 is a front plan view of the display system shown in FIG. 1, shown in a non-operating state; FIG. 図4は、図1に示された表示システムを正面から示す平面図であって、動作状態を示している。FIG. 4 is a front plan view of the display system shown in FIG. 1, showing an operational state. 図5Aは、表示システムの他の例を示す平面図であって、表示システムによって表示される線状模様の他の例を示す図である。FIG. 5A is a plan view showing another example of the display system, and is a diagram showing another example of the linear pattern displayed by the display system. 図5Bは、表示システムの更に他の例を示す平面図であって、表示システムによって表示される線状模様の更に他の例を示す図である。FIG. 5B is a plan view showing still another example of the display system, and is a diagram showing still another example of the linear pattern displayed by the display system. 図5Cは、表示システムの更に他の例を示す平面図であって、表示システムによって表示される線状模様の更に他の例を示す図である。FIG. 5C is a plan view showing still another example of the display system, and is a diagram showing still another example of the linear pattern displayed by the display system. 図5Dは、表示システムの更に他の例を示す平面図であって、表示システムによって表示される線状模様の更に他の例を示す図である。FIG. 5D is a plan view showing still another example of the display system, and is a diagram showing still another example of the linear pattern displayed by the display system. 図6は、図1に示された加飾シートに含まれ得る線状模様層を模式的に示す拡大平面図である。6 is an enlarged plan view schematically showing a linear pattern layer that can be included in the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 図7Aは、図6に示された線状模様層の一例を拡大して示す部分斜視図である。7A is a partial perspective view showing an enlarged example of the linear pattern layer shown in FIG. 6. FIG. 図7Bは、図6に示された線状模様層の他の例を拡大して示す部分斜視図である。7B is an enlarged partial perspective view showing another example of the linear pattern layer shown in FIG. 6. FIG. 図8は、図6に示された線状模様層の更に他の例を、第1方向および法線方向の両方に沿った断面に沿った断面にて、示す断面図である。図8は、図6に示された線状模様層の更に他の例を、第2方向および法線方向の両方に沿った断面にて、示す断面図でもある。FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view showing still another example of the linear pattern layer shown in FIG. 6, taken along both the first direction and the normal direction. FIG. 8 is also a cross-sectional view showing still another example of the linear pattern layer shown in FIG. 6, along both the second direction and the normal direction. 図9は、図1に示された加飾シートの製造に用いられ得る版を示す斜視図である。9 is a perspective view showing a plate that can be used to manufacture the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 図10は、線状模様の画像データの一例である。FIG. 10 is an example of image data of a linear pattern. 図11は、版の製造方法を説明する図である。FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a method of manufacturing a plate. 図12は、図10のA-A線に沿った版の断面図にて、版を用いて樹脂賦型層を製造する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the plate taken along the line AA in FIG. 10, which is a diagram for explaining the method of manufacturing the resin imprinted layer using the plate. 図13は、加飾シートの製造方法の一例を示す図であって、樹脂賦型層を用いて加飾シートを含む加飾シート積層体を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative sheet, and is a diagram for explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate containing a decorative sheet using a resin-imparting layer. 図14は、加飾シートの製造方法の一例を示す図であって、樹脂賦型層を用いて加飾シートを含む加飾シート積層体を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative sheet, and is a diagram for explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate containing a decorative sheet using a resin-imparting layer. 図15は、加飾シートの製造方法の一例を示す図であって、樹脂賦型層を用いて加飾シートを含む加飾シート積層体を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative sheet, and is a diagram for explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate including a decorative sheet using a resin molding layer. 図16は、加飾シートの製造方法の一例を示す図であって、樹脂賦型層を用いて加飾シートを含む加飾シート積層体を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative sheet, and is a diagram for explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate containing a decorative sheet using a resin-imparting layer. 図17は、加飾部材の製造方法の一例を示す図であって、射出成形により加飾シートに接合した熱可塑性樹脂部を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram illustrating a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding. 図18は、加飾部材の製造方法の一例を示す図であって、射出成形により加飾シートに接合した熱可塑性樹脂部を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram illustrating a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding. 図19は、加飾部材の製造方法の一例を示す図であって、射出成形により加飾シートに接合した熱可塑性樹脂部を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram explaining a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding. 図20は、加飾部材の製造方法の一例を示す図であって、射出成形により加飾シートに接合した熱可塑性樹脂部を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and explaining a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding. 図21は、加飾部材の製造方法の一例を示す図である。FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative member. 図22は、図1に示された加飾シートに含まれ得る線状模様層の一例を示す断面図である。22 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a linear pattern layer that can be included in the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 図23は、図1に示された加飾シートに含まれ得る線状模様層の他の例を示す断面図である。23 is a cross-sectional view showing another example of a linear pattern layer that can be included in the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 図24は、図2に対応する断面図であって、表示システム、加飾部材及び加飾シートの一変形例を示す図である。FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 2, showing a modified example of the display system, the decorative member, and the decorative sheet. 図25は、図2に対応する断面図であって、表示システム及び加飾シートの他の変形例を示す図である。FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 2 and showing another modification of the display system and the decorative sheet. 図26は、図2に対応する断面図であって、表示システム及び加飾シートの更に他の変形例を示す図である。FIG. 26 is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 2 and showing still another modification of the display system and the decorative sheet. 図27は、図1に対応する断面図であって、表示システム、加飾部材の更に他の変形例を示す図である。FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 1, showing still another modification of the display system and the decorative member. 図28は、単位凹部の配置割合と線状要素の長手方向に沿った十点平均粗さRzとの関係を示すグラフである。FIG. 28 is a graph showing the relationship between the arrangement ratio of the unit recesses and the ten-point average roughness Rz along the longitudinal direction of the linear element. 図29Aは、図17に対応する図であって、加飾部材の製造方法の他の例を示す図である。29A is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 17 and showing another example of the method for manufacturing the decorative member. FIG. 図29Bは、図18に対応する図であって、加飾部材の製造方法の他の例を示す図である。29B is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 18 and showing another example of the manufacturing method of the decorative member. FIG. 図29Cは、図19に対応する図であって、加飾部材の製造方法の他の例を示す図である。29C is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 19 and showing another example of the method for manufacturing the decorative member. FIG. 図29Dは、図20に対応する図であって、加飾部材の製造方法の他の例を示す図である。FIG. 29D is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 20 and showing another example of the method for manufacturing the decorative member. 図30は、第2の実施の形態を説明するための図であって、図1に示された表示システム、加飾部材及び加飾シートを示す断面図である。FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining the second embodiment, and is a cross-sectional view showing the display system, the decorative member, and the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 図31Aは、図1に示された加飾シートに含まれ得る線状模様層の一例を示す断面図である。31A is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a linear pattern layer that can be included in the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 図31Bは、図1に示された加飾シートに含まれ得る線状模様層の他の例を示す断面図である。31B is a cross-sectional view showing another example of a linear pattern layer that can be included in the decorative sheet shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 図32は、図9のA-A線に沿った版の断面図にて、版を用いて樹脂賦型層を製造する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the plate taken along the line AA in FIG. 9, which is a diagram for explaining the method of manufacturing the resin transfer layer using the plate. 図33は、加飾シートの製造方法の一例を示す図であって、樹脂賦型層を用いて加飾シートを含む加飾シート積層体を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of a method for producing a decorative sheet, and explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate containing a decorative sheet using a resin molding layer. 図34は、加飾シートの製造方法の一例を示す図であって、樹脂賦型層を用いて加飾シートを含む加飾シート積層体を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative sheet, and is a diagram for explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate containing a decorative sheet using a resin-imparting layer. 図35は、加飾シートの製造方法の一例を示す図であって、樹脂賦型層を用いて加飾シートを含む加飾シート積層体を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a method for producing a decorative sheet, and explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate including a decorative sheet using a resin-imparting layer. 図36は、加飾シートの製造方法の一例を示す図であって、樹脂賦型層を用いて加飾シートを含む加飾シート積層体を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative sheet, and is a diagram for explaining a method for producing a decorative sheet laminate containing a decorative sheet using a resin-imparting layer. 図37は、加飾部材の製造方法の一例を示す図であって、射出成形により加飾シートに接合した熱可塑性樹脂部を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram illustrating a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding. 図38は、加飾部材の製造方法の一例を示す図であって、射出成形により加飾シートに接合した熱可塑性樹脂部を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram explaining a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding. 図39は、加飾部材の製造方法の一例を示す図であって、射出成形により加飾シートに接合した熱可塑性樹脂部を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram explaining a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding. 図40は、加飾部材の製造方法の一例を示す図であって、射出成形により加飾シートに接合した熱可塑性樹脂部を作製する方法を説明する図である。FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of a method of manufacturing a decorative member, and is a diagram illustrating a method of manufacturing a thermoplastic resin portion joined to a decorative sheet by injection molding. 図41は、加飾部材の製造方法の一例を示す図である。FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of a method for manufacturing a decorative member. 図42は、図30に対応する断面図であって、表示システム、加飾部材及び加飾シートの一変形例を示す図である。FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 30, showing a modified example of the display system, the decorative member, and the decorative sheet. 図43は、図30に対応する断面図であって、表示システム及び加飾シートの他の変形例を示す図である。FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 30 and showing another modification of the display system and the decorative sheet. 図44は、図30に対応する断面図であって、表示システム及び加飾シートの更に他の変形例を示す図である。FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 30 and showing still another modification of the display system and the decorative sheet. 図45は従来の加飾シートにおいて生じていた不具合を示す平面図である。FIG. 45 is a plan view showing a problem that has occurred in a conventional decorative sheet.
 以下、図面を参照して本開示の第1の実施の形態及び第2の実施の形態について説明する。なお、本件明細書に添付する図面においては、図示と理解のしやすさの便宜上、適宜縮尺および縦横の寸法比等を、実物のそれらから変更し誇張してある。 A first embodiment and a second embodiment of the present disclosure will be described below with reference to the drawings. In addition, in the drawings attached to this specification, for the convenience of illustration and ease of understanding, the scale and the ratio of vertical and horizontal dimensions are appropriately changed and exaggerated from those of the real thing.
 本明細書において用いる、形状や幾何学的条件ならびにそれらの程度を特定する、例えば、「平行」、「直交」、「同一」等の用語や長さや角度の値等については、厳密な意味に限定されることなく、同様の機能を期待し得る程度の範囲を含めて解釈する。 As used herein, terms specifying shapes and geometric conditions as well as degrees thereof, such as "parallel", "perpendicular", "identical", length and angle values, etc., are strictly It is interpreted to include the extent to which similar functions can be expected without limitation.
 「シート」、「フィルム」及び「板」等の用語は、呼称の違いのみに基づいて互いから区別されない。例えば「加飾シート」は、加飾フィルム又は加飾板と呼ばれる部材等と呼称の違いのみにおいて区別され得ない。 Terms such as "sheet", "film" and "plate" are not distinguished from each other based solely on the difference in designation. For example, a "decorative sheet" cannot be distinguished from a member called a decorative film or a decorative plate only by the difference in name.
 「シート面(フィルム面、板面)」とは、対象となるシート状(フィルム状、板状)の部材を全体的かつ大局的に見た場合において対象となるシート状部材(フィルム状、板状部材)の平面と一致する面を意味する。シート状(フィルム状、板状)の部材に対する法線方向とは、当該シート状(フィルム状、板状)の部材のシート面(フィルム面、板面)への法線又は垂線と平行な方向を意味する。 "Sheet surface (film surface, plate surface)" refers to the target sheet-like member (film-like, plate-like) when viewed as a whole and broadly. means the surface coinciding with the plane of the member). The normal direction to a sheet-like (film-like, plate-like) member is a direction parallel to the normal or perpendicular to the sheet surface (film surface, plate surface) of the sheet-like (film-like, plate-like) member. means
 方向の関係を図面間で明確にするため、いくつかの図面には、共通する符号を付した矢印により共通する方向を示している。図面の紙面に垂直な方向に沿って紙面から手前に向かう矢印を、例えば図2に示すように、円の中に点を設けた記号により示した。図面の紙面に垂直な方向に沿って紙面の奥に向かう矢印を、例えば図14に示すように、円の中に×を設けた記号により示した。 In order to clarify the directional relationship between drawings, some drawings show common directions by arrows with common symbols. An arrow pointing forward from the plane of the drawing along a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing is indicated by a dot in a circle, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. An arrow directed to the depth of the paper along the direction perpendicular to the paper of the drawing is indicated, for example, by a circle with an x in it, as shown in FIG.
 本明細書において、あるパラメータに関して複数の上限値の候補及び複数の下限値の候補が挙げられている場合、そのパラメータの数値範囲は、任意の1つの上限値の候補と任意の1つの下限値の候補とを組み合わせることによって構成されてもよい。一例として、「パラメータBは、A1以上でもよく、A2以上でもよく、A3以上でもよい。パラメータBは、A4以下でもよく、A5以下でもよく、A6以下でもよい。」との記載について検討する。この例において、パラメータBの数値範囲は、A1以上A4以下でもよく、A1以上A5以下でもよく、A1以上A6以下でもよく、A2以上A4以下でもよく、A2以上A5以下でもよく、A2以上A6以下でもよく、A3以上A4以下でもよく、A3以上A5以下でもよく、A3以上A6以下でもよい。 In this specification, when multiple upper limit candidates and multiple lower limit candidates are given for a parameter, the numerical range of the parameter is any one upper limit candidate and any one lower limit value. may be configured by combining the candidates of As an example, consider the statement "Parameter B may be A1 or greater, A2 or greater, or A3 or greater. Parameter B may be A4 or less, A5 or less, or A6 or less." In this example, the numerical range of the parameter B may be A1 or more and A4 or less, A1 or more and A5 or less, A1 or more and A6 or less, A2 or more and A4 or less, A2 or more and A5 or less, or A2 or more and A6 or less. A3 or more and A4 or less may be sufficient, A3 or more and A5 or less may be sufficient, A3 or more and A6 or less may be sufficient.
 図1~図44は実施の形態を説明する図である。図1は、表示システム10の一具体例を概略的に示す斜視図である。表示システム10は、光源装置12又は表示装置16と、光源装置12又は表示装置16に重ねられた加飾部材20又は加飾シート30と、を含む。加飾部材20は、後述するように、加飾シート30と加飾シート30に接合した熱可塑性樹脂部64と、を含む。 1 to 44 are diagrams for explaining the embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view schematically showing one specific example of the display system 10. As shown in FIG. The display system 10 includes a light source device 12 or a display device 16 and a decorative member 20 or a decorative sheet 30 overlaid on the light source device 12 or the display device 16 . The decorative member 20 includes a decorative sheet 30 and a thermoplastic resin portion 64 joined to the decorative sheet 30, as will be described later.
 光源装置12又は表示装置16は、動作状態および非動作状態を取ることができる。光源装置12又は表示装置16は、動作状態において光を放出する。光源装置12又は表示装置16からの光は、加飾部材20又は加飾シート30を透過する。図4に示すように、動作状態において、表示システム10は画像を表示できる。光源装置12又は表示装置16は、非動作状態において光の放出を停止する。非動作状態において、加飾部材20又は加飾シート30は、光源装置12又は表示装置16を第3方向から隠蔽してもよい。図3に示すように、非動作状態において、加飾部材20又は加飾シート30は意匠を表示する。加飾部材20又は加飾シート30は、意匠として、線状模様35を表示する。 The light source device 12 or display device 16 can be in an operating state and a non-operating state. Light source device 12 or display device 16 emits light in an operational state. Light from the light source device 12 or the display device 16 passes through the decorative member 20 or the decorative sheet 30 . As shown in FIG. 4, in operation, the display system 10 is capable of displaying images. Light source device 12 or display device 16 ceases to emit light in a non-operating state. In the non-operating state, the decorative member 20 or the decorative sheet 30 may hide the light source device 12 or the display device 16 from the third direction. As shown in FIG. 3, the decorative member 20 or the decorative sheet 30 displays the design in the non-operating state. The decorative member 20 or the decorative sheet 30 displays a linear pattern 35 as a design.
 以下に説明する第1及び第2の実施の形態において、表示された画像の輪郭が滲むことを抑制するための工夫がなされている。第1及び第2の実施の形態によれば、画像の輪郭を明瞭に表示できる。 In the first and second embodiments described below, measures are taken to prevent the outline of the displayed image from blurring. According to the first and second embodiments, the contour of the image can be clearly displayed.
 図1に示された表示システム10は、加飾部材20及び光源装置12を含んでいる。以下において、光源装置12及び加飾部材20によって表示システム10が構成された具体例を参照して、第1の実施の形態及び第2の実施の形態を順に説明する。なお、図1~図5D等のいくつかの図は、第1の実施の形態および第2の実施の形態の両方に共通する図である。 The display system 10 shown in FIG. 1 includes a decorative member 20 and a light source device 12. A first embodiment and a second embodiment will be described in order below with reference to a specific example in which the display system 10 is configured by the light source device 12 and the decorative member 20 . Some figures such as FIGS. 1 to 5D are common to both the first embodiment and the second embodiment.
<第1の実施の形態>
 図1~図4に示すように、加飾部材20及び光源装置12は第3方向D3に重ねられている。光源装置12は、加飾部材20及び加飾シート30によって、第3方向D3から少なくとも部分的に覆われている。表示システム10によれば、加飾シート30によって周囲との調和を確保しながら、光源装置12を設置できる。
<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the decorative member 20 and the light source device 12 are stacked in the third direction D3. The light source device 12 is at least partially covered with the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 from the third direction D3. According to the display system 10 , the light source device 12 can be installed while ensuring harmony with the surroundings by the decorative sheet 30 .
 加飾部材20は、第3方向D3に重ねられた複数の構成要素を含む。したがって、第3方向D3は積層方向である。加飾部材20および加飾部材20を構成する後述の構成要素は、第1方向D1及び第2方向D2に広がっている。図示された例において、第1方向D1及び第2方向D2は直交している。第3方向D3は、第1方向D1と直交し、第2方向D2とも直交している。第3方向D3は、加飾部材20及び加飾シート30の法線方向と平行である。第3方向D3は、加飾部材20を構成する後述の構成要素の法線方向と平行である。 The decorative member 20 includes a plurality of constituent elements stacked in the third direction D3. Therefore, the third direction D3 is the stacking direction. The decorating member 20 and components described later that constitute the decorating member 20 spread in the first direction D1 and the second direction D2. In the illustrated example, the first direction D1 and the second direction D2 are orthogonal. The third direction D3 is orthogonal to the first direction D1 and also orthogonal to the second direction D2. The third direction D3 is parallel to the normal direction of the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 . The third direction D3 is parallel to the normal direction of the below-described constituent elements that constitute the decorative member 20 .
 表示システム10は、種々の用途に適用され得る。表示システム10を、移動体の内装や外装に適用してもよい。移動体は移動可能な装置である。移動体として、自動車、鉄道車両、船、飛行機等が例示される。一具体例として、表示システム10は、自動車の内装に適用されてもよい。表示システム10は、建物の内装として、壁、扉、天井等に適用されてもよい。表示システム10は、家具、家電製品等の各種装置に適用されてもよい。 The display system 10 can be applied to various uses. The display system 10 may be applied to interiors and exteriors of moving bodies. A mobile is a device that can move. Examples of mobile objects include automobiles, railroad vehicles, ships, and airplanes. As one example, display system 10 may be applied to the interior of an automobile. The display system 10 may be applied to walls, doors, ceilings, etc. as the interior of a building. The display system 10 may be applied to various devices such as furniture and home appliances.
 光源装置12は、動作状態において、点灯する。点灯状態において、光源装置12は光を放出する。光源装置12として、光を放出し得る種々の装置や部材を採用できる。例えば、光源装置12は、発光ダイオードや冷陰極管光等の発光体そのものでもよいし、発光体および光学部材を組合せた面光源装置でもよい。光源装置12から放出される光の波長域、光量、発光面の大きさ、配光特性等は、表示システム10の用途等に応じて適宜選択され得る。図示された例において、光源装置12は、バックライトとも呼ばれる面光源装置を含んでいる。光源装置12は、平面視において、矩形状の発光面12aを有している。面光源装置は、エッジライト型や直下型等の種々の装置でもよい。発光面12aの全域又は一部の領域が、加飾シート30によって第3方向D3から覆われてもよい。光源装置12の全体又は一部が、加飾シート30によって第3方向D3から覆われてもよい。 The light source device 12 lights up in the operating state. In the lighting state, the light source device 12 emits light. Various devices and members capable of emitting light can be employed as the light source device 12 . For example, the light source device 12 may be a light emitter itself such as a light emitting diode or cold cathode tube light, or may be a surface light source device in which a light emitter and an optical member are combined. The wavelength range of light emitted from the light source device 12, the amount of light, the size of the light emitting surface, the light distribution characteristics, and the like can be appropriately selected according to the application of the display system 10 and the like. In the illustrated example, the light source device 12 includes a surface light source device, also called a backlight. The light source device 12 has a rectangular light emitting surface 12a in plan view. The surface light source device may be of various types such as an edge light type or a direct type. All or part of the light emitting surface 12a may be covered with the decorative sheet 30 from the third direction D3. All or part of the light source device 12 may be covered with the decorative sheet 30 from the third direction D3.
 光源装置12を含む表示システム10は、遮光パターンシート66を含んでもよい。図2に示すように、遮光パターンシート66は、遮光領域66a及び透過領域66bを含んでいる。遮光領域66aは可視光遮光性を有する。透過領域66bは可視光透過性を有する。光源装置12から放出された光は、遮光領域66aで遮光され、透過領域66bを透過する。光源装置12及び遮光パターンシート66の組合せによれば、透過領域66bと同一パターンの画像を表示できる。例えば、文字、絵柄、記号、マーク、イラスト、キャラクター、ピクトグラム等が、画像として、表示されてもよい。図4に示された例において、表示システム10は、十字、三角形および四角形のマークを表示する。 The display system 10 including the light source device 12 may include the light shielding pattern sheet 66. As shown in FIG. 2, the light-shielding pattern sheet 66 includes light-shielding regions 66a and transmissive regions 66b. The light shielding region 66a has a visible light shielding property. The transmissive region 66b has visible light transmissivity. Light emitted from the light source device 12 is blocked by the light shielding region 66a and transmitted through the transmission region 66b. By combining the light source device 12 and the light shielding pattern sheet 66, an image of the same pattern as that of the transmissive area 66b can be displayed. For example, characters, patterns, symbols, marks, illustrations, characters, pictograms, etc. may be displayed as images. In the example shown in FIG. 4, the display system 10 displays cross, triangle and square marks.
 遮光領域66aは、可視光を反射してもよいし、吸収してもよい。遮光領域66aは、例えば、カーボンブラック等の黒色顔料を含む樹脂層でもよい。透過領域66bは、黒色顔料を含む樹脂層に設けられた開口部でもよいし、当該開口部に充填された透明な樹脂部でもよい。可視光は、380nm以上780nm以下の波長を有する光である。 The light shielding area 66a may reflect or absorb visible light. The light shielding region 66a may be, for example, a resin layer containing a black pigment such as carbon black. The transmissive region 66b may be an opening provided in a resin layer containing a black pigment, or may be a transparent resin portion filled in the opening. Visible light is light having a wavelength of 380 nm or more and 780 nm or less.
 「可視光透過性」とは、全光線透過率が2%以上であることを意味し、好ましくは5%以上である。「可視光遮光性」とは、全光線透過率が1%以下であることを意味し、好ましくは0.1%以下であり、より好ましくは0.01%以下である。全光線透過率は、平行入射光束に対する測定対象を透過した透過光束の割合(%)である。透過光束は、拡散透過した光を含む。全光線透過率は、JIS K 7361に準拠してD65光源を用いて測定された値である。全光線透過率は入射角0°で測定される。 "Visible light transmittance" means that the total light transmittance is 2% or more, preferably 5% or more. "Visible light blocking property" means that the total light transmittance is 1% or less, preferably 0.1% or less, and more preferably 0.01% or less. The total luminous transmittance is the ratio (%) of the transmitted luminous flux that has passed through the measuring object to the parallel incident luminous flux. The transmitted light flux includes diffusely transmitted light. The total light transmittance is a value measured according to JIS K 7361 using a D65 light source. Total light transmittance is measured at an incident angle of 0°.
 「透明」とは、全光線透過率が2%以上であることを意味し、好ましくは5%以上である。 "Transparent" means that the total light transmittance is 2% or more, preferably 5% or more.
 図2に示すように、遮光パターンシート66は、加飾部材20に含まれてもよい。図24に示すように、遮光パターンシート66は、加飾シート30に含まれてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 2, the light shielding pattern sheet 66 may be included in the decorative member 20. As shown in FIG. 24 , the light shielding pattern sheet 66 may be included in the decorative sheet 30 .
 図26に示すように、表示システム10は、光源装置12に代えて表示装置16を含んでもよい。表示装置16は、動作状態において、画像を表示する。表示状態において、表示装置16が画像光を放出する。表示装置16として、画像を表示可能な種々の装置を含んでもよい。表示装置16は、画像が形成される表示面16aを含んでもよい。表示面16aの全域又は一部の領域が、加飾シート30によって第3方向D3から覆われてもよい。表示装置16の全体又は一部が、加飾シート30によって第3方向D3から覆われてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 26, the display system 10 may include a display device 16 instead of the light source device 12. The display device 16 displays an image in an operating state. In the display state, the display device 16 emits image light. Display device 16 may include various devices capable of displaying images. Display device 16 may include a display surface 16a on which an image is formed. All or part of the display surface 16a may be covered with the decorative sheet 30 from the third direction D3. All or part of the display device 16 may be covered with the decorative sheet 30 from the third direction D3.
 図25に示すように、表示装置16は、光源装置12及び遮光パターンシート66を含んでもよい。この表示装置16は、文字、数字、絵柄、色模様、記号、マーク、イラスト、キャラクター、ピクトグラム等を、画像として、表示できる。 As shown in FIG. 25, the display device 16 may include the light source device 12 and the light shielding pattern sheet 66. This display device 16 can display characters, numbers, patterns, colored patterns, symbols, marks, illustrations, characters, pictograms, etc. as images.
 図26に示すように、表示装置16は、ドットマトリックス方式の表示装置でもよい。ドットマトリックス方式の表示装置は、各ドットを形成する複数の画素を有している。この表示装置では、画素毎に発光状態を制御することによって、所望の画像を表示できる。この表示装置は、静止画および動画のいずれを表示してもよい。この表示装置16として、液晶表示装置や、EL表示装置とも呼ばれるエレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置等が例示される。図26に示された例において、表示装置16は、透過型の表示パネル17と、表示パネル17を背面から面状に照明する面光源装置12と、を含んでいる。透過型の表示パネル17として、液晶表示パネルが例示される。面光源装置12は、エッジライト型や直下型等の種々の装置でもよい。 As shown in FIG. 26, the display device 16 may be a dot matrix display device. A dot-matrix display device has a plurality of pixels forming each dot. This display device can display a desired image by controlling the light emission state of each pixel. This display device may display either still images or moving images. Examples of the display device 16 include a liquid crystal display device and an electroluminescence display device also called an EL display device. In the example shown in FIG. 26, the display device 16 includes a transmissive display panel 17 and a surface light source device 12 that planarly illuminates the display panel 17 from behind. A liquid crystal display panel is exemplified as the transmissive display panel 17 . The surface light source device 12 may be various devices such as an edge light type and a direct type.
 図2に示すように、加飾部材20は、加飾シート30及び加飾シート30に接合した熱可塑性樹脂部64を含んでいる。加飾部材20は、更なる構成要素を含んでもよい。 As shown in FIG. 2 , the decorative member 20 includes a decorative sheet 30 and a thermoplastic resin portion 64 joined to the decorative sheet 30 . The decorative member 20 may contain further components.
 図2に示された加飾部材20は、遮光パターンシート66を更に含んでいる。第3方向D3において、熱可塑性樹脂部64は、加飾シート30及び遮光パターンシート66の間に位置している。遮光パターンシート66は、上述したように、遮光領域66a及び透過領域66bを含んでいる。別途に作成された遮光パターンシート66を、接着材や粘着材を含む接合層によって、熱可塑性樹脂部64に接合してもよい。熱可塑性樹脂部64上に樹脂組成物を塗布および乾燥することによって、熱可塑性樹脂部64上に遮光パターンシート66を形成してもよい。 The decorative member 20 shown in FIG. 2 further includes a light shielding pattern sheet 66. The thermoplastic resin portion 64 is positioned between the decorative sheet 30 and the light shielding pattern sheet 66 in the third direction D3. The light-shielding pattern sheet 66 includes the light-shielding region 66a and the transmissive region 66b, as described above. A separately prepared light shielding pattern sheet 66 may be bonded to the thermoplastic resin portion 64 by a bonding layer containing an adhesive or adhesive material. The light-shielding pattern sheet 66 may be formed on the thermoplastic resin portion 64 by applying and drying a resin composition on the thermoplastic resin portion 64 .
 図2等に示された例において、熱可塑性樹脂部64は、第3方向D3において、加飾シート30と光源装置12又は表示装置16との間に位置している。加飾シート30が、第3方向D3において、熱可塑性樹脂部64と光源装置12又は表示装置16との間に位置してもよい。光源装置12や表示装置16からの光は、熱可塑性樹脂部64を透過可能である。熱可塑性樹脂部64は透明でもよい。熱可塑性樹脂部64は、後述するように、射出成形によって作製されてもよい。熱可塑性樹脂部64によって加飾シート30を補強することにより、加飾シート30の適用範囲が広がる。熱可塑性樹脂部64に含まれる熱可塑性樹脂として、ポリカーボネート、ポリメタクリル酸メチル等のアクリル樹脂、ABS(アクリロニトリル ブタジエン スチレン共重合体)等が例示される。 In the example shown in FIG. 2 and the like, the thermoplastic resin portion 64 is positioned between the decorative sheet 30 and the light source device 12 or the display device 16 in the third direction D3. The decorative sheet 30 may be positioned between the thermoplastic resin portion 64 and the light source device 12 or the display device 16 in the third direction D3. Light from the light source device 12 and the display device 16 can pass through the thermoplastic resin portion 64 . The thermoplastic resin portion 64 may be transparent. The thermoplastic resin portion 64 may be made by injection molding, as described later. By reinforcing the decorative sheet 30 with the thermoplastic resin portion 64, the application range of the decorative sheet 30 is expanded. Examples of the thermoplastic resin contained in the thermoplastic resin portion 64 include polycarbonate, acrylic resin such as polymethyl methacrylate, and ABS (acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene copolymer).
 熱可塑性樹脂部64の第3方向D3への厚みは、加飾部材20の用途等に応じて適宜選択される。熱可塑性樹脂部64の第3方向D3への厚みは、100μm以上でもよく、200μm以上でもよく、500μm以上でもよい。熱可塑性樹脂部64の第3方向D3への厚みは、5000μm以下でもよく、4000μm以下でもよく、3000μm以下でもよい。 The thickness of the thermoplastic resin portion 64 in the third direction D3 is appropriately selected according to the application of the decorative member 20 and the like. The thickness of the thermoplastic resin portion 64 in the third direction D3 may be 100 μm or more, 200 μm or more, or 500 μm or more. The thickness of the thermoplastic resin portion 64 in the third direction D3 may be 5000 μm or less, 4000 μm or less, or 3000 μm or less.
 加飾シート30は意匠を表示する。加飾シート30は、光源装置12や表示装置16に重ねられた状態で、光源装置12や表示装置16からの光を透過させ、画像の透過観察を可能にする。加飾シート30の全光線透過率は、5%以上でもよく、10%以上でもよく、15%以上でもよく20%以上でもよい。加飾シート30の全光線透過率に下限を設定することにより、加飾シート30を透過した光によって観察される画像の視認性を十分に確保できる。 The decorative sheet 30 displays the design. The decorative sheet 30 allows transmission of light from the light source device 12 and the display device 16 in a state of being superimposed on the light source device 12 and the display device 16, thereby enabling transmission observation of an image. The total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30 may be 5% or more, 10% or more, 15% or more, or 20% or more. By setting the lower limit of the total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30, the visibility of the image observed by the light transmitted through the decorative sheet 30 can be sufficiently ensured.
 加飾シート30は、意匠を表示する。加飾シート30は、表示システム10に意匠性を付与する。加飾シート30は、加飾部材20又は加飾シート30が適用される部材や場所に意匠性を付与する。加飾シート30による意匠表示を可能にするため、加飾シート30の全光線透過率は、90%以下でもよく、80%以下でもよく、70%以下でもよく、60%以下でもよく、50%以下でもよく、45%以下でもよく、40%以下でもよい。加飾シート30の全光線透過率に上限を設定することにより、加飾シート30による豊かな意匠表現を可能にできる。加飾シート30の全光線透過率に上限を設定することにより、金属の質感を表現できる。 The decorative sheet 30 displays the design. The decorative sheet 30 imparts design to the display system 10 . The decorative sheet 30 imparts designability to the decorative member 20 or members and places to which the decorative sheet 30 is applied. In order to allow design display by the decorative sheet 30, the total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30 may be 90% or less, 80% or less, 70% or less, 60% or less, or 50%. It may be less than or equal to 45% or less, or 40% or less. By setting the upper limit of the total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30, the decorative sheet 30 enables rich design expression. By setting the upper limit of the total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30, a metallic texture can be expressed.
 上述したように、全光線透過率は、JIS K 7361に準拠してD65光源を用いて測定された値である。全光線透過率は入射角0°で測定される。加飾シート30が上述した遮光パターンシート66を含む場合、全光線透過率は、透過領域66bにおいて測定された全光線透過率となる。 As described above, the total light transmittance is a value measured using a D65 light source in accordance with JIS K 7361. Total light transmittance is measured at an incident angle of 0°. When the decorative sheet 30 includes the light shielding pattern sheet 66 described above, the total light transmittance is the total light transmittance measured in the transmission region 66b.
 加飾シート30の第3方向D3への厚みは、加飾部材20の用途等に応じて適宜選択される。加飾シート30の第3方向D3への厚みは、3μm以上でもよく、4μm以上でもよい。加飾シート30の第3方向D3への厚みは、500μm以下でもよく、300μm以下でもよく、50μm以下でもよい。 The thickness of the decorative sheet 30 in the third direction D3 is appropriately selected according to the use of the decorative member 20 and the like. The thickness of the decorative sheet 30 in the third direction D3 may be 3 μm or more, or may be 4 μm or more. The thickness of the decorative sheet 30 in the third direction D3 may be 500 μm or less, 300 μm or less, or 50 μm or less.
 図2に示すように、加飾シート30は線状模様層40を含んでいる。加飾シート30は、線状模様層40以外の構成要素を含んでもよい。図2に示された加飾シート30は、線状模様層40とともに、接合層62及び意匠層60を含んでいる。図2に示された例において、線状模様層40、接合層62及び意匠層60は、この順で配置されている。意匠層60及び接合層62は、第3方向D3において、線状模様層40と熱可塑性樹脂部64との間に位置する。線状模様層40は、加飾シート30及び加飾部材20の表面を構成してもよい。 As shown in FIG. 2, the decorative sheet 30 includes a linear pattern layer 40. As shown in FIG. The decorative sheet 30 may contain components other than the linear pattern layer 40 . The decorative sheet 30 shown in FIG. 2 includes a linear pattern layer 40 as well as a joining layer 62 and a design layer 60 . In the example shown in FIG. 2, the linear pattern layer 40, the bonding layer 62 and the design layer 60 are arranged in this order. The design layer 60 and the bonding layer 62 are positioned between the linear pattern layer 40 and the thermoplastic resin portion 64 in the third direction D3. The linear pattern layer 40 may form the surfaces of the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 .
 線状模様層40は、線状模様35を表示する。線状模様35は、線状の模様である。線状模様層40は、複数の線状要素45を含んでいる。複数の線状要素45は、一方向に配置されている。一方向は、線状要素45の配列方向である。各線状要素45は、一方向に交差する他方向に延びている。各線状要素45は、一方向に直交する他方向に延びてもよい。各線状要素45は長手方向を有し、他方向が長手方向となる。各線状要素45は、長手方向である他方向に細長く延びている。複数の線状要素45は、概ね平行に延びてもよい。複数の線状要素45の集合により、線状模様35を表現する。 The linear pattern layer 40 displays the linear pattern 35. The linear pattern 35 is a linear pattern. Linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 . A plurality of linear elements 45 are arranged in one direction. One direction is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . Each linear element 45 extends in the other direction crossing the one direction. Each linear element 45 may extend in the other direction perpendicular to the one direction. Each linear element 45 has a longitudinal direction, the other direction being the longitudinal direction. Each linear element 45 elongates in the other longitudinal direction. The plurality of linear elements 45 may extend generally parallel. A linear pattern 35 is represented by a set of a plurality of linear elements 45 .
 線状模様35としてヘアライン模様やスピン模様が例示される。図3及び図4は、ヘアライン模様の一例を示している。ヘアライン模様において、線状要素45は、配列方向(一方向)に直交する長手方向(他方向)に直線状に延びている。図3及び図4に示された例において、線状要素45は、配列方向(一方向)である第2方向D2に配列されている。各線状要素45は、長手方向(他方向)としての第1方向D1に直線状に延びる。 A hairline pattern and a spin pattern are exemplified as the linear pattern 35 . 3 and 4 show an example of a hairline pattern. In the hairline pattern, the linear elements 45 linearly extend in the longitudinal direction (the other direction) orthogonal to the arrangement direction (the one direction). In the example shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the linear elements 45 are arranged in the second direction D2, which is the arrangement direction (one direction). Each linear element 45 extends linearly in a first direction D1 as the longitudinal direction (the other direction).
 図5Aは、スピン模様の一例を示している。スピン模様において、複数の線状要素45の配列方向(一方向)は、一つの中位置を中心とした径方向または放射方向である。線状要素45の長手方向(他方向)は、一つの中位置を中心とした円周方向である。各線状要素45は、曲線状に延びている。図5Aに示されたスピン模様において、一つの中位置を中心とする同心円弧に沿って線状要素45は曲線状に延びる。線状模様層40は、複数のスピン模様を複数含んでもよい。一つのスピン模様の中心位置は、一つのスピン模様の中心位置と異なってもよい。 FIG. 5A shows an example of a spin pattern. In the spin pattern, the arrangement direction (one direction) of the plurality of linear elements 45 is the radial direction or the radial direction centering on one middle position. The longitudinal direction (the other direction) of the linear element 45 is the circumferential direction centered on one intermediate position. Each linear element 45 extends in a curved line. In the spin pattern shown in FIG. 5A, the linear elements 45 extend curvilinearly along concentric arcs centered at one intermediate position. The linear pattern layer 40 may include multiple spin patterns. The center position of one spin pattern may be different from the center position of one spin pattern.
 線状要素45が所定の方向(他方向)に延びるとは、線状要素45がその全長に沿った任意の位置において、厳密な意味で所定の方向(他方向)に延びていることを要しない。線状要素45の各位置で延びる方向が所定の方向(他方向)に対してなす角度が、±15°以下となっていることが好ましく、±10°以下となっていることがより好ましく、±5°以下となっていることが更に好ましい。線状要素45が曲線状である場合、線状要素45の各位置での延びる方向とは、当該位置における線状要素45への接線方向を意味する。ヘアライン模様に関して線状要素45が所定の方向(他方向)に延びるとは、線状要素45の両端を結ぶ方向が所定の方向(他方向)に対してなす角度が、±10°以下となっていることが好ましく、±5°以下となっていることがより好ましく、±3°以下となっていることが更に好ましい。 The linear element 45 extending in a predetermined direction (another direction) means that the linear element 45 extends in a predetermined direction (another direction) at any position along its entire length in a strict sense. do not. The angle formed by the extending direction at each position of the linear element 45 with respect to a predetermined direction (other direction) is preferably ±15° or less, more preferably ±10° or less, It is more preferable that the angle is ±5° or less. When the linear element 45 is curved, the direction in which the linear element 45 extends at each position means the tangential direction to the linear element 45 at that position. When the linear elements 45 extend in a predetermined direction (another direction) with respect to the hairline pattern, the angle formed by the direction connecting both ends of the linear elements 45 with respect to the predetermined direction (another direction) is ±10° or less. ±5° or less is more preferable, and ±3° or less is even more preferable.
 線状要素45が細長く延びるとは、線状要素45の全長の幅に対する比が、2以上であることを意味し、10以上であることが好ましく、20以上であることがより好ましい。線状要素45の全長は、線状要素45の長手方向(他方向)に沿った長さ(μm)である。線状要素45の幅は、線状要素45の配列方向(一方向)に沿った長さ(μm)である。 That the linear elements 45 are elongated means that the ratio of the total length to the width of the linear elements 45 is 2 or more, preferably 10 or more, more preferably 20 or more. The total length of the linear element 45 is the length (μm) along the longitudinal direction (other direction) of the linear element 45 . The width of the linear elements 45 is the length (μm) along the arrangement direction (one direction) of the linear elements 45 .
 図5Bに示すように、線状模様35は、木目模様でもよい。木目模様は、木材の断面を模した模様であり、木材の断面を表現する。木目模様において、線状要素45は、導管溝を模した部分、すなわち導管溝を表現する部分でもよい。木目模様において、線状要素45は、年輪模様における早材部を模した部分、すなわち早材部を表現する部分でもよい。木目模様において、線状要素45は、年輪模様における晩材部を模した部分、すなわち晩材部を表現する部分でもよい。 As shown in FIG. 5B, the linear pattern 35 may be a wood grain pattern. The wood grain pattern is a pattern imitating the cross section of wood, and expresses the cross section of the wood. In the wood grain pattern, the linear elements 45 may be portions imitating conduit grooves, that is, parts expressing conduit grooves. In the grain pattern, the linear element 45 may be a portion that imitates the early wood part in the annual ring pattern, that is, a part that expresses the early wood part. In the grain pattern, the linear element 45 may be a portion that imitates the latewood portion in the annual ring pattern, that is, a portion that expresses the latewood portion.
 図5C及び図5Dに示すように、線状模様35は、織物模様でもよい。織物模様は、織物を模した模様であり、織物を表現する。織物は、繊維を織ることによって得られる物である。繊維は、糸状の物質である。織物模様において、線状要素45は、繊維を模した部分、すなわち繊維を表現する部分でもよい。 As shown in FIGS. 5C and 5D, the linear pattern 35 may be a woven pattern. A woven pattern is a pattern imitating a woven fabric, and expresses the woven fabric. A textile is a product obtained by weaving fibers. Fibers are thread-like substances. In the woven fabric pattern, the linear elements 45 may be portions imitating fibers, that is, portions representing fibers.
 織物模様は、植物繊維等の糸を織って得られる布を表現する布模様でもよい。布模様において、線状要素45は、植物繊維を模して、植物繊維を表現してもよい。図5Cに示すように、布模様としての織物模様は、デニムを表現したデニム柄でもよい。デニムは、縦糸と横糸とを織って得られる織物である。縦糸は、複数の横糸、例えば2本又は3本の横糸の上を通過して、1本の横糸の下通過する。縦糸は、染色されている。デニム柄において、線状要素45は、縦糸および横糸を模した部分、すなわち縦糸および横糸を表現する部分でもよい。織物模様は、カーボン繊維を織って得られるカーボン柄でもよい。カーボン柄において、線状要素45は、カーボン繊維でもよい。 The textile pattern may be a cloth pattern that expresses a cloth obtained by weaving threads such as vegetable fibers. In the cloth pattern, the linear elements 45 may represent plant fibers by simulating plant fibers. As shown in FIG. 5C, the fabric pattern as the cloth pattern may be a denim pattern representing denim. Denim is a fabric obtained by weaving warp and weft threads. A warp thread passes over a plurality of weft threads, for example two or three weft threads, and under one weft thread. The warp threads are dyed. In the denim pattern, the linear elements 45 may be portions imitating the warp and weft, that is, portions expressing the warp and weft. The woven pattern may be a carbon pattern obtained by weaving carbon fibers. In the carbon pattern, the linear elements 45 may be carbon fibers.
 線状要素45の長手方向(他方向)に沿った長さは、20μm以上でもよく、50μm以上でもよく、100μm以上でもよい。線状要素45の長手方向(他方向)に沿った長さは、2m以下でもよく、1m以下でもよく、0.5m以下でもよく、0.1m以下でもよい。線状要素45の配列方向(一方向)に沿った幅は、10μm以上でもよく、15μm以上でもよく、20μm以上でもよい。線状要素45の配列方向(一方向)に沿った幅は、1000μm以下でもよく、500μm以下でもよく、300μm以下でもよい。このように線状要素45の長さと幅を設定することにより、線状模様層40が線状模様35を明瞭に表示できる。線状模様層40は、金属板によって形成されたヘアライン模様やスピン模様の質感に類似した質感を表現できる。線状模様層40は、木目模様や織物模様のマット感及びグロス感を表現できる。 The length of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction (other direction) may be 20 μm or more, 50 μm or more, or 100 μm or more. The length of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction (the other direction) may be 2 m or less, 1 m or less, 0.5 m or less, or 0.1 m or less. The width along the arrangement direction (one direction) of the linear elements 45 may be 10 μm or more, 15 μm or more, or 20 μm or more. The width along the arrangement direction (one direction) of the linear elements 45 may be 1000 μm or less, 500 μm or less, or 300 μm or less. By setting the length and width of the linear elements 45 in this manner, the linear pattern layer 40 can clearly display the linear pattern 35 . The linear pattern layer 40 can express a texture similar to that of a hairline pattern or a spin pattern formed by a metal plate. The linear pattern layer 40 can express the matte and glossy textures of a wood grain pattern or a textile pattern.
 各線状要素45は、線状凸部45A又は線状凹部45Bでもよい。図2に示すように、線状要素45の配列方向(一方向)である第2方向D2に隣り合う二つの線状要素45の間で、第3方向D3への平均高さが異なってもよい。これにより、配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に隣り合う二つの線状要素45を識別可能としてもよい。各線状要素45は、複数の単位要素48を含んでもよい。単位要素48は、単位凸部48A又は単位凹部48Bでもよい。 Each linear element 45 may be a linear protrusion 45A or a linear recess 45B. As shown in FIG. 2, even if the average height in the third direction D3 differs between two linear elements 45 adjacent in the second direction D2, which is the arrangement direction (one direction) of the linear elements 45, good. Thereby, two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example) may be identified. Each linear element 45 may include multiple unit elements 48 . The unit elements 48 may be unit convex portions 48A or unit concave portions 48B.
 単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bは、加飾シート30の法線方向(図示された例において、第3方向D3)における位置(高さ)により区別される。加飾シート30の法線方向における基準位置(基準高さ)を設定し、当該基準位置を基準として、単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bは区別される。法線方向において、基準位置よりも観察者の近くに突出した単位要素48が単位凸部48Aとなる。法線方向において、基準位置よりも観察者から離れるように凹んだ単位要素48が単位凹部48Bとなる。基準位置は、線状模様層40についての加飾シート30の法線方向における平均位置(平均高さ)である。 The unit convex portion 48A and the unit concave portion 48B are distinguished by their position (height) in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 (the third direction D3 in the illustrated example). A reference position (reference height) in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is set, and the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B are distinguished based on the reference position. A unit element 48 protruding closer to the observer than the reference position in the normal direction is the unit convex portion 48A. In the normal direction, the unit element 48 that is recessed away from the viewer from the reference position becomes the unit recess 48B. The reference position is the average position (average height) of the linear pattern layer 40 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 .
 加飾シート30の法線方向(図示された例において、第3方向D3)における線状要素45の平均位置(平均高さ)の相対比較により、配列方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素45は、線状凸部45A又は線状凹部45Bとして特定される。加飾シート30の法線方向における基準位置(基準高さ)を設定し、当該基準高さを基準として、線状凸部45A及び線状凹部45Bは区別される。加飾シート30の法線方向において、平均位置(平均高さ)が基準位置よりも観察者に接近した高い線状要素45が、線状凸部45Aとなる。加飾シート30の法線方向において、平均位置(平均高さ)が基準位置よりも観察者から離れた低い線状要素45が、線状凹部45Bとなる。基準位置は、線状模様層40についての加飾シート30の法線方向における平均位置(平均高さ)である。 By relative comparison of the average position (average height) of the linear elements 45 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 (the third direction D3 in the illustrated example), two linear elements 45 adjacent in the arrangement direction are , linear protrusions 45A or linear recesses 45B. A reference position (reference height) in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is set, and the linear protrusions 45A and the linear recesses 45B are distinguished based on the reference height. Linear elements 45 whose average position (average height) is closer to the observer than the reference position in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 are linear projections 45A. Linear elements 45 whose average position (average height) is lower than the reference position in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 and which are farther from the observer are linear concave portions 45B. The reference position is the average position (average height) of the linear pattern layer 40 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 .
 線状模様層40についての加飾シート30の法線方向における平均位置(平均高さ)は、ザイゴ株式会社製の走査型白色干渉計(型番New View6300)を用いて特定される。走査型白色干渉計によれば、測定対象領域について加飾シート30の法線方向における平均位置を測定できる。20箇所の測定位置にて、測定対象領域の平均位置を測定する。得られた20の測定値から、大きい方からの順で1~5番目となる大きい測定値及び小さい方からの順で1~5番目となる5つの小さい測定値を除いて、10の測定値を選択する。選択された10の測定値の平均値を、当該線状模様層40についての加飾シート30の法線方向における平均位置とする。測定対象領域は、216μm四方(216μm×216μm)の領域とする。 The average position (average height) of the linear pattern layer 40 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is specified using a scanning white interferometer (model number New View 6300) manufactured by Zygo Corporation. According to the scanning white light interferometer, the average position in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 can be measured for the measurement target area. The average position of the measurement target area is measured at 20 measurement positions. From the 20 measurements obtained, 10 measurements, excluding the 1st to 5th largest measurements and the 5 smallest measurements 1st to 5th smallest to select. The average value of the ten selected measurement values is taken as the average position of the linear pattern layer 40 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 . The measurement target area is a 216 μm square (216 μm×216 μm) area.
 図6は、配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に隣り合う線状凸部45A及び線状凹部45Bを示す平面図である。図6は、二つの線状要素45の長手方向(図示された例において、第1方向D1)における一部分のみを示している。図6では、第3方向D3への高さを色で示している。図6において、白色で示された部分は単位凸部48Aを示しており、黒色で示された部分は単位凹部48Bを示している。 FIG. 6 is a plan view showing linear protrusions 45A and linear recesses 45B adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). FIG. 6 shows only a portion of the two linear elements 45 in the longitudinal direction (the first direction D1 in the illustrated example). In FIG. 6, the height in the third direction D3 is indicated by color. In FIG. 6, the white portion indicates the unit convex portion 48A, and the black portion indicates the unit concave portion 48B.
 図6に示すように、一つの線状要素45が配置されている線状領域46は、多数の単位領域49に区分けされている。各線状領域46を区分けすることによって、多数の単位領域49が設定されている。各線状領域46内において、単位領域49が二次元配列されている。二次元配列とは非平行な二方向のそれぞれに配列されることを意味する。図6の例では、直交する第1方向D1及び第2方向D2に単位領域49が配列されている。そして、各単位領域49に、一つの単位要素48が割り振られる。したがって、各線状要素45において、単位要素48が二次元配列されている。図示された例において、単位要素48は、第1方向D1及び第2方向D2の両方に配列されている。図示された例と異なり、単位要素48や単位領域49は、線状要素45の長手方向D1と非平行な方向に配置されてもよい。単位要素48や単位領域49は、線状要素45の配列方向D2と非平行な方向に配置されてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 6, a linear region 46 in which one linear element 45 is arranged is divided into a large number of unit regions 49 . A large number of unit areas 49 are set by dividing each linear area 46 . Unit regions 49 are arranged two-dimensionally in each linear region 46 . A two-dimensional array means arrayed in each of two non-parallel directions. In the example of FIG. 6, the unit regions 49 are arranged in a first direction D1 and a second direction D2 that are orthogonal to each other. One unit element 48 is assigned to each unit area 49 . Therefore, in each linear element 45, unit elements 48 are arranged two-dimensionally. In the illustrated example, the unit elements 48 are arranged in both the first direction D1 and the second direction D2. Unlike the illustrated example, the unit elements 48 and the unit regions 49 may be arranged in a direction non-parallel to the longitudinal direction D1 of the linear element 45 . The unit elements 48 and the unit regions 49 may be arranged in a direction non-parallel to the arrangement direction D2 of the linear elements 45 .
 配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に隣り合う二つの線状要素45の間で、単位凸部48Aの配置割合が異なってもよい。これにより、隣り合う二つの線状要素45の第3方向D3への平均高さが異なり、当該隣り合う二つの線状要素45は互いから識別され得る。ここで配置割合とは、一つの線状要素45が配置されている面積に対する、当該線状要素45に含まれる単位凸部48Aが配置されている面積の割合(%)を意味する。したがって、線状要素45が配置されている領域を線状領域46とすると、配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に隣り合う二つの線状領域46の間で、線状領域46内における単位凸部48Aの配置割合が異なってもよい。 The arrangement ratio of the unit convex portions 48A may differ between two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). Thereby, the average height of two adjacent linear elements 45 in the third direction D3 is different, and the two adjacent linear elements 45 can be distinguished from each other. Here, the arrangement ratio means the ratio (%) of the area where the unit convex portions 48A included in the linear element 45 are arranged with respect to the area where one linear element 45 is arranged. Therefore, assuming that the area in which the linear elements 45 are arranged is the linear area 46, between two linear areas 46 adjacent in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example), the linear area The arrangement ratio of the unit convex portions 48A within 46 may be different.
 同様に、配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に隣り合う二つの線状要素45の間で、単位凹部48Bの配置割合が異なってもよい。配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に隣り合う二つの線状領域46の間で、線状領域46内における単位凹部48Bの配置割合が異なってもよい。これにより、隣り合う二つの線状要素45の第3方向D3への平均高さが異なり、当該隣り合う二つの線状要素45は互いから識別され得る。 Similarly, the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B may differ between two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). Between two linear regions 46 adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example), the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B within the linear region 46 may differ. Thereby, the average height of two adjacent linear elements 45 in the third direction D3 is different, and the two adjacent linear elements 45 can be distinguished from each other.
 配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に隣り合う二つの線状要素45の少なくとも一方が単位凸部48Aを含み、他方が単位凹部48Bを含んでもよい。これにより、二つの線状要素45の間で加飾シート30の法線方向における平均位置(平均高さ)が異なり、二つの線状要素45が互いにから識別されてもよい。また、配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に隣り合う二つの線状要素45の一方又は両方が、単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bの両方を含んでもよい。これにより、二つの線状要素45の間で加飾シート30の法線方向における平均位置(平均高さ)が異なり、互いにから識別されてもよい。 At least one of the two linear elements 45 adjacent in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example) may include the unit convex portion 48A and the other may include the unit concave portion 48B. Thereby, the average position (average height) in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 differs between the two linear elements 45, and the two linear elements 45 may be distinguished from each other. Also, one or both of the two linear elements 45 adjacent in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example) may include both the unit convex portion 48A and the unit concave portion 48B. Thereby, the average positions (average heights) in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 are different between the two linear elements 45 and may be distinguished from each other.
 線状要素45についての加飾シート30の法線方向における平均位置(平均高さ)は、ザイゴ株式会社製の走査型白色干渉計(型番New View6300)を用いて特定される。走査型白色干渉計によれば、測定対象領域について加飾シート30の法線方向における平均位置を測定できる。対象となる線状要素45内の5箇所の測定位置にて、測定対象領域の平均位置を測定し、最大の測定値及び最小の測定値を除く3つの測定値の平均値を、当該線状要素45についての、加飾シート30の法線方向における平均位置とする。測定対象領域は、216μm四方(216μm×216μm)の領域とする。線状要素45が細い等の理由から、216μm四方の測定対象領域が設定できない場合、測定位置を中心としたできるだけ大きい正方形の測定対象領域を設定する。 The average position (average height) of the linear elements 45 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is specified using a scanning white interferometer (model number New View 6300) manufactured by Zygo Corporation. According to the scanning white light interferometer, the average position in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 can be measured for the measurement target area. At five measurement positions in the target linear element 45, the average position of the measurement target area is measured, and the average value of the three measurement values excluding the maximum measurement value and the minimum measurement value is It is the average position of the elements 45 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 . The measurement target area is a 216 μm square (216 μm×216 μm) area. If the measurement target area of 216 μm square cannot be set because the linear element 45 is thin or the like, a square measurement target area as large as possible centered on the measurement position is set.
 図2に示された例において、線状模様層40は、シート状のベース部43と、ベース部43から第3方向D3に突出した単位凸部48Aを含んでいる。単位凹部48Bが設けられることによって、ベース部43が露出している。後述するように、樹脂賦型によって、ベース部43及び単位凸部48Aが一体的に成形されてもよい。すなわち、ベース部43及び単位凸部48Aが継ぎ目無しで接続してもよい。 In the example shown in FIG. 2, the linear pattern layer 40 includes a sheet-like base portion 43 and unit convex portions 48A projecting from the base portion 43 in the third direction D3. The base portion 43 is exposed by providing the unit concave portion 48B. As will be described later, the base portion 43 and the unit convex portion 48A may be integrally molded by resin molding. That is, the base portion 43 and the unit convex portion 48A may be seamlessly connected.
 図7Aは、図6に示された線状領域46及び線状要素45の一部分を拡大して模式的に示す図である。図7Aに示された例において、単位領域49は、四角形形状となっている。単位領域49は正方形形状でもよい。単位凸部48Aは、四角柱状の凸部となっている。単位凹部48Bは、四角柱状の凹部となっている。 FIG. 7A is a schematic enlarged view of a portion of the linear region 46 and the linear element 45 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 7A, the unit area 49 has a rectangular shape. The unit area 49 may have a square shape. The unit convex portion 48A is a rectangular prism-shaped convex portion. The unit recessed portion 48B is a square prism-shaped recessed portion.
 単位要素48及び単位領域49の配列方向は特に限定されない。図示された例に限られず、単位要素48及び単位領域49の配列方向は、線状要素45の長手方向(図示された例において、第1方向D1)に対して傾斜していてもよい。単位要素48及び単位領域49の配列方向は、線状要素45の配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に対して傾斜していてもよい。単位要素48及び単位領域49は、図示された正方配列ではなくてもよい。単位要素48及び単位領域49は、互いに傾斜した二方向に配列されてもよい。単位要素48及び単位領域49は、互いに対して60°傾斜した三つの方向に配列されてもよい。すなわち、単位要素48及び単位領域49は、ハニカム配列されてもよい。 The arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 and the unit regions 49 is not particularly limited. The arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 and the unit regions 49 is not limited to the illustrated example, and may be inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the linear elements 45 (in the illustrated example, the first direction D1). The arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 and the unit regions 49 may be inclined with respect to the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). The unitary elements 48 and unitary regions 49 may not be in the illustrated square array. The unit elements 48 and the unit regions 49 may be arranged in two directions that are inclined with respect to each other. The unitary elements 48 and the unitary regions 49 may be arranged in three directions slanted at 60° with respect to each other. That is, the unit elements 48 and the unit regions 49 may be arranged in a honeycomb pattern.
 単位領域49の平面視における形状は、特に限定されない。単位領域49を隙間無く敷き詰める観点から、図7Aに示すように、単位領域49の平面視における形状は、正方形形状又は長方形形状でもよい。単位領域49の平面視における形状は、三角形形状、直角二等片三角形形状、正三角形形状、六角形形状、正六角形形状等の多角形形状でもよい。単位領域49の平面視における形状は、円形状や楕円形状でもよい。 The shape of the unit area 49 in plan view is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of covering the unit areas 49 without gaps, the shape of the unit areas 49 in plan view may be square or rectangular, as shown in FIG. 7A. The shape of the unit region 49 in plan view may be a polygonal shape such as a triangular shape, a right-angled isosceles triangular shape, an equilateral triangular shape, a hexagonal shape, or a regular hexagonal shape. The shape of the unit area 49 in plan view may be circular or elliptical.
 図7Aに示された例において、単位要素48は、対応する一つの単位領域49の全域に広がっている。図7Aに示された例では、配列方向に隣り合う二つの単位凸部48Aは、互いに接触して一つの凸部を形成している。図7Aに示された例では、配列方向に隣り合う二つの単位凹部48Bは、互いに接触して一つの凹部を形成している。しかしながら、図7Aに示された例に限られない。図7Bに示すように、単位要素48は、対応する一つの単位領域49の一部の領域に設けられてもよい。この例によれば、隣り合う単位領域49に設けられた単位要素48が互いから離間してもよい。 In the example shown in FIG. 7A, the unit element 48 extends over the entire corresponding unit area 49 . In the example shown in FIG. 7A, two unit convex portions 48A adjacent in the arrangement direction are in contact with each other to form one convex portion. In the example shown in FIG. 7A, two unit recesses 48B adjacent in the arrangement direction are in contact with each other to form one recess. However, it is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 7A. As shown in FIG. 7B, the unit element 48 may be provided in a partial area of one corresponding unit area 49 . According to this example, unit elements 48 provided in adjacent unit areas 49 may be spaced apart from each other.
 図7Aに示された例において、単位要素48は、四角柱状の凹部または凸部となっている。単位要素48の形状は、特に限定されない。単位要素48は、錐体状の凹部または凸部でもよい。単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bは、相補的な形状を有する凸部及び凹部でなくてもよい。複数の単位凸部48Aが異なる形状を有してもよい。複数の単位凹部48Bが異なる形状を有してもよい。単位要素48によって構成される凹凸構造41は、二段階の高さでなくてもよい。凹凸構造41は、単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bによって、三段階以上の高さを有しもよい。凹凸構造41は、単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bによって、連続的に変化する高さを有してもよい。 In the example shown in FIG. 7A, the unit elements 48 are quadrangular prism-shaped recesses or protrusions. The shape of the unit element 48 is not particularly limited. The unit element 48 may be a cone-shaped recess or protrusion. The unit convex portion 48A and the unit concave portion 48B may not be convex portions and concave portions having complementary shapes. A plurality of unit convex portions 48A may have different shapes. A plurality of unit recesses 48B may have different shapes. The uneven structure 41 configured by the unit elements 48 does not have to have two levels of height. The concave-convex structure 41 may have three or more steps of height by the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B. The concave-convex structure 41 may have heights that continuously change due to the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B.
 線状要素45は、単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bによって形成された側壁42を有する。単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bは二次元配列されている。したがって、側壁42は、一つの線状要素45(線状領域46)内において、二次元配列される。側壁42は、種々の方向を向く。 The linear element 45 has side walls 42 formed by unit convex portions 48A and unit concave portions 48B. The unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B are arranged two-dimensionally. Therefore, the side walls 42 are two-dimensionally arranged within one linear element 45 (linear region 46). The sidewalls 42 face in various directions.
 線状要素45は、長手方向(図示された例において、第1方向D1)に非平行な側壁42A、例えば長手方向を向く側壁42Aを含む。線状要素45は、その長手方向における中間部に、換言するとその長手方向における両端以外に、長手方向を向く側壁42Aを含んでもよい。長手方向を向く側壁42Aは、線状要素45の長手方向における両端の間となる種々の位置に分散していてもよい。線状要素45は、その配列方向における中間部に、換言するとその配列方向における両端以外に、長手方向を向く側壁42Aを含んでもよい。長手方向を向く側壁42Aは、線状要素45の配列方向における両端の間となる種々の位置に分散していてもよい。 The linear element 45 includes sidewalls 42A that are non-parallel to the longitudinal direction (the first direction D1 in the illustrated example), for example sidewalls 42A facing the longitudinal direction. The linear element 45 may include side walls 42A facing in the longitudinal direction in the middle part in the longitudinal direction, in other words, in addition to both ends in the longitudinal direction. The longitudinally facing side walls 42A may be distributed at various positions between the longitudinal ends of the linear element 45 . The linear elements 45 may include side walls 42A facing the longitudinal direction in the middle portion in the arrangement direction, in other words, other than both ends in the arrangement direction. Side walls 42A facing the longitudinal direction may be dispersed at various positions between both ends of the linear elements 45 in the arrangement direction.
 線状要素45は、配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に非平行な側壁42B、すなわち、長手方向を向く側壁42Bを含む。線状要素45は、その配列方向における中間部に、換言するとその配列方向における両端以外に、配列方向を向く側壁42Bを含んでもよい。配列方向を向く側壁42Bは、線状要素45の配列方向における両端の間となる種々の位置に分散していてもよい。線状要素45は、その長手方向における中間部に、換言するとその長手方向における両端以外に、配列方向を向く側壁42Bを含んでもよい。配列方向を向く側壁42Aは、線状要素45の長手方向における両端の間となる種々の位置に分散していてもよい。 The linear elements 45 include side walls 42B non-parallel to the arrangement direction (second direction D2 in the illustrated example), that is, side walls 42B facing the longitudinal direction. The linear elements 45 may include sidewalls 42B facing the arrangement direction in the middle portion in the arrangement direction, in other words, other than both ends in the arrangement direction. The side walls 42B facing the arrangement direction may be dispersed at various positions between both ends of the linear elements 45 in the arrangement direction. The linear element 45 may include side walls 42B facing the arrangement direction at the intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction, in other words, other than at both ends in the longitudinal direction. The side walls 42A facing the arrangement direction may be dispersed at various positions between both ends of the linear elements 45 in the longitudinal direction.
 画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制する観点から、壁部傾斜角度θ1,θ2に下限を設けてもよい。壁部傾斜角度θ1,θ2(°)に下限を設定してもよい。壁部傾斜角度θ1,θ2は、加飾シート30の法線方向に対する側壁42A,42Bの傾斜角度の大きさを表す指標となる。壁部傾斜角度θ1,θ2に下限を設定することにより、加飾シート30の法線方向に対して側壁42A,42Bが大きく傾斜する。これにより、側壁42A,42Bでの拡散が弱められ、滲みが抑制される。また、側壁42のレンズ効果を弱めることができ且つ線状要素45での導光作用を弱めることができるので、滲みを更に抑制できる。このような点から、壁部傾斜角度θ1,θ2は、66°以上でもよく、73°以上でもよく、76°以上でもよい。 From the viewpoint of suppressing blurring of the outline of the image, lower limits may be set for the wall portion inclination angles θ1 and θ2. A lower limit may be set for the wall portion inclination angles θ1 and θ2 (°). The wall portion inclination angles θ1 and θ2 are indices representing the magnitude of the inclination angles of the side walls 42A and 42B with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30. FIG. By setting the lower limits of the wall portion inclination angles θ1 and θ2, the side walls 42A and 42B are greatly inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 . This weakens the diffusion on the side walls 42A and 42B and suppresses bleeding. In addition, since the lens effect of the side walls 42 can be weakened and the light guiding action of the linear elements 45 can be weakened, bleeding can be further suppressed. From this point of view, the wall portion inclination angles θ1 and θ2 may be 66° or more, 73° or more, or 76° or more.
 線状模様35を明瞭に表示する観点から、壁部傾斜角度θ1,θ2に上限を設けてもよい。壁部傾斜角度θ1,θ2は、87°以下でもよい。このように壁部傾斜角度θ1,θ2の上限を設けることにより、線状模様35を明瞭に表示できる。 From the viewpoint of clearly displaying the linear pattern 35, upper limits may be set for the wall inclination angles θ1 and θ2. The wall portion inclination angles θ1 and θ2 may be 87° or less. By thus setting the upper limits of the wall portion inclination angles θ1 and θ2, the linear pattern 35 can be displayed clearly.
 図8に示すように、壁部傾斜角度θ1,θ2は、単位要素48の配列方向に沿った断面において、特定される。壁部傾斜角度θ1は、加飾シートの法線方向と第1方向D1との両方に平行な断面において測定される。壁部傾斜角度θ2は、加飾シートの法線方向と第2方向D2との両方に平行な断面において測定される。壁部傾斜角度θ1,θ2は、単位要素48上となる第1位置PX及び第2位置PYを通過する直線SXLと、法線方向D3と、の間の角度(°)である。壁部傾斜角度θ1,θ2は、0°以上90°以下の角度となる。第1位置PXは、測定断面が横切る単位凸部48Aの最高位置HXPと、当該単位凸部48Aに隣り合う単位凹部48Bの最低位置LXPとの高低差HXDの10%だけ、最高位置HXPから低い単位凸部48Aの側壁42A上の位置である。第2位置PYは、高低差HXDの10%だけ最低位置LXPから高い単位凹部48Bの側壁42B上の位置である。 As shown in FIG. 8, the wall inclination angles θ1 and θ2 are specified in a cross section along the direction in which the unit elements 48 are arranged. The wall portion inclination angle θ1 is measured in a cross section parallel to both the normal direction of the decorative sheet and the first direction D1. The wall portion inclination angle θ2 is measured in a cross section parallel to both the normal direction of the decorative sheet and the second direction D2. The wall inclination angles θ1 and θ2 are angles (°) between a straight line SXL passing through the first position PX and the second position PY on the unit element 48 and the normal direction D3. The wall inclination angles θ1 and θ2 are 0° or more and 90° or less. The first position PX is lower than the highest position HXP by 10% of the height difference HXD between the highest position HXP of the unit convex portion 48A crossed by the measurement section and the lowest position LXP of the unit concave portion 48B adjacent to the unit convex portion 48A. This is the position on the side wall 42A of the unit convex portion 48A. The second position PY is a position on the side wall 42B of the unit concave portion 48B which is higher than the lowest position LXP by 10% of the height difference HXD.
 第1位置PXは、単位要素48の配列方向である一方向において、最高位置HXP及び最低位置LXPの間に位置する。高低差HXDの10%だけ最高位置HXPから低い位置は、単位要素48の配列方向における最高位置HXP及び最低位置LXPの間に、複数存在し得る。この場合、単位要素48の配列方向において最低位置LXPに最も近接した位置が、第1位置PXとなる。第2位置PYは、単位要素48の配列方向である一方向において、最高位置HXP及び最低位置LXPの間に位置する。高低差HXDの10%だけ最低位置LXPから高い位置は、単位要素48の配列方向における最高位置HXP及び最低位置LXPの間に、複数存在し得る。この場合、単位要素48の配列方向において最高位置HXPに最も近接した位置が、第2位置PYとなる。 The first position PX is positioned between the highest position HXP and the lowest position LXP in one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 . A plurality of positions lower than the highest position HXP by 10% of the height difference HXD can exist between the highest position HXP and the lowest position LXP in the arrangement direction of the unit element 48 . In this case, the position closest to the lowest position LXP in the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 is the first position PX. The second position PY is positioned between the highest position HXP and the lowest position LXP in one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 . A plurality of positions higher than the lowest position LXP by 10% of the height difference HXD can exist between the highest position HXP and the lowest position LXP in the arrangement direction of the unit element 48 . In this case, the position closest to the highest position HXP in the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 is the second position PY.
 単位要素48、単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bの最大長さは、50μm以下でもよく、40μm以下でもよく、30μm以下でもよく、25μm以下でもよい。単位要素48、単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bの最大長さは、1μm以上でもよく、2μm以上でもよく、4μm以上でもよく、6μm以上でもよい。単位要素48、単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bの最大長さは、第3方向D3から観察において、言い換えると第3方向D3に直交する面への投影において、最大となる長さである。単位要素48、単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bの最大長さに上限を設定することにより、個々の単位要素48が観察されることを抑制して、線状要素が連続した線として観察される。単位要素48、単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bの最大長さに下限を設定することにより、製造時に個々の単位要素48が意図せず接続してしまうことを抑制できる。 The maximum length of the unit element 48, the unit convex portion 48A and the unit concave portion 48B may be 50 µm or less, 40 µm or less, 30 µm or less, or 25 µm or less. The maximum length of the unit element 48, the unit convex portion 48A, and the unit concave portion 48B may be 1 μm or longer, 2 μm or longer, 4 μm or longer, or 6 μm or longer. The maximum lengths of the unit elements 48, the unit convex portions 48A, and the unit concave portions 48B are maximum lengths when observed from the third direction D3, in other words, when projected onto a plane orthogonal to the third direction D3. By setting an upper limit to the maximum length of the unit elements 48, the unit convex portions 48A, and the unit concave portions 48B, the individual unit elements 48 are suppressed from being observed, and the linear elements are observed as a continuous line. . By setting the lower limits for the maximum lengths of the unit elements 48, the unit convex portions 48A, and the unit concave portions 48B, it is possible to prevent the individual unit elements 48 from being unintentionally connected during manufacturing.
 単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bによって構成される凹凸構造41の高低差は、0.3μm以上でもよく、0.5μm以上でもよく、1μm以上でもよい。単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bによって構成される凹凸構造41の高低差は、20μm以下でもよく、10μm以下でもよく、5μm以下でもよい。凹凸構造41の高低差は、第3方向D3に沿った最高位置と最低位置との差である。 The height difference of the uneven structure 41 formed by the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B may be 0.3 μm or more, 0.5 μm or more, or 1 μm or more. The height difference of the uneven structure 41 formed by the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B may be 20 μm or less, 10 μm or less, or 5 μm or less. The height difference of the uneven structure 41 is the difference between the highest position and the lowest position along the third direction D3.
 画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制する観点から、線状要素45の長手方向に沿った線状要素45のRzに上限を設けてもよい。Rzに上限を設定することにより、線状要素45での拡散が抑制され、結果として、画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制できる。Rzは、JISB0601-1994に準拠した十点平均粗さ(μm)である。 From the viewpoint of suppressing blurring of the outline of the image, an upper limit may be set for Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 . By setting the upper limit of Rz, the diffusion at the linear element 45 is suppressed, and as a result, blurring of the outline of the image can be suppressed. Rz is the ten-point average roughness (μm) according to JISB0601-1994.
 十点平均粗さRzは、ザイゴ株式会社製の走査型白色干渉計(NewView6300)を用いて測定された値とする。この測定装置における測定領域は1076μm四方とし、うねり成分の除去には、測定装置に設定された「cylinder」を採用する。上述の壁部傾斜角度θ1,θ2は、ザイゴ株式会社製の走査型白色干渉計(New View6300)を用いて計測された線状模様層40の表面形状から、算出される。 The ten-point average roughness Rz is a value measured using a scanning white light interferometer (NewView6300) manufactured by Zygo Corporation. The measurement area in this measuring device is 1076 μm square, and the “cylinder” set in the measuring device is used to remove the undulation component. The wall inclination angles θ1 and θ2 described above are calculated from the surface shape of the linear pattern layer 40 measured using a scanning white light interferometer (New View 6300) manufactured by Zygo Corporation.
 線状要素45の長手方向に沿った線状要素45のRzは、5.5μm以下でもよく、5μm以下でもよく、4.5μm以下でもよく、4μm以下でもよく、3μm以下でもよい。線状要素45の長手方向に沿った線状要素45のRzは、5箇所においてRzを測定し、最大の測定値及び最小の測定値を除く3つの測定値の平均値により、特定される。 The Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 may be 5.5 μm or less, 5 μm or less, 4.5 μm or less, 4 μm or less, or 3 μm or less. The Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 is specified by measuring Rz at five points and averaging the three measurements excluding the maximum and minimum measurements.
 線状要素45の長手方向に沿った線状要素45のRzの下限は特に設定されない。例えば、線状要素45の長手方向に沿った線状要素45のRzは、0μmより大きくてもよく、1μm以上でもよい。 The lower limit of Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 is not particularly set. For example, Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 may be greater than 0 μm or 1 μm or more.
 隣り合う二つの線状要素45の間での線状要素45の長手方向に沿った線状要素45のRzの差に、下限を設定してもよい。隣り合う二つの線状要素45の間での線状要素45の長手方向に沿った線状要素45のRzの差は、1μm以上でもよく、1.5μm以上でもよく、2μm以上でもよく、2.5μm以上でもよく、3μm以上でもよく、4μm以上でもよい。Rzの差をこのように設定することにより、隣り合う二つの線状要素45の間で、マット感又はグロス感に相違が生じる。これにより、隣り合う二つの線状要素45が、観察時に明瞭に区別され得る。 A lower limit may be set for the difference in Rz of the linear elements 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear elements 45 between two adjacent linear elements 45 . The difference in Rz of the linear elements 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear elements 45 between two adjacent linear elements 45 may be 1 μm or more, 1.5 μm or more, 2 μm or more, or 2 μm or more. .5 μm or more, 3 μm or more, or 4 μm or more. By setting the difference in Rz in this manner, a difference in matte or glossiness occurs between two adjacent linear elements 45 . Thereby, two adjacent linear elements 45 can be clearly distinguished when observed.
 隣り合う二つの線状要素45の間での線状要素45の長手方向に沿った線状要素45のRzの差の上限は特に設定されない。例えば、隣り合う二つの線状要素45の間での線状要素45の長手方向に沿った線状要素45のRzの差は、5μm以下でもよい。 The upper limit of the difference in Rz of the linear elements 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear elements 45 between two adjacent linear elements 45 is not particularly set. For example, the difference in Rz of the linear elements 45 along the longitudinal direction of the linear elements 45 between two adjacent linear elements 45 may be 5 μm or less.
 上述した最大長および高低差を有する単位要素48を含む線状模様層40において、長手方向に沿った線状要素45のRzは、単位凸部48Aの配置割合(%)および単位凹部48Bの配置割合(%)によって、調節可能である。ここで、図28は、単位凹部48Bの配置割合(%)と、長手方向に沿った線状要素45のRzとの関係を示すグラフである。 In the linear pattern layer 40 including the unit elements 48 having the maximum length and height difference described above, the Rz of the linear elements 45 along the longitudinal direction is the arrangement ratio (%) of the unit convex portions 48A and the arrangement of the unit concave portions 48B. It can be adjusted by the ratio (%). Here, FIG. 28 is a graph showing the relationship between the arrangement ratio (%) of the unit concave portions 48B and the Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction.
 画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制する観点から、線状要素45内における単位凹部48Bの配置割合は、0%より大きく40%以下でもよく、0%より大きく35%以下でもよく、0%より大きく30%以下でもよく、0%より大きく25%以下でもよく、0%より大きく20%以下でもよく、0%より大きく15%以下でもよい。画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制する観点から、線状要素45内における単位凹部48Bの配置割合は、60%以上100%より小さくてもよく、65%以上100%より小さくてもよく、70%以上100%より小さくてもよく、80%以上100%より小さくてもよい。このように単位凹部48Bの配置割合を設定することにより、長手方向に沿った線状要素45のRzが大きくなり過ぎることを抑制できる。 From the viewpoint of suppressing blurring of the outline of the image, the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B in the linear element 45 may be greater than 0% and 40% or less, may be greater than 0% and 35% or less, or may be greater than 0% and 30%. % or less, greater than 0% and 25% or less, greater than 0% and 20% or less, or greater than 0% and 15% or less. From the viewpoint of suppressing blurring of the outline of the image, the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B in the linear element 45 may be 60% or more and less than 100%, may be 65% or more and less than 100%, or may be 70% or more. It may be less than 100%, or 80% or more and less than 100%. By setting the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B in this way, it is possible to suppress the Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction from becoming too large.
 単位凹部48Bの配置割合を単位凸部48Aの配置割合より大きくしてもよい。単位凹部48Bの配置割合を50%より大きくしてもよい。図28に示すように、単位凹部48Bの配置割合及び単位凸部48Aの配置割合をこのように設定することにより、長手方向に沿った線状要素45のRzが大きくなり過ぎることを抑制できる。これにより、画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制することができる。 The arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B may be larger than the arrangement ratio of the unit convex portions 48A. The arrangement ratio of the unit recesses 48B may be greater than 50%. As shown in FIG. 28, by setting the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B and the arrangement ratio of the unit convex portions 48A in this way, it is possible to suppress the Rz of the linear element 45 along the longitudinal direction from becoming too large. As a result, blurring of the contour of the image can be suppressed.
 単位凹部48Bの割合が40%以下である線状要素45において、単位要素48の配列方向に単位凹部48Bが連続して配置されないようにしてもよい。単位凹部48Bの割合が60%以上である線状要素45において、単位要素48の配列方向に単位凸部48Aが連続して配置されないようにしてもよい。例えば、単位要素48が、第1の配列方向(例えば第1方向D1)および第1の配列方向と非平行な第2配列方向(例えば第2方向D2)に配列されているとする。この線状模様層40において単位凹部48Bの割合が40%以下である場合、任意の単位凹部48Bと第1配列方向に隣り合う単位要素48は単位凸部48Aであり、任意の単位凹部48Bと第2配列方向に隣り合う単位要素48は単位凸部48Aでもよい。或いは、この線状模様層40において単位凹部48Bの割合が60%以上である場合、任意の単位凸部48Aと第1配列方向に隣り合う単位要素48は単位凹部48Bであり、任意の単位凸部48Aと第2配列方向に隣り合う単位要素48は単位凹部48Bでもよい。このような例によれば、単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bがマット感およびグロス感を表現することに機能する。これにより、隣り合う二つの線状要素45を区別して観察することが可能となり、線状模様35を明瞭に観察できる。 In the linear element 45 in which the proportion of the unit recesses 48B is 40% or less, the unit recesses 48B may not be arranged continuously in the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48. In the linear element 45 in which the ratio of the unit concave portions 48B is 60% or more, the unit convex portions 48A may not be arranged continuously in the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48. FIG. For example, assume that the unit elements 48 are arranged in a first arrangement direction (eg, first direction D1) and in a second arrangement direction (eg, second direction D2) non-parallel to the first arrangement direction. When the ratio of the unit recesses 48B in the linear pattern layer 40 is 40% or less, the unit elements 48 adjacent to any unit recesses 48B in the first arrangement direction are the unit protrusions 48A, and the unit recesses 48B and Unit elements 48 adjacent to each other in the second arrangement direction may be unit convex portions 48A. Alternatively, when the ratio of the unit recesses 48B in the linear pattern layer 40 is 60% or more, the unit elements 48 adjacent to the arbitrary unit protrusions 48A in the first arrangement direction are the unit recesses 48B, and the arbitrary unit protrusions The unit element 48 adjacent to the portion 48A in the second arrangement direction may be the unit concave portion 48B. According to such an example, the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B function to express the matt feeling and the gloss feeling. As a result, two adjacent linear elements 45 can be distinguished and observed, and the linear pattern 35 can be clearly observed.
 加飾シート30は、構成要素間の密着性改善を目的として、接合層62を含んでもよい。図2に示された例において、接合層62は、線状模様層40及び意匠層60との密着性を改善している。接合層62は、アクリル樹脂やエキポシ樹脂等の種々の接着材や粘着材を用いて形成され得る。接合層62の厚さは、例えば、1μm以上80μm以下でもよい。接合層62は、省略されてもよい。 The decorative sheet 30 may include a bonding layer 62 for the purpose of improving adhesion between constituent elements. In the example shown in FIG. 2 , the bonding layer 62 improves adhesion between the linear pattern layer 40 and the design layer 60 . The bonding layer 62 can be formed using various adhesives and adhesives such as acrylic resin and epoxy resin. The thickness of the bonding layer 62 may be, for example, 1 μm or more and 80 μm or less. The bonding layer 62 may be omitted.
 加飾シート30は、意匠性を向上させる目的で意匠層60を含んでもよい。意匠層60は、単色の一様な層としての着色層でもよい。意匠層60は、絵柄を有する絵柄層でもよい。意匠層60は、金属を含む金属層でもよい。意匠層60は、着色層、絵柄層及び金属層の二以上を含んでもよい。 The decorative sheet 30 may include a design layer 60 for the purpose of improving the design. The design layer 60 may be a colored layer as a monochromatic uniform layer. The design layer 60 may be a pattern layer having a pattern. The design layer 60 may be a metal layer containing metal. The design layer 60 may include two or more of a colored layer, a pattern layer and a metal layer.
 絵柄層は、図形、パターン、デザイン、色彩、絵、写真、キャラクター、マーク、ピクトグラム、文字や数字等を表示してもよい。絵柄層は、背景を表示する意匠表現を行ってもよい。例えば、表示システム10、加飾部材20及び加飾シート30が設けられる周辺環境と加飾シートを調和させることができる絵柄として、木目調や大理石調の絵柄、金属調の質感、幾何学模様を、絵柄層が表示してもよい。 The picture layer may display figures, patterns, designs, colors, pictures, photographs, characters, marks, pictograms, letters and numbers. The pattern layer may perform design expression to display the background. For example, as patterns that can harmonize the surrounding environment in which the display system 10, the decorative member 20, and the decorative sheet 30 are provided, and the decorative sheet, there are wood grain patterns, marble patterns, metallic textures, and geometric patterns. , the pattern layer may be displayed.
 着色層及び絵柄層は、樹脂組成物の塗膜から作製され得る。樹脂組成物は、バインダー樹脂、着色剤、溶剤、安定剤、可塑剤、触媒、硬化剤、紫外線吸収剤、光安定剤等を含んでもよい。着色剤は、顔料や染料でもよい。着色層及び絵柄層の厚みは、0.5μm以上50μm以下でもよく、1μm以上20μm以下でもよく、2μm以上10μm以下でもよい。 The colored layer and pattern layer can be made from a coating film of a resin composition. The resin composition may contain a binder resin, a colorant, a solvent, a stabilizer, a plasticizer, a catalyst, a curing agent, an ultraviolet absorber, a light stabilizer, and the like. Colorants may be pigments or dyes. The thickness of the colored layer and pattern layer may be 0.5 μm or more and 50 μm or less, 1 μm or more and 20 μm or less, or 2 μm or more and 10 μm or less.
 金属層は、金、銀、銅、錫、鉄、ニッケル、クロム、コバルト等の金属元素の一種又は二種以上を含んでもよい。金属層は、真鍮、青銅、ステンレス鋼等の合金を含んでもよい。金属層の厚みは、0.1μm~1μm程度でもよい。 The metal layer may contain one or more of metal elements such as gold, silver, copper, tin, iron, nickel, chromium, and cobalt. Metal layers may include alloys such as brass, bronze, stainless steel, and the like. The thickness of the metal layer may be about 0.1 μm to 1 μm.
 次に、加飾部材20及び加飾シート30の製造方法の一例について説明する。まず、加飾シート30の製造に用いられる版90の作製方法について説明する。次に、版90を用いた加飾シート30の作製方法について説明する。その後、加飾シート30から加飾部材20を作製する方法について説明する。 Next, an example of a method for manufacturing the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 will be described. First, a method for manufacturing the plate 90 used for manufacturing the decorative sheet 30 will be described. Next, a method for manufacturing the decorative sheet 30 using the plate 90 will be described. After that, a method for producing the decorative member 20 from the decorative sheet 30 will be described.
 製造対象となる線状模様35に応じた版90を作製する。図9及び図12は、版90の一例を示している。図9に示された版90は、いわゆるロール版である。版90は、円筒形状の外形状を有する。版90は、円筒形状の中心軸線CAを中心として回転可能に保持される。版90は、円筒形状の外周面に版面91を有する。版面91は、転写すべき線状模様に対応した凹凸面となっている。版面91は、線状模様35を表示する線状模様層40の凹凸構造41に対応した凹凸面となっている。 A plate 90 corresponding to the linear pattern 35 to be manufactured is produced. 9 and 12 show an example of the plate 90. FIG. The plate 90 shown in FIG. 9 is a so-called roll plate. The plate 90 has a cylindrical outer shape. The plate 90 is held rotatably around the cylindrical central axis CA. The plate 90 has a plate surface 91 on its cylindrical outer peripheral surface. The plate surface 91 is an uneven surface corresponding to the linear pattern to be transferred. The plate surface 91 is an uneven surface corresponding to the uneven structure 41 of the linear pattern layer 40 displaying the linear pattern 35 .
 図示された例において、版90の版面91は、中心軸線CAと平行な軸方向に配列された複数の版線状要素92を含む。各版線状要素92は、版線状凸部92A又は版線状凹部92Bである。版線状凸部92Aは、中心軸線CAに直交する径方向において中心軸線CAから離れる外側へ突出している。版線状凹部92Bは、中心軸線CAに直交する径方向において中心軸線CAに近接する内側へ凹んでいる。版線状凸部92A及び版線状凹部92Bは軸方向に交互に配置されている。版線状要素92は、中心軸線CAを中心とした円周方向に細長く延びる。各版線状要素92は、二次元配列された版単位要素93を含んでいる。版線状要素92は、版面91に沿った非平行な二つの方向にそれぞれ配置された複数の版単位要素93を含んでいる。版単位要素93は、版単位凸部93A又は版単位凹部93Bである。版単位凸部93Aは、径方向における外側へ突出している。版線状凹部92Bは、径方向における内側へ凹んでいる。 In the illustrated example, the plate surface 91 of the plate 90 includes a plurality of plate linear elements 92 arranged in an axial direction parallel to the central axis CA. Each plate-like element 92 is a plate-like protrusion 92A or a plate-like recess 92B. The plate line-shaped convex portion 92A protrudes outward away from the central axis CA in the radial direction perpendicular to the central axis CA. The stencil-shaped concave portion 92B is recessed inward and close to the central axis CA in the radial direction perpendicular to the central axis CA. The plate linear projections 92A and the plate linear recesses 92B are alternately arranged in the axial direction. The plate-like elements 92 are elongated in the circumferential direction about the central axis CA. Each plate line element 92 includes plate unit elements 93 arranged two-dimensionally. The plate line element 92 includes a plurality of plate unit elements 93 respectively arranged in two non-parallel directions along the plate surface 91 . The plate unit element 93 is a plate unit convex portion 93A or a plate unit concave portion 93B. The plate unit convex portion 93A protrudes radially outward. The plate line-shaped recess 92B is recessed inward in the radial direction.
 版90の版面91は、製造対象となる線状模様に応じて作製される。まず、線状模様35に関する多階調グレースケール画像データ95を用意する。多階調グレースケール画像データ95は、グレースケールのデータである。多階調グレースケール画像データ95は、3階調以上のデータである。例えば、製造対象となる線状模様35をグレースケールにてスキャンすることによって、画像データ95を用意できる。図10は、画像データ95の一例を示している。図10に示された画像データ95は、ヘアライン模様に関するデータである。 The plate surface 91 of the plate 90 is manufactured according to the linear pattern to be manufactured. First, multi-tone grayscale image data 95 for the linear pattern 35 is prepared. The multi-tone grayscale image data 95 is grayscale data. The multi-tone grayscale image data 95 is data of three or more tones. For example, the image data 95 can be prepared by scanning the linear pattern 35 to be manufactured in grayscale. FIG. 10 shows an example of the image data 95. As shown in FIG. Image data 95 shown in FIG. 10 is data relating to a hairline pattern.
 次に、画像データ95の各画素96に対応する画素領域97を設定する。画素領域97は、版90を形成する金属板上の領域であり、最終的に版面91上の領域となる。画像データ95に含まれる画素96と、同一の配列にて、多数の画素領域97を分布させる。その後、図11に示すように、各画素領域97を複数のサブ領域98に分割する。一つの画素領域97に対応するサブ領域98の数は、特に限定されない。一つの画素領域97に対応するサブ領域98の数は、2でもよいし、4でもよいし、8でもよいし、16でもよい。次に、各サブ領域98を第1区域99a及び第2区域99bのいずれかに割り振る。図11に示された例では、白色で表示されたサブ領域98は第1区域99aとして設定されている。黒白色で表示されたサブ領域98は第2区域99bとして設定されている。第1区域99a及び第2区域99bは、ランダムに割り振ってもよい。各画素領域97における第1区域の割合は、当該画素の階調に応じて決定されてもよい。各画素領域97における第2区域の割合は、当該画素の階調に応じて決定されてもよい。 Next, a pixel area 97 corresponding to each pixel 96 of the image data 95 is set. The pixel area 97 is an area on the metal plate forming the plate 90 and finally becomes an area on the plate surface 91 . A large number of pixel regions 97 are distributed in the same arrangement as the pixels 96 included in the image data 95 . Each pixel region 97 is then divided into a plurality of sub-regions 98, as shown in FIG. The number of sub-regions 98 corresponding to one pixel region 97 is not particularly limited. The number of sub-regions 98 corresponding to one pixel region 97 may be two, four, eight, or sixteen. Each subregion 98 is then assigned to either a first region 99a or a second region 99b. In the example shown in FIG. 11, the sub-region 98 displayed in white is set as the first area 99a. A sub-region 98 displayed in black and white is set as a second section 99b. The first area 99a and the second area 99b may be randomly allocated. The proportion of the first area in each pixel area 97 may be determined according to the gradation of the pixel. The proportion of the second area in each pixel area 97 may be determined according to the gradation of the pixel.
 画像データ95が256段階の階調を有する例において、画素96の階調が0以上15以下の階調であれば、16あるサブ領域98の全てを第1区域99aとしてもよい。画像データ95が256段階の階調を有する例において、画素96の階調が16以上31以下の階調であれば、16あるサブ領域98のうちの一つを第2区域99bとしてもよい。画像データ95が256段階の階調を有する例において、画素96の階調が32以上47以下の階調であれば、16あるサブ領域98のうちの一つを第2区域99bとしてもよい。画素の階調が0階調から最大階調まで上昇するにつれて、当該画素に対応する各画素領域97における第1区域の割合を0%から100%まで変化させてもよい。 In an example where the image data 95 has 256 levels of gradation, if the gradation of the pixels 96 is 0 to 15, all 16 sub-regions 98 may be used as the first regions 99a. In an example where the image data 95 has 256 levels of gradation, if the gradation of the pixel 96 is 16 or more and 31 or less, one of the 16 sub-regions 98 may be used as the second region 99b. In an example where the image data 95 has 256 levels of gradation, if the gradation of the pixel 96 is 32 or more and 47 or less, one of the 16 sub-regions 98 may be used as the second region 99b. As the grayscale of a pixel increases from grayscale 0 to full grayscale, the percentage of the first area in each pixel region 97 corresponding to that pixel may vary from 0% to 100%.
 他の例として、画素の階調が0階調から最大階調まで上昇するにつれて、当該画素に対応する各画素領域97における第1区域の割合を0%から40%及び60%から100%まで変化させてもよい。すなわち、画素領域97における第1区域の割合は、40%より大きく60%より小さい範囲内の値をとらないようにしてもよい。更に他の例として、画素の階調が0階調から最大階調まで上昇するにつれて、当該画素に対応する各画素領域97における第1区域の割合を0%から40%まで変化させてもよい。画素の階調が0階調から最大階調まで上昇するにつれて、当該画素に対応する各画素領域97における第1区域の割合を60%から100%まで変化させてもよい。これらの例によれば、単位凹部48Bの配置割合が40%以下または60%以上となる線状模様層40の作製に用いられる版を得ることができる。言い換えると、単位凸部48Aの配置割合が40%以下または60%以上となる線状模様層40の作製に用いられる版を得ることができる。 As another example, as the gradation of a pixel increases from 0 gradation to the maximum gradation, the percentage of the first area in each pixel region 97 corresponding to that pixel is increased from 0% to 40% and from 60% to 100%. You can change it. That is, the ratio of the first area in the pixel area 97 may be set so as not to be within the range of more than 40% and less than 60%. As yet another example, as the gradation of a pixel increases from 0 to maximum gradation, the percentage of the first area in each pixel region 97 corresponding to that pixel may vary from 0% to 40%. . As the grayscale of a pixel increases from grayscale 0 to full grayscale, the proportion of the first area in each pixel region 97 corresponding to that pixel may vary from 60% to 100%. According to these examples, it is possible to obtain a plate used for producing the linear pattern layer 40 in which the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B is 40% or less or 60% or more. In other words, it is possible to obtain a plate used for producing the linear pattern layer 40 in which the arrangement ratio of the unit convex portions 48A is 40% or less or 60% or more.
 このような処理は、グレースケールのモノクロ2階調化に相当する。モノクロ2階調化として、上述した例に限られず、誤差拡散法やハーフトーンスクリーンを採用してもよい。誤差拡散法によれば、第1区域99aの割合が40%以下である場合に、言い換えると第2区域99bの割合が60%以上である場合に、第1区域99aが配列方向に沿って連続しないようにできる。また、第1区域99aの割合が60%以上である場合に、言い換えると第2区域99bの割合が40%以下である場合に、第2区域99bが配列方向に沿って連続しないようにできる。この場合、得られた版を用いて作製された線状模様層40において、単位凹部48Bの割合が40%以下である場合に単位凹部48Bが配列方向に連続しない、或いは、単位凹部48Bの割合が60%以上である場合に単位凸部48Aが配列方向に連続しないようにできる。 This kind of processing corresponds to converting the grayscale to monochrome two-tone. Monochrome 2-gradation is not limited to the example described above, and an error diffusion method or a halftone screen may be employed. According to the error diffusion method, when the ratio of the first regions 99a is 40% or less, in other words, when the ratio of the second regions 99b is 60% or more, the first regions 99a are continuous along the arrangement direction. You can avoid it. Further, when the ratio of the first regions 99a is 60% or more, in other words, when the ratio of the second regions 99b is 40% or less, the second regions 99b can be made discontinuous along the arrangement direction. In this case, in the linear pattern layer 40 produced using the obtained plate, when the ratio of the unit recesses 48B is 40% or less, the unit recesses 48B are not continuous in the arrangement direction, or the ratio of the unit recesses 48B is is 60% or more, the unit convex portions 48A can be prevented from continuing in the arrangement direction.
 以上により、線状模様35の画像データ95と同一の広がりをもった領域内に、第1区域99a及び第2区域99bを敷き詰めることができる。そして、第2区域99bの配置パターンと同一のパターンにて、版面91を形成するようになる金属面をエッチングする。金属面のうちの第1区域99aに対応する位置には、凹部を形成しない。第2区域99bに対応する位置の凹部は、フォトリソグラフィー技術を用いたエッチングによって形成されてもよい。第2区域99bに対応する位置の凹部は、レーザー描画によって形成されてもよい。このようにして形成された凹部が、版面91の各版線状要素92に含まれる版単位凹部93Bを構成する。凹部が形成されていない第1区域99aに対応する位置が、版面91の各版線状要素92に含まれる版単位凸部93Aを構成する。 As described above, the first area 99a and the second area 99b can be laid out in a region coextensive with the image data 95 of the linear pattern 35. Then, the metal surface that forms the plate surface 91 is etched in the same pattern as the arrangement pattern of the second areas 99b. A recess is not formed in the metal surface at a position corresponding to the first area 99a. The recesses at positions corresponding to the second areas 99b may be formed by etching using photolithography technology. A recess at a position corresponding to the second area 99b may be formed by laser drawing. The concave portions formed in this manner constitute the plate unit concave portions 93B included in each of the plate linear elements 92 of the printing plate surface 91 . A position corresponding to the first area 99a where no recess is formed constitutes a plate unit convex portion 93A included in each plate linear element 92 of the plate surface 91. As shown in FIG.
 以上のようにして凹部を形成することによって、版面91の凹凸が作製される。版面を形成する金属面は、一例として、銅板の一方の主面としてもよい。銅板等の金属板は、円柱状コアの外周面に取り付けられることによって、版面91を構成する。銅板の表面は、凹凸面の形成が終了した後、クロムめっき処理されてもよい。 By forming the concave portions as described above, the unevenness of the plate surface 91 is produced. As an example, the metal surface forming the printing plate may be one main surface of a copper plate. A metal plate such as a copper plate constitutes the plate surface 91 by being attached to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical core. The surface of the copper plate may be chrome plated after the formation of the uneven surface is completed.
 凹部が形成された金属面をブラスト処理してもよい。ブラスト処理は、上述したクロムめっき処理の前に実施される。ブラスト処理を行うことによって、版面91の凹凸をなだらかにすることができ、且つ、版面91に微細な凹凸を形成できる。版面91に付与される微細な凹凸のピッチは、版単位要素93の配列ピッチよりも短くてもよい。版面91に付与される微細な凹凸の高低差は、版単位要素93の高低差よりも小さくてもよい。微細な凹凸の程度は、ブラスト処理に用いられる研磨材の種類、大きさ、形状や、研磨材の噴射条件等によって、調整可能である。図23を参照して後述するように、版面91に微細な凹凸を付与することにより、線状要素45の表面に微細な凹凸を付与できる。線状要素45の微細な凹凸により、線状要素45によるレンズ効果や導光作用を弱めることができる。線状要素45の微細な凹凸により、線状模様層40への入射光の光拡散を促進し、線状模様35をより明瞭にできる。 You may blast the metal surface on which the concave portion is formed. The blasting treatment is performed before the chrome plating treatment described above. By performing blasting, the unevenness of the plate surface 91 can be smoothed, and fine unevenness can be formed on the plate surface 91 . The pitch of the fine unevenness provided on the plate surface 91 may be shorter than the arrangement pitch of the plate-unit elements 93 . The height difference of the fine unevenness provided on the plate surface 91 may be smaller than the height difference of the plate unit elements 93 . The degree of fine unevenness can be adjusted by the type, size, and shape of the abrasive used in the blasting process, the ejection conditions of the abrasive, and the like. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 23, by providing fine unevenness to the plate surface 91, fine unevenness can be imparted to the surface of the linear element 45. FIG. The fine unevenness of the linear elements 45 can weaken the lens effect and light guiding action of the linear elements 45 . The minute unevenness of the linear elements 45 promotes the diffusion of light incident on the linear pattern layer 40, making the linear pattern 35 clearer.
 以上にようにして、版90が作製される。次に作製された版を利用して、加飾シート30を作製する。 The plate 90 is produced as described above. Next, using the produced plate, the decorative sheet 30 is produced.
 以下に説明する例において、版90を用いて樹脂賦型層80が作製される。樹脂賦型層80には、版面91の凹凸を転写した凹凸構造81が付与される。凹凸構造81は、版面91と相補的な構成を有する。具体的には、次のようにして、樹脂賦型層80が版90を用いて作製されてもよい。 In the example described below, the plate 90 is used to fabricate the resin imprint layer 80 . An uneven structure 81 obtained by transferring the unevenness of the plate surface 91 is provided to the resin imprinting layer 80 . Concavo-convex structure 81 has a configuration complementary to plate surface 91 . Specifically, the resin transfer layer 80 may be produced using the plate 90 as follows.
 中心軸線CAを中心として版90を回転させる。版90に向けて、長尺の基材70を供給する。図12に示すように、基材70及び版90の間に、未硬化の硬化性樹脂組成物を供給する。基材70として、樹脂製のフィルム、例えばポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルムが用いられてもよい。硬化性樹脂組成物として、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物が例示される。電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物として、紫外線硬化性樹脂組成物や電子線硬化性樹脂組成物が例示される。硬化性樹脂組成物は、版90及び基材70の間において、硬化処理される。例えば、基材70を透過した紫外線が、紫外線硬化性樹脂組成物に照射される。基材70を透過した電子線が、電子線硬化性樹脂組成物に照射される。硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物により、樹脂賦型層80が作製される。樹脂賦型層80は、基材70に接合している。 The plate 90 is rotated around the central axis CA. A long base material 70 is supplied toward the plate 90 . As shown in FIG. 12, an uncured curable resin composition is supplied between the substrate 70 and the plate 90 . As the substrate 70, a resin film such as a polyethylene terephthalate film may be used. As the curable resin composition, an ionizing radiation curable resin composition is exemplified. Examples of ionizing radiation-curable resin compositions include ultraviolet-curable resin compositions and electron beam-curable resin compositions. The curable resin composition is cured between the plate 90 and the substrate 70 . For example, the ultraviolet curable resin composition is irradiated with ultraviolet rays that have passed through the base material 70 . The electron beam that has passed through the substrate 70 is applied to the electron beam curable resin composition. A resin transfer layer 80 is produced from the cured product of the curable resin composition. The resin imprinting layer 80 is bonded to the base material 70 .
 樹脂賦型層80は、版線状要素92に対応した複数の第2線状要素82を含む。第2線状要素82は、版線状要素92に対応して形成される。複数の第2線状要素82は、一方向に配列される。各第2線状要素82は、一方向に直交する他方向に細長く延びる。第2線状要素82は、第2線状凸部82A又は第2線状凹部82Bである。版線状凸部92Aに対応して、第2線状凹部82Bが形成される。版線状凹部92Bに対応して、第2線状凸部82Aが形成される。第2線状凸部82A及び第2線状凹部82Bは、一方向に交互に配置される。 The resin imprint layer 80 includes a plurality of second linear elements 82 corresponding to the plate linear elements 92 . The second linear elements 82 are formed corresponding to the plate linear elements 92 . The plurality of second linear elements 82 are arranged in one direction. Each second linear element 82 elongates in the other direction orthogonal to the one direction. The second linear element 82 is a second linear protrusion 82A or a second linear recess 82B. A second linear concave portion 82B is formed corresponding to the plate linear convex portion 92A. A second linear protrusion 82A is formed corresponding to the plate linear recess 92B. The second linear protrusions 82A and the second linear recesses 82B are alternately arranged in one direction.
 各第2線状要素82は、二次元配列された第2単位要素83を含む。すなわち、各第2線状要素82は、非平行な二つの方向にそれぞれ配置された複数の第2単位要素83を含む。第2単位要素83は、第2単位凸部83A又は第2単位凹部83Bである。版単位凸部93Aに対応して、第2単位凹部83Bが形成される。版単位凹部93Bに対応して、第2単位凸部83Aが形成される。 Each second linear element 82 includes second unit elements 83 arranged two-dimensionally. That is, each second linear element 82 includes a plurality of second unit elements 83 arranged in two non-parallel directions. The second unit element 83 is a second unit convex portion 83A or a second unit concave portion 83B. A second unit concave portion 83B is formed corresponding to the plate unit convex portion 93A. A second unit convex portion 83A is formed corresponding to the plate unit concave portion 93B.
 図12に示された例において、基材70は版90の版面91から離れている。樹脂賦型層80は、基材70に接合したシート状のランド部84を含む。ランド部84は、第2線状凸部82Aと一体的に成形されている。ランド部84は、第2線状凹部82Bが設けられた位置において、二つの第2線状凸部82Aの間に露出する。ランド部84は、第2単位凸部83Aと一体的に成形されている。ランド部84は、第2単位凹部83Bが設けられた位置において、二つの第2単位凹部83Bの間に露出する。 In the example shown in FIG. 12, the base material 70 is separated from the plate surface 91 of the plate 90. The resin imprint layer 80 includes a sheet-like land portion 84 bonded to the base material 70 . The land portion 84 is formed integrally with the second linear convex portion 82A. The land portion 84 is exposed between the two second linear convex portions 82A at the position where the second linear concave portion 82B is provided. The land portion 84 is formed integrally with the second unit convex portion 83A. The land portion 84 is exposed between the two second unit recesses 83B at the position where the second unit recesses 83B are provided.
 その後、図13に示すように、版90から剥がした樹脂賦型層80の版90に接触していた面に、第1樹脂組成物を供給して、第1樹脂組成物の塗膜を形成する。第1樹脂組成物の塗膜を乾燥または硬化することによって、被覆層72を形成する。被覆層72の表面には、樹脂賦型層80の凹凸構造81に対応した凹凸が残っている。被覆層72は、熱可塑性樹脂を含んでもよい。被覆層72は、硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を含んでもよい。硬化性樹脂組成物は、熱硬化性樹脂組成物でもよいし、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物でもよい。電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物として、紫外線硬化性樹脂組成物や電子線硬化性樹脂組成物が例示される。被覆層72は、シリコーン等の剥離性を有した材料を含んでもよい。被覆層72が剥離性材料を含むことにより、被覆層72は、離型層73として機能する。ただし、被覆層72の作製を省略して、線状模様層40を樹脂賦型層80上に形成してもよい。 After that, as shown in FIG. 13, the first resin composition is supplied to the surface of the resin transfer layer 80 peeled off from the plate 90 that was in contact with the plate 90 to form a coating film of the first resin composition. do. The coating layer 72 is formed by drying or curing the coating film of the first resin composition. Concavities and convexities corresponding to the concavo-convex structure 81 of the resin imprinting layer 80 remain on the surface of the coating layer 72 . The coating layer 72 may contain a thermoplastic resin. The coating layer 72 may contain a cured product of a curable resin composition. The curable resin composition may be a thermosetting resin composition or an ionizing radiation curable resin composition. Examples of ionizing radiation-curable resin compositions include ultraviolet-curable resin compositions and electron beam-curable resin compositions. The coating layer 72 may contain a material having releasability such as silicone. The coating layer 72 functions as a release layer 73 by containing the peelable material. However, the production of the coating layer 72 may be omitted and the linear pattern layer 40 may be formed on the resin imprinting layer 80 .
 樹脂賦型層80の凹凸構造81を被覆する被覆層72によれば、樹脂賦型層80の凹凸構造81を転写することによって作製された線状模様層40の凹凸構造41をなだらかにできる。凹凸構造41のなだらかさは、被覆層72の厚み、第1樹脂組成物の粘度、乾燥速度、硬化速度等によって調整され得る。凹凸構造41をなだらかにすることにより、樹脂賦型層80を用いて作製される線状模様層40において、線状要素45によるレンズ効果や導光作用を弱めることができる。凹凸構造41をなだらかにすることにより、樹脂賦型層80を用いて作製される線状模様層40において、線状模様層40への入射光の拡散を促進し、線状模様35をより明瞭にできる。被覆層72の厚みは、樹脂賦型層80の凹凸構造81の高低差の5%以上でもよく、10%以上でもよく、20%以上でも良く、30%以上でもよい。被覆層72の厚みを凹凸構造81の高低差の5%以上とすることにより、線状要素45によるレンズ効果や導光作用を弱めることができる。被覆層72の厚みを凹凸構造81の高低差の5%以上とすることにより、線状模様層40への入射光の拡散を促進し、線状模様35をより明瞭にできる。 According to the coating layer 72 covering the uneven structure 81 of the resin imprint layer 80, the uneven structure 41 of the linear pattern layer 40 produced by transferring the uneven structure 81 of the resin imprint layer 80 can be smoothed. The smoothness of the uneven structure 41 can be adjusted by the thickness of the coating layer 72, the viscosity of the first resin composition, the drying speed, the curing speed, and the like. By smoothing the concave-convex structure 41 , the lens effect and light guiding action of the linear elements 45 can be weakened in the linear pattern layer 40 produced using the resin imprinting layer 80 . By smoothing the concave-convex structure 41, in the linear pattern layer 40 produced using the resin imprinting layer 80, diffusion of incident light to the linear pattern layer 40 is facilitated, and the linear pattern 35 becomes clearer. can be done. The thickness of the coating layer 72 may be 5% or more, 10% or more, 20% or more, or 30% or more of the height difference of the uneven structure 81 of the resin molding layer 80 . By setting the thickness of the coating layer 72 to be 5% or more of the height difference of the uneven structure 81, the lens effect and the light guiding action of the linear elements 45 can be weakened. By setting the thickness of the coating layer 72 to be 5% or more of the height difference of the concave-convex structure 81, the diffusion of incident light to the linear pattern layer 40 can be promoted and the linear pattern 35 can be made clearer.
 次に、図14に示すように、樹脂賦型層80及び被覆層72上に、第2樹脂組成物を供給して、第2樹脂組成物の塗膜を形成する。第2樹脂組成物は、硬化性樹脂組成物でもよい。硬化性樹脂組成物は、熱硬化性樹脂組成物でもよいし、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物でもよい。電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物として、紫外線硬化性樹脂組成物や電子線硬化性樹脂組成物が例示される。硬化性樹脂組成物は、樹脂賦型層80及び被覆層72上で硬化される。硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物により、線状模様層40が作製される。なお、このタイミングにおける硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化処理は、完全な硬化としてもよいし、半硬化でもよい。このタイミングでの効果処理を半硬化とした場合、後のいずれかタイミングで硬化処理を行ってもよい。作製された線状模様層40は、樹脂賦型層80又は被覆層72に接合している。 Next, as shown in FIG. 14, a second resin composition is supplied onto the resin imprinting layer 80 and the coating layer 72 to form a coating film of the second resin composition. The second resin composition may be a curable resin composition. The curable resin composition may be a thermosetting resin composition or an ionizing radiation curable resin composition. Examples of ionizing radiation-curable resin compositions include ultraviolet-curable resin compositions and electron beam-curable resin compositions. The curable resin composition is cured on the resin transfer layer 80 and the coating layer 72 . The linear pattern layer 40 is produced from the cured product of the curable resin composition. The curing treatment of the curable resin composition at this timing may be complete curing or semi-curing. If the effect treatment at this timing is semi-curing, the curing treatment may be performed at any later timing. The produced linear pattern layer 40 is bonded to the resin imprinting layer 80 or the coating layer 72 .
 樹脂賦型層80の凹凸構造81に対応した凹凸構造41が、線状模様層40に付与される。第2線状要素82に対応して、線状模様層40の線状要素45が形成される。第2線状凸部82Aに対応して、線状模様層40の線状凹部45Bが形成される。第2線状凹部82Bに対応して、線状模様層40の線状凸部45Aが形成される。第2単位要素83に対応して、線状模様層40の単位要素48が形成される。第2単位凸部83Aに対応して、線状模様層40の単位凹部48Bが形成される。第2単位凹部83Bに対応して、線状模様層40の単位凸部48Aが形成される。 A concave-convex structure 41 corresponding to the concave-convex structure 81 of the resin molding layer 80 is applied to the linear pattern layer 40 . Linear elements 45 of the linear pattern layer 40 are formed corresponding to the second linear elements 82 . Linear recesses 45B of the linear pattern layer 40 are formed corresponding to the second linear protrusions 82A. Linear protrusions 45A of the linear pattern layer 40 are formed corresponding to the second linear recesses 82B. A unit element 48 of the linear pattern layer 40 is formed corresponding to the second unit element 83 . A unit concave portion 48B of the linear pattern layer 40 is formed corresponding to the second unit convex portion 83A. Unit convex portions 48A of the linear pattern layer 40 are formed corresponding to the second unit concave portions 83B.
 図14に示された例において、硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物によって、ベース部43も形成されている。ベース部43は、線状凸部45Aと一体的に成形されている。ベース部43は、線状凹部45Bが設けられた位置において、二つの線状凸部45Aの間に露出する。ベース部43は、単位凸部48Aと一体的に成形されている。ベース部43は、単位凹部48Bが設けられた位置において、二つの単位凸部48Aの間に露出する。 In the example shown in FIG. 14, the base portion 43 is also formed by the cured product of the curable resin composition. The base portion 43 is formed integrally with the linear convex portion 45A. The base portion 43 is exposed between the two linear convex portions 45A at the position where the linear concave portion 45B is provided. The base portion 43 is formed integrally with the unit convex portion 48A. The base portion 43 is exposed between the two unit convex portions 48A at the position where the unit concave portion 48B is provided.
 線状模様層40は、電子線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を含んでもよい。例えば、第2樹脂組成物は、電子線硬化性樹脂組成物でもよい。電子線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を含む線状模様層40は、耐久性に優れる。したがって、微細な凹凸構造41を含む線状模様層40の表面が、経年使用により、平坦化することを抑制できる。 The linear pattern layer 40 may contain a cured product of an electron beam curable resin composition. For example, the second resin composition may be an electron beam curable resin composition. The linear pattern layer 40 containing the cured product of the electron beam curable resin composition has excellent durability. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the surface of the linear pattern layer 40 including the fine uneven structure 41 from flattening due to long-term use.
 電子線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を含む線状模様層40は、更に耐久性を向上するため、紫外線吸収剤や光安定剤を含んでもよい。例えば、第2樹脂組成物が、電子線硬化性樹脂組成物と、紫外線吸収剤及び光安定剤の少なくとも一方と、を含んでもよい。なお、紫外線硬化性樹脂組成物は、その硬化プロセスに依存して、紫外線吸収剤を含むことができない。したがって、紫外線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を含む線状模様層と異なり、電子線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を含む線状模様層は、紫外線吸収剤を含むことができる。紫外線吸収剤を含む線状模様層40は、更に耐久性を改善して、経年使用時における平坦化を抑制できる。紫外線吸収剤としては、例えば、ベンゾトリアゾール系紫外線吸収剤、ベンゾフェノン系紫外線吸収剤、トリアジン系紫外線吸収剤及びヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン系紫外線吸収剤が挙げられる。光安定剤としては、例えば、ピペリジニルセバケート系光安定剤等のヒンダードアミン系光安定剤が挙げられる。 The linear pattern layer 40 containing the cured product of the electron beam curable resin composition may contain an ultraviolet absorber and a light stabilizer in order to further improve durability. For example, the second resin composition may contain an electron beam-curable resin composition and at least one of an ultraviolet absorber and a light stabilizer. In addition, the ultraviolet curable resin composition cannot contain an ultraviolet absorber depending on its curing process. Therefore, unlike the linear pattern layer containing the cured product of the ultraviolet curable resin composition, the linear pattern layer containing the cured product of the electron beam curable resin composition can contain an ultraviolet absorber. The linear pattern layer 40 containing an ultraviolet absorber can further improve durability and suppress flattening during long-term use. Examples of ultraviolet absorbers include benzotriazole-based ultraviolet absorbers, benzophenone-based ultraviolet absorbers, triazine-based ultraviolet absorbers, and hydroxyphenyltriazine-based ultraviolet absorbers. Examples of light stabilizers include hindered amine light stabilizers such as piperidinyl sebacate light stabilizers.
 その後、図15に示すように、線状模様層40に重ねて接合層62が形成される。接合層62は、線状模様層40上に樹脂組成物を供給して当該樹脂組成物の塗膜を形成し、塗膜を乾燥または硬化することによって、作製されてもよい。続いて、図16に示すように、接合層62に重ねて意匠層60を形成する。意匠層60は、グラビア印刷やスクリーン印刷、インクリボンを用いた熱転写印刷によって形成されてもよい。 After that, as shown in FIG. 15, a bonding layer 62 is formed over the linear pattern layer 40 . The bonding layer 62 may be produced by supplying a resin composition onto the linear pattern layer 40 to form a coating film of the resin composition, and drying or curing the coating film. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16, the design layer 60 is formed over the bonding layer 62 . The design layer 60 may be formed by gravure printing, screen printing, or thermal transfer printing using an ink ribbon.
 以上のようにして、樹脂賦型層80に重ねて加飾シート30が形成される。加飾シート30は、樹脂賦型層80及び被覆層72に接合している。加飾シート30は、樹脂賦型層80とともに、加飾シート積層体25を構成する。図示された例において、加飾シート積層体25は、加飾シート30、被覆層72、樹脂賦型層80及び基材70を、第3方向D3に順に含む。次に、加飾シート30を用いて加飾部材20を作製する。 As described above, the decorative sheet 30 is formed over the resin molding layer 80 . The decorative sheet 30 is bonded to the resin molding layer 80 and the coating layer 72 . The decorative sheet 30 constitutes the decorative sheet laminate 25 together with the resin imprint layer 80 . In the illustrated example, the decorative sheet laminate 25 includes the decorative sheet 30, the coating layer 72, the resin molding layer 80 and the substrate 70 in order in the third direction D3. Next, the decorative member 20 is produced using the decorative sheet 30 .
 図17に示すように、射出成形装置110を準備する。射出成形装置110は成形型111を含む。成形型111は、第1型111A及び第2型111Bを含む。第1型111A及び第2型111Bは、図17に示すように互いから離間でき、図18に示すように互いに接近できる。図17に示すように、第1型111A及び第2型111Bが互いに接触した閉型状態において、第1型111A及び第2型111Bの間にキャビティ112が形成される。成形型111は、キャビティ112に通じるゲート113を有している。ゲート113は、図示しない射出樹脂114の供給装置に接続している。ゲート113を通じてキャビティ112内に、射出樹脂114が供給される。第1型111A及び第2型111Bは、図示しないヒーターによって加熱され、高温に維持されている。 An injection molding device 110 is prepared as shown in FIG. Injection molding apparatus 110 includes mold 111 . Mold 111 includes a first mold 111A and a second mold 111B. The first mold 111A and the second mold 111B can be separated from each other as shown in FIG. 17 and can be close to each other as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, a cavity 112 is formed between the first die 111A and the second die 111B in the closed state in which the first die 111A and the second die 111B are in contact with each other. Mold 111 has a gate 113 leading to cavity 112 . The gate 113 is connected to a supply device for the injection resin 114 (not shown). An injection resin 114 is supplied into the cavity 112 through the gate 113 . The first mold 111A and the second mold 111B are heated by a heater (not shown) and maintained at a high temperature.
 図18に示すように、成形型111内のキャビティ112に加飾シート積層体25を収容する。図示された例において、加飾シート30がキャビティ112内に露出するようにして、加飾シート積層体25を第2型111Bに配置する。次に、図19に示すように、溶融した射出樹脂114が、ゲート113を介して、キャビティ112内に射出される。射出樹脂114は、キャビティ112内で冷却され、加飾シート30に溶着して固化する。固化した射出樹脂114から、加飾シート30に接合した熱可塑性樹脂部64が得られる。熱可塑性樹脂部64の材料は、上述した通りである。 As shown in FIG. 18, the decorative sheet laminate 25 is accommodated in the cavity 112 within the molding die 111 . In the illustrated example, the decorative sheet laminate 25 is arranged in the second mold 111B such that the decorative sheet 30 is exposed in the cavity 112. As shown in FIG. Next, as shown in FIG. 19, molten injection resin 114 is injected into cavity 112 through gate 113 . The injected resin 114 is cooled in the cavity 112, welded to the decorative sheet 30 and solidified. The thermoplastic resin portion 64 joined to the decorative sheet 30 is obtained from the solidified injected resin 114 . The material of the thermoplastic resin portion 64 is as described above.
 その後、図20に示すように、第1型111A及び第2型111Bが互いから離れる。熱可塑性樹脂部64は第1型111Aに接合している。一方、基材70は第2型111Bに固定されていてもよい。この例によれば、図20及び図21に示すように、基材70及び樹脂賦型層80は、第1型111A及び第2型111Bが離れることにともない、加飾シート30から剥される。被覆層72が離型層73として機能することにより、剥離が促進される。 After that, as shown in FIG. 20, the first die 111A and the second die 111B are separated from each other. The thermoplastic resin portion 64 is joined to the first mold 111A. On the other hand, the base material 70 may be fixed to the second mold 111B. According to this example, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the base material 70 and the resin transfer layer 80 are separated from the decorative sheet 30 as the first mold 111A and the second mold 111B are separated. . Peeling is promoted by the coating layer 72 functioning as a release layer 73 .
 以上により、加飾シート30及び加飾部材20が製造される。なお、線状模様層40が半硬化状態で作製されている場合、成形型111から取り出された加飾部材20に対し、線状模様層40の硬化処理を行ってよい。接合層62及び意匠層60の少なくとも一方を形成した後に、線状模様層40の硬化処理を行ってよい。 As described above, the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 are manufactured. When the linear pattern layer 40 is produced in a semi-cured state, the linear pattern layer 40 may be hardened on the decorative member 20 removed from the mold 111 . After forming at least one of the bonding layer 62 and the design layer 60, the linear pattern layer 40 may be cured.
 図17~図20に示された射出成形加工に代えて、図29A~図29Dに示された射出成形加工により、加飾シート積層体25から加飾シート30を作製してもよい。この射出成形加工では、図29Aに示すように、加飾シート積層体25にパターン積層物26を形成する。パターン積層物26は、加飾シート30とは反対側となる加飾シート積層体25の表面に形成される。図示された例において、基材70の表面にパターン積層物26が形成される。パターン積層物26は、印刷、例えばシルク印刷により、作製されてもよい。パターン積層物26は、基材70の表面の一部分のみを覆う。パターン積層物26の厚みは、5μm以上50μm以下としてもよい。以降の工程は、上述した工程と同様としてもよい。すなわち、図29Bに示すように、パターン積層物26を含む加飾シート積層体25を、キャビティ112内に配置してもよい。図29Cに示すように、射出樹脂114がキャビティ112内に射出されてもよい。この例において、射出樹脂114から加飾シート30に接合した熱可塑性樹脂部64が作製される。図29Dに示すように、第1型111A及び第2型111Bが離れることにより、加飾シート積層体25から加飾シート30が剥がれ、加飾シート30及び熱可塑性樹脂部64を含む加飾部材20が得られる。 Instead of the injection molding process shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the decorative sheet 30 may be produced from the decorative sheet laminate 25 by the injection molding process shown in FIGS. 29A to 29D. In this injection molding process, a pattern laminate 26 is formed on the decorative sheet laminate 25 as shown in FIG. 29A. The pattern laminate 26 is formed on the surface of the decorative sheet laminate 25 opposite to the decorative sheet 30 . In the illustrated example, patterned laminate 26 is formed on the surface of substrate 70 . The pattern laminate 26 may be made by printing, eg silk printing. Pattern laminate 26 covers only a portion of the surface of substrate 70 . The thickness of the pattern laminate 26 may be 5 μm or more and 50 μm or less. Subsequent steps may be the same as the steps described above. That is, as shown in FIG. 29B, the decorative sheet laminate 25 including the pattern laminate 26 may be arranged in the cavity 112. As shown in FIG. Injected resin 114 may be injected into cavity 112, as shown in FIG. 29C. In this example, the thermoplastic resin portion 64 joined to the decorative sheet 30 is produced from the injection resin 114 . As shown in FIG. 29D, the separation of the first die 111A and the second die 111B separates the decorative sheet 30 from the decorative sheet laminate 25, and the decorative member including the decorative sheet 30 and the thermoplastic resin portion 64 is removed. 20 is obtained.
 図29Cに示すように、射出樹脂114がキャビティ112内に射出されると、射出樹脂114によって加飾シート積層体25が第2型111Bに向けて押し付けられる。これにより、加飾シート積層体25のパターン積層物26が設けられた面が第2型111Bに沿って平坦化し、パターン積層物26のパターンに対応した凹凸が、加飾シート30に形成される。パターン積層物26のパターンに対応した凹凸を含む加飾シート30に、熱可塑性樹脂部64が接合する。図29Dに示すように、得られた加飾部材20の線状模様層40には、パターン積層物26に対応したパターンで凹部27が形成される。すなわち、加飾部材20は、凹部27による大きな凹凸と、線状模様層40による微細な凹凸と、の二種類の凹凸を表現できる。すなわち、加飾シート30は、繊細かつ複雑な意匠を表現できる。 As shown in FIG. 29C, when the injection resin 114 is injected into the cavity 112, the injection resin 114 presses the decorative sheet laminate 25 toward the second mold 111B. As a result, the surface of the decorative sheet laminate 25 on which the pattern laminate 26 is provided is flattened along the second die 111B, and unevenness corresponding to the pattern of the pattern laminate 26 is formed on the decorative sheet 30. . The thermoplastic resin portion 64 is joined to the decorative sheet 30 including unevenness corresponding to the pattern of the pattern laminate 26 . As shown in FIG. 29D , concave portions 27 are formed in a pattern corresponding to the pattern laminate 26 in the linear pattern layer 40 of the obtained decorative member 20 . In other words, the decorative member 20 can express two types of unevenness: large unevenness due to the concave portions 27 and fine unevenness due to the linear pattern layer 40 . That is, the decorative sheet 30 can express a delicate and complicated design.
 凹部27の深さは、5μm以上でもよく、10μm以上でもよく、20μm以上でもよい。凹部27の深さは、50μm以下でもよく、40μm以下でもよく、30μm以下でもよい。凹部27の深さは、線状模様層40での線状要素45による凹凸高低差の2倍以上でもよく、3倍以上でもよく、4倍以上でもよい。凹部27の深さは、線状模様層40での線状要素45による凹凸高低差の10倍以下でもよく、8倍以下でもよく、6倍以下でもよい。 The depth of the concave portion 27 may be 5 μm or more, 10 μm or more, or 20 μm or more. The depth of the concave portion 27 may be 50 μm or less, 40 μm or less, or 30 μm or less. The depth of the concave portions 27 may be two times or more, three times or more, or four times or more the height difference of the unevenness caused by the linear elements 45 in the linear pattern layer 40 . The depth of the recesses 27 may be 10 times or less, 8 times or less, or 6 times or less the height difference of the unevenness caused by the linear elements 45 in the linear pattern layer 40 .
 線状要素45の配列方向に沿った凹部27のピッチは、20μm以上でもよく、50μm以上でもよく、100μm以上でもよい。線状要素45の配列方向に沿った凹部27のピッチは、3000μm以下でもよく、1000μm以下でもよく、300μm以下でもよい。線状要素45の配列方向に沿った凹部27のピッチは、当該配列方向への線状要素45の配列ピッチの2倍以上でもよく、3倍以上でもよく、5倍以上でもよい。線状要素45の配列方向に沿った凹部27のピッチは、当該配列方向への線状要素45の配列ピッチの10倍以下でもよく、8倍以下でもよく、6倍以下でもよい。 The pitch of the concave portions 27 along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 20 μm or more, 50 μm or more, or 100 μm or more. The pitch of the concave portions 27 along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 3000 μm or less, 1000 μm or less, or 300 μm or less. The pitch of the concave portions 27 along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be twice or more, three times or more, or five times or more the arrangement pitch of the linear elements 45 in the arrangement direction. The pitch of the concave portions 27 along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 10 times or less, 8 times or less, or 6 times or less than the arrangement pitch of the linear elements 45 in the arrangement direction.
 図示された表示システム10、加飾部材20、及び加飾シート30の作用について説明する。 The actions of the illustrated display system 10, decorative member 20, and decorative sheet 30 will be described.
 光源装置12又は表示装置16が非動作状態にある場合、図3に示すように、光源装置12又は表示装置16を覆う加飾部材20が観察される。加飾部材20の加飾シート30は、線状模様35を表示する線状模様層40を含んでいる。加飾部材20の加飾シート30は、絵柄や色彩等の意匠を表示する意匠層60を含んでいる。意匠層60の意匠は、線状模様層40を介して観察される。観察者は、線状模様層40の線状模様35と、意匠層60の意匠とを重ねて観察する。例えば意匠層60による暗色とともに、線状模様層40による線状模様35が、観察される。図3に示された例において、加飾シート30は、金属板をヘアライン加工及び着色処理して作製されたヘアライン模様を模した線状模様を表示する。図5Aに示された例において、加飾シート30は、金属板をスピン加工及び着色処理して作製されたスピン模様を模した線状模様を表示する。 When the light source device 12 or the display device 16 is in a non-operating state, the decorative member 20 covering the light source device 12 or the display device 16 is observed as shown in FIG. The decorative sheet 30 of the decorative member 20 includes a linear pattern layer 40 displaying the linear pattern 35. As shown in FIG. The decorative sheet 30 of the decorative member 20 includes a design layer 60 that displays designs such as patterns and colors. The design of the design layer 60 is observed through the linear pattern layer 40 . The observer observes the linear pattern 35 of the linear pattern layer 40 and the design of the design layer 60 overlapping each other. For example, along with the dark color due to the design layer 60, the linear pattern 35 due to the linear pattern layer 40 is observed. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the decorative sheet 30 displays a linear pattern imitating a hairline pattern produced by subjecting a metal plate to hairline processing and coloring. In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the decorative sheet 30 displays a linear pattern imitating a spin pattern produced by spinning and coloring a metal plate.
 図5Bに示された例において、加飾シート30は、木目模様を模した線状要素を表示する。図5C及び図5Dに示された例において、加飾シート30は、織物模様を模した線状要素を表示する。図5Cに示された例において、加飾シート30は、布模様の一例としての、デニム柄を表示する。図5Dに示された例において、加飾シート30は、カーボン柄を表示する。加飾部材20及び加飾シート30は、意匠性が重視される自動車の内装、建物の内装、家具、家電製品等に適用され得る。 In the example shown in FIG. 5B, the decorative sheet 30 displays linear elements imitating a wood grain pattern. In the example shown in FIGS. 5C and 5D, the decorative sheet 30 displays linear elements imitating a textile pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 5C, the decorative sheet 30 displays a denim pattern as an example of a cloth pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 5D, the decorative sheet 30 displays a carbon pattern. The decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 can be applied to automobile interiors, building interiors, furniture, home electric appliances, and the like, where design is important.
 光源装置12又は表示装置16は、非動作状態において、線状模様を表示する加飾シート30によって隠蔽され得る。加飾シート30を含む表示システム10は、意匠性が重視される自動車の内装、建物の内装、家具、家電製品等に適用され得る。 The light source device 12 or the display device 16 can be hidden by a decorative sheet 30 displaying a linear pattern in a non-operating state. The display system 10 including the decorative sheet 30 can be applied to interiors of automobiles, interiors of buildings, furniture, home electric appliances, etc., where design is important.
 光源装置12が動作状態において点灯すると、発光面12aから光が放出される。発光面12aから放出された光は、加飾部材20に入射する。加飾部材20は、遮光パターンシート66を含んでいる。遮光パターンシート66の遮光領域66aは、光源装置12からの光を遮光する。透過領域66bは、光源装置12からの光を透過させる。光源装置12及び遮光パターンシート66の組合せにより、透過領域66bの形状に対応した形状を有する画像100が形成される。この画像を形成する画像光は、加飾シート30を透過する。表示システム10から放出された画像光によって、画像100が観察される。図4に示す例において、表示システム10は、十字、三角形および四角形のマークを画像100として表示する。 When the light source device 12 is turned on in the operating state, light is emitted from the light emitting surface 12a. Light emitted from the light emitting surface 12 a enters the decorative member 20 . The decorative member 20 includes a light shielding pattern sheet 66. As shown in FIG. The light shielding area 66 a of the light shielding pattern sheet 66 shields the light from the light source device 12 . The transmissive region 66b allows the light from the light source device 12 to pass therethrough. The combination of the light source device 12 and the light shielding pattern sheet 66 forms an image 100 having a shape corresponding to the shape of the transmissive area 66b. Image light forming this image passes through the decorative sheet 30 . An image 100 is viewed by image light emitted from the display system 10 . In the example shown in FIG. 4, display system 10 displays cross, triangle and square marks as image 100 .
 図25及び図26に示された表示システム10では、光源装置12を含む表示装置16によって画像光が形成される。表示面16aから放出した画像光が、加飾シート30を透過する。これにより、表示システム10は、観察者によって観察される画像を表示する。 In the display system 10 shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the display device 16 including the light source device 12 forms image light. Image light emitted from the display surface 16 a passes through the decorative sheet 30 . Thereby, the display system 10 displays the image observed by the observer.
 これまで、金属板によって形成されたヘアライン模様やスピン模様の質感を、樹脂製の加飾シートによって表現することが検討されてきた。特許文献1(特開2010-52353号公報)や特許文献2(特開2008-89479号公報)で提案されているように、従来の加飾シートは、線状凸部または線状凹部によって構成された線状要素を含んでいる。線状要素は、その長手方向と直交する方向に配列されている。線状要素は、エンボス加工等の樹脂賦型によって、作製され得る。 Until now, studies have been conducted to express the texture of hairline patterns and spin patterns formed by metal plates using decorative resin sheets. As proposed in Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2010-52353) and Patent Document 2 (JP-A-2008-89479), conventional decorative sheets are composed of linear projections or linear recesses. contains a linear element with The linear elements are arranged in a direction perpendicular to their longitudinal direction. Linear elements can be made by resin molding such as embossing.
 しかしながら、このような従来の加飾シートを介して画像を観察する際、画像の輪郭に滲み101が生じ、画像100の輪郭が明瞭でなくなるといった不具合が生じた。図45に示すように、滲み101は、画像100が表示されるべき領域の外方まで、光が漏れてうっすら明るくなる現象である。図45に示された例において、表示すべき画像100は正方形形状である。図45に示された例において、滲み101は、画像100の周囲に生じている。すなわち、滲み101は、線状要素45の配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に画像100と隣接する領域に生じている。滲み101は、線状要素45の長手方向(図示された例において、第1方向D1)に画像100と隣接する領域にも生じている。滲み101が生じると、画像の輪郭が不明瞭となり、画像がぼける。従来の加飾シートは、シャープな画像を表示できない。 However, when an image is observed through such a conventional decorative sheet, blurring 101 occurs in the contour of the image, and the contour of the image 100 becomes unclear. As shown in FIG. 45, bleeding 101 is a phenomenon in which light leaks to the outside of the area where the image 100 is to be displayed, making the area slightly brighter. In the example shown in Figure 45, the image 100 to be displayed is square shaped. In the example shown in FIG. 45, blurring 101 occurs around image 100 . That is, the bleeding 101 occurs in a region adjacent to the image 100 in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). Bleeding 101 also occurs in a region adjacent to image 100 in the longitudinal direction of linear element 45 (first direction D1 in the illustrated example). When bleeding 101 occurs, the outline of the image becomes unclear and the image becomes blurred. Conventional decorative sheets cannot display sharp images.
 本件発明者等が鋭意検討を重ねたところ、次の事項が滲み101の発生要因の一つであると推定された。従来の加飾シートにおいて、線状要素は、加飾シートの法線方向に切り立った側壁を有する。樹脂賦型により作製された加飾シートでは、側壁の外輪郭は、僅かに傾斜し且つ曲面状となる。この結果、側壁は、当該側壁を介して線状要素から放出される光に対し、レンズ効果を及ぼし得る。側壁でのレンズ効果によって、線状要素から配列方向へ出射する光が或る程度集光され、画像100に対して線状要素の配列方向に広がる滲み101として観察され得ると推察された。 As a result of extensive studies by the inventors, it was estimated that the following matter is one of the causes of bleeding 101. In the conventional decorative sheet, the linear elements have steep side walls in the normal direction of the decorative sheet. In the decorative sheet produced by resin molding, the outer contour of the side wall is slightly inclined and curved. As a result, the sidewalls can exert a lens effect on the light emitted from the linear element through the sidewalls. It was presumed that the light emitted from the linear elements in the arrangement direction is condensed to some extent by the lens effect on the side wall, and can be observed as blurring 101 spreading in the arrangement direction of the linear elements with respect to the image 100 .
 各線状要素は配列方向に対面する一対の側壁を含む。側壁が法線方向に立ち上がっていると、線状要素内を進む光は、側壁において反射、とりわけ全反射を、繰り返し得る。このようにして、画像光が、線状要素の長手方向に線状要素内を進む。線状要素での導光作用によって、線状要素に沿って画像光が広がり、画像100に対して線状要素の長手方向に広がる滲み101として観察され得ると推察された。 Each linear element includes a pair of side walls that face each other in the arrangement direction. If the sidewalls rise in the normal direction, the light traveling through the linear element can repeatedly reflect, especially total internal reflection, at the sidewalls. In this way, the image light travels through the linear element in the longitudinal direction of the linear element. It was speculated that the image light spreads along the linear element due to the light guide action in the linear element, and can be observed as blurring 101 that spreads in the longitudinal direction of the linear element with respect to the image 100 .
 第1の実施の形態の加飾シート30において、線状模様層40は、複数の線状要素45を含む。複数の線状要素45は、配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)である一方向に配列されている。各線状要素45は、配列方向に直交する長手方向(図示された例において、第1方向D1)である他方向に細長く延びる。線状要素45は、二次元配列された単位要素48を含む。単位要素48は、単位凸部48A又は単位凹部48Bである。複数の単位要素48の集合である線状要素45は、その平均高さに応じて、線状凸部45A又は線状凹部45Bとなる。 In the decorative sheet 30 of the first embodiment, the linear pattern layer 40 includes multiple linear elements 45 . The plurality of linear elements 45 are arranged in one direction, which is the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). Each linear element 45 elongates in the other direction, which is the longitudinal direction (the first direction D1 in the illustrated example) perpendicular to the arrangement direction. The linear element 45 includes unit elements 48 arranged two-dimensionally. The unit element 48 is a unit convex portion 48A or a unit concave portion 48B. A linear element 45, which is an assembly of a plurality of unit elements 48, becomes a linear convex portion 45A or a linear concave portion 45B depending on its average height.
 第1の実施の形態によれば、線状要素45は、その長手方向に長く延び且つその配列方向を向く側壁を含まない。細長い側壁は、画像光にレンズ効果を及ぼし得る。第1の実施の形態によれば、配列方向を向く側壁42Bは、単位要素48の二次元配列に応じて、各線状要素45内において二つの方向に分散している。換言すると、配列方向を向く側壁42Bは、線状要素45が位置する線状領域46内に分散している。したがって、線状要素45が画像光を集光して線状要素45の配列方向に誘導することが抑制される。すなわち、画像光に対する線状要素45の側壁でのレンズ効果が弱められる。これにより、線状要素45の配列方向に画像100から広がる滲み101の発生を抑制できる。線状要素45の配列方向を向く画像100の輪郭を明瞭にできる。 According to the first embodiment, the linear elements 45 do not include sidewalls extending in the longitudinal direction and facing the arrangement direction. The elongated sidewalls can have a lens effect on the image light. According to the first embodiment, the side walls 42B facing the arrangement direction are dispersed in two directions within each linear element 45 according to the two-dimensional arrangement of the unit elements 48. FIG. In other words, the sidewalls 42B facing the arrangement direction are dispersed within the linear regions 46 where the linear elements 45 are located. Therefore, the linear elements 45 are prevented from condensing the image light and guiding it in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . That is, the lens effect on the side wall of the linear element 45 with respect to the image light is weakened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bleeding 101 that spreads from the image 100 in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . The outline of the image 100 facing the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 can be made clear.
 第1の実施の形態によれば、線状要素45は、その長手方向に長く延び且つその配列方向を向く側壁を含まない。すなわち、線状要素45は、画像光に導光作用を及ぼし得る一対の側壁を含まない。線状要素45の配列方向を向く側壁42Bは、単位要素48の二次元配列に応じて、各線状要素45内において二つの方向に分散している。同様に、線状要素45の長手方向を向く側壁42Aは、単位要素48の二次元配列に応じて、各線状要素45内において二つの方向に分散している。換言すると、長手方向を向く側壁42Aは、配列方向を向く側壁42Bと同様に、線状要素45が位置する線状領域46内に分散している。これにより、線状要素45による導光作用を弱めることができる。また、線状要素45は、その長手方向における中間部に、言い換えるとその長手方向における両端以外に、長手方向に非平行な側壁42Aを含んでいる。この側壁42Aによって、線状要素45による導光作用が規制される。このように、一対の側壁間で反射を繰り返すことに起因した線状要素45での導光作用が弱められる。これにより、線状要素45の長手方向に画像100から広がる滲み101の発生を抑制できる。線状要素45の長手方向を向く画像100の輪郭を明瞭にできる。 According to the first embodiment, the linear elements 45 do not include sidewalls extending in the longitudinal direction and facing the arrangement direction. That is, the linear element 45 does not include a pair of side walls that can guide image light. The side walls 42B facing the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 are dispersed in two directions within each linear element 45 according to the two-dimensional arrangement of the unit elements 48 . Similarly, the side walls 42A facing the longitudinal direction of the linear elements 45 are distributed in two directions within each linear element 45 according to the two-dimensional arrangement of the unit elements 48. FIG. In other words, the side walls 42A facing the longitudinal direction are distributed within the linear regions 46 where the linear elements 45 are located, as are the side walls 42B facing the arrangement direction. Thereby, the light guiding action by the linear element 45 can be weakened. In addition, the linear element 45 includes side walls 42A non-parallel to the longitudinal direction at the intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction, in other words, other than at both ends in the longitudinal direction. The side wall 42A regulates the light guiding action of the linear element 45. As shown in FIG. In this way, the light guiding action of the linear element 45 due to repeated reflection between the pair of side walls is weakened. This can suppress the occurrence of blurring 101 spreading from the image 100 in the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 . The outline of the image 100 facing the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 can be clarified.
 単位要素48の配列方向に沿った断面において特定される壁部傾斜角度θ1,θ2(図8参照)は、66°以上でもよく、73°以上でもよく、76°以上でもよく、図7A及び図7Bに示す例のように90°でもよい。このような角度設定によれば、線状要素45による導光を有効に制限して、線状要素45の長手方向に生じる画像100の滲み101を効果的に抑制できる。 The wall inclination angles θ1 and θ2 (see FIG. 8) specified in the cross section along the arrangement direction of the unit elements 48 may be 66° or more, 73° or more, or 76° or more. It may be 90° as in the example shown in 7B. By setting the angle in this way, it is possible to effectively limit the light guide by the linear elements 45 and effectively suppress the bleeding 101 of the image 100 that occurs in the longitudinal direction of the linear elements 45 .
 以上により、第1の実施の形態による加飾シート30によれば、光源装置12又は表示装置16の動作状態において、画像の輪郭が滲むことを抑制できる。これにより、画像の輪郭が明瞭となり、画像の輪郭のぼけを抑制できる。表示システム10はシャープな画像を表示できる。 As described above, according to the decorative sheet 30 according to the first embodiment, blurring of the outline of the image can be suppressed in the operating state of the light source device 12 or the display device 16 . As a result, the outline of the image becomes clear, and blurring of the outline of the image can be suppressed. Display system 10 is capable of displaying sharp images.
 またそもそも、線状凸部または線状凹部によって構成された線状要素を含む従来の加飾シートでは、線状模様を十分明瞭に表示できなかった。従来の加飾シートは、線状模様を認識しにくいといった不具合を有していた。線状凸部または線状凹部によって構成された線状要素は、反射指向性を有する。従来の加飾シートの線状模様は、特定の方向から当該線状模様に入射した光が観察者に向けて反射することにより、観察者によって観察される。したがって、特定の方向から当該線状模様に入射して観察者へ向かう光の光量が少なければ、観察者は線状模様を明瞭に観察できない。すなわち、観察角度や、外部光源の配置等による環境条件や、観察角度等に依存して、線状模様を明瞭に観察できない。従来の加飾シートは、反射が不十分となることから、金属光沢も表現できない。結果として、従来の加飾シートは、金属板を用いたヘアライン模様やスピン模様等の線状模様の質感を十分に再現できない。 Also, in the first place, conventional decorative sheets containing linear elements composed of linear projections or linear recesses could not display linear patterns sufficiently clearly. Conventional decorative sheets have a problem that linear patterns are difficult to recognize. A linear element composed of linear protrusions or linear recesses has reflection directivity. A linear pattern of a conventional decorative sheet is observed by an observer by reflecting light incident on the linear pattern from a specific direction toward the observer. Therefore, if the amount of light incident on the linear pattern from a specific direction and directed toward the observer is small, the observer cannot clearly observe the linear pattern. That is, the linear pattern cannot be clearly observed depending on the observation angle, the environmental conditions such as the arrangement of the external light source, the observation angle, and the like. Conventional decorative sheets cannot express metallic luster because reflection is insufficient. As a result, conventional decorative sheets cannot sufficiently reproduce the texture of linear patterns such as hairline patterns and spin patterns using metal plates.
 一方、第1の実施の形態の加飾シート30によれば、線状模様層40は複数の線状要素45を含む。各線状要素45は、線状領域46に配置されている。各線状領域46は、細長く延びる領域である。各線状要素45も、細長く延びる。この線状要素45は単位要素48を含む。各単位要素48は、単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bのいずれかである。配列方向である一方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素45の間で、単位凹部48Bの配置割合は異なっていてもよい。この単位凹部48Bの配置割合の相違により、各線状要素45は、隣り合う他の線状要素45から識別可能となり、観察者によって線状要素45として認識され得る。配列方向である一方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素45の間で、長手方向に沿った線状要素45の十点平均粗さRzは異なっていてもよい。この線状要素45のRzの相違により、各線状要素45は、隣り合う他の線状要素45から識別可能となり、観察者によって線状要素45として認識され得る。このように線状要素45が識別されることによって、線状模様35が観察され得る。 On the other hand, according to the decorative sheet 30 of the first embodiment, the linear pattern layer 40 includes multiple linear elements 45 . Each linear element 45 is arranged in a linear region 46 . Each linear region 46 is an elongated region. Each linear element 45 also elongates. This linear element 45 includes unit elements 48 . Each unit element 48 is either a unit convex portion 48A or a unit concave portion 48B. The arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B may be different between two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in one direction, which is the arrangement direction. Due to the difference in arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B, each linear element 45 can be distinguished from other adjacent linear elements 45 and can be recognized as the linear element 45 by the observer. The ten-point average roughness Rz of the linear elements 45 along the longitudinal direction may be different between two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in one direction, which is the arrangement direction. Due to the difference in Rz of the linear elements 45, each linear element 45 can be distinguished from other adjacent linear elements 45 and can be recognized as the linear elements 45 by the observer. By identifying the linear elements 45 in this way, the linear pattern 35 can be observed.
 そして、第1の実施の形態によれば、線状要素45内において、単位要素48は二次元配列されている。換言すると、線状領域46内において、単位領域49は二次元配列されている。線状要素45は、その長手方向に分散した側壁42を含む。線状要素45は、その配列方向に分散した側壁42を含む。したがって、種々の方向から加飾シート30に入射した光が、観察者に向けて線状模様層40で反射し得る。観察者は、種々の方向から加飾シート30に入射する環境光を利用して、線状模様層40の線状模様35を観察できる。したがって、外部光源等に依存した環境光の入射方向によらず、すなわち環境条件によらず、線状模様層40の線状模様35が明るく明瞭に観察され得る。同様に、加飾シート30に入射する環境光は種々の方向に反射される。したがって、観察位置によらず、線状模様層40の線状模様35が明るく明瞭に観察され得る。この結果、樹脂を用いた線状模様層40が、優れた光沢感を有し、加飾シート30は金属の質感を十分に表現できる。 Then, according to the first embodiment, the unit elements 48 are arranged two-dimensionally within the linear element 45 . In other words, the unit regions 49 are arranged two-dimensionally within the linear region 46 . Linear element 45 includes sidewalls 42 distributed along its length. The linear elements 45 include sidewalls 42 dispersed in the direction of their arrangement. Therefore, light incident on the decorative sheet 30 from various directions can be reflected by the linear pattern layer 40 toward the viewer. An observer can observe the linear patterns 35 of the linear pattern layer 40 by using ambient light incident on the decorative sheet 30 from various directions. Therefore, the linear pattern 35 of the linear pattern layer 40 can be brightly and clearly observed regardless of the incident direction of the ambient light depending on the external light source or the like, that is, regardless of the environmental conditions. Similarly, ambient light incident on the decorative sheet 30 is reflected in various directions. Therefore, the linear pattern 35 of the linear pattern layer 40 can be observed brightly and clearly regardless of the viewing position. As a result, the linear pattern layer 40 using resin has an excellent glossy feeling, and the decorative sheet 30 can sufficiently express the metallic texture.
 上述した具体例において、単位要素48の最大長さは、1μm以上でもよく、2μm以上でもよく、4μm以上でもよい。単位要素48の最大長さは、200μm以下でもよく、100μm以下でもよく、50μm以下でもよい。単位要素48の最大長さは、第3方向D3への投影した際に最大となる長さである。 In the specific example described above, the maximum length of the unit element 48 may be 1 μm or longer, 2 μm or longer, or 4 μm or longer. The maximum length of the unit element 48 may be 200 μm or less, 100 μm or less, or 50 μm or less. The maximum length of the unit element 48 is the maximum length when projected in the third direction D3.
 なお、滲み101を抑制する観点や、線状模様35が明瞭に観察されるようにする観点から、単位要素48によって形成される側壁42を、加飾シート30の法線方向に対して傾斜させてもよい。壁部傾斜角度θ1,θ2(図8参照)は、66°以上でもよく、73°以上でもよく、76°以上でもよい。 From the viewpoint of suppressing bleeding 101 and making the linear pattern 35 clearly observable, the side walls 42 formed by the unit elements 48 are inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30. may The wall portion inclination angles θ1 and θ2 (see FIG. 8) may be 66° or more, 73° or more, or 76° or more.
 図22に示された例において、線状要素45の単位要素48は、点線で示された断面矩形状の単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bを面取りした形状を有している。図22に示された線状要素45の単位要素48は、なだらかに湾曲した単位凸部48A又は単位凹部48Bとなっている。図22に示された線状模様層40は、上述した製造方法において被覆層72を設けた樹脂賦型層80を用いた樹脂賦型によって、作製され得る。また、側壁42が法線方向に対してなす角度は、被覆層72の厚みによって調節可能である。図22に示すように、単位要素48によって形成される側壁42を、加飾シート30の法線方向に対して傾斜させることによれば、線状要素によるレンズ効果や導光作用を弱めることができる。また、単位要素48によって形成される側壁42を、加飾シート30の法線方向に対して傾斜させることによれば、線状要素45での反射光が種々の方向に向けられ、線状模様35は明瞭に観察され得る。 In the example shown in FIG. 22, the unit element 48 of the linear element 45 has a shape obtained by chamfering a unit convex portion 48A and a unit concave portion 48B having a rectangular cross section indicated by dotted lines. A unit element 48 of the linear element 45 shown in FIG. 22 is a gently curved unit convex portion 48A or unit concave portion 48B. The linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 22 can be produced by resin molding using the resin molding layer 80 provided with the coating layer 72 in the manufacturing method described above. Also, the angle formed by the side walls 42 with respect to the normal direction can be adjusted by the thickness of the coating layer 72 . As shown in FIG. 22, by inclining the side walls 42 formed by the unit elements 48 with respect to the normal line direction of the decorative sheet 30, the lens effect and light guiding action of the linear elements can be weakened. can. In addition, by inclining the side wall 42 formed by the unit elements 48 with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30, the light reflected by the linear elements 45 is directed in various directions, and the linear pattern is formed. 35 can be clearly observed.
 滲み101を抑制する観点や、線状模様35が明瞭に観察されるようにする観点から、線状模様層40の表面に微細な凹凸を形成してもよい。図23は、線状模様層40の表面を粗面化して、微細な凹凸を付与した例を示している。図23に示された線状模様層40は、図22に示された線状模様層40と同様に、点線で示された断面矩形状の単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bをなだらかにした形状を有している。さらに、図23に示された線状模様層40は、表面に微細な凹凸を有している。ただし、微細な凹凸は、点線で示された断面矩形状の単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bに付与してもよい。微細な凹凸のピッチは、単位要素48の配列ピッチよりも短くてもよい。微細な凹凸は、線状要素45の配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に配列されている。微細な凹凸は、線状要素45の長手方向(図示された例において、第1方向D1)に配列されてもよい。微細な凹凸の高低差は、単位要素48の高低差よりも小さくてもよい。図23に示された微細な凹凸は、上述した製造方法において、版90をブラスト処理することによって、作製され得る。微細な凹凸の程度は、ブラスト処理に用いられる研磨材の種類、大きさ、形状や、研磨材の噴射条件等によって、調整可能である。図23に示すように、線状要素45の表面に微細な凹凸を付与することによれば、線状要素によるレンズ効果や導光作用を効果的に弱めることができる。線状要素45の表面に微細な凹凸を付与することによれば、線状要素45での反射光が種々の方向に向けられ、線状模様35は明瞭に観察され得る。 From the viewpoint of suppressing bleeding 101 and making the linear pattern 35 clearly visible, the surface of the linear pattern layer 40 may be formed with fine unevenness. FIG. 23 shows an example in which the surface of the linear pattern layer 40 is roughened to provide fine unevenness. In the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 23, similarly to the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 22, the cross-sectional rectangular unit convex portions 48A and unit concave portions 48B indicated by the dotted lines are made smooth. have. Furthermore, the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 23 has fine irregularities on its surface. However, fine irregularities may be provided to the unit convex portions 48A and the unit concave portions 48B having rectangular cross-sections indicated by dotted lines. The pitch of fine unevenness may be shorter than the arrangement pitch of the unit elements 48 . The fine unevenness is arranged in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). The fine unevenness may be arranged in the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 (the first direction D1 in the illustrated example). The height difference of fine unevenness may be smaller than the height difference of the unit elements 48 . The fine unevenness shown in FIG. 23 can be produced by blasting the plate 90 in the manufacturing method described above. The degree of fine unevenness can be adjusted by the type, size, and shape of the abrasive used in the blasting process, the ejection conditions of the abrasive, and the like. As shown in FIG. 23, by providing fine unevenness to the surface of the linear element 45, the lens effect and light guiding action of the linear element can be effectively weakened. By providing fine unevenness to the surface of the linear elements 45, the reflected light from the linear elements 45 is directed in various directions, and the linear pattern 35 can be clearly observed.
 単位要素48の最大長さに下限を設定することにより、環境光が効率的に拡散反射され、線状模様35を明瞭に表示できる。これにより、樹脂を用いた線状模様層40は、優れた光沢感を有し、金属の質感に類似した質感を表現できる。単位要素48、単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bの最大長さは、1μm以上でもよく、2μm以上でもよく、4μm以上でもよく、6μm以上でもよい。 By setting a lower limit to the maximum length of the unit element 48, ambient light is efficiently diffusely reflected, and the linear pattern 35 can be clearly displayed. As a result, the linear pattern layer 40 using the resin has excellent gloss and can express a texture similar to that of metal. The maximum length of the unit element 48, the unit convex portion 48A, and the unit concave portion 48B may be 1 μm or longer, 2 μm or longer, 4 μm or longer, or 6 μm or longer.
 単位要素48の最大長さに上限を設定することにより、個々の単位要素48が観察されることを抑制して、線状要素が連続した線として観察される。また、単位要素48の最大長さに上限を設定することにより、線状要素45による導光作用やレンズ効果を効果的に抑制して、画像の輪郭が滲むことを効果的に抑制できる。単位凸部48A又は単位凹部48Bの最大長さに上限を設定することにより、個々の単位凸部48A又は単位凹部48Bが観察されることを抑制できる。単位要素48、単位凸部48A及び単位凹部48Bの最大長さは、50μm以下でもよく、40μm以下でもよく、30μm以下でもよく、25μm以下でもよい。 By setting an upper limit to the maximum length of the unit elements 48, observation of individual unit elements 48 is suppressed, and linear elements are observed as a continuous line. Further, by setting an upper limit to the maximum length of the unit elements 48, it is possible to effectively suppress the light guide action and lens effect of the linear elements 45, and effectively suppress blurring of the outline of the image. By setting an upper limit to the maximum length of the unit convex portion 48A or the unit concave portion 48B, it is possible to suppress the individual unit convex portion 48A or the unit concave portion 48B from being observed. The maximum length of the unit element 48, the unit convex portion 48A and the unit concave portion 48B may be 50 μm or less, 40 μm or less, 30 μm or less, or 25 μm or less.
 上述した具体例において、単位要素48によって構成される凹凸構造41の高低差は、0.3μm以上でもよく、0.5μm以上でもよく、1μm以上でもよい。単位要素48によって構成される凹凸構造41の高低差は、0.20μm以下でもよく、10μm以下でもよく、5μm以下でもよい。凹凸構造41の高低差は、第3方向D3に沿った最高位置と最低位置との差である。凹凸構造41の高低差に下限を設定することにより、環境光が効率的に拡散反射され、線状模様35を明瞭に表示できる。これにより、樹脂を用いた線状模様層40が、優れた光沢感を有し、金属の質感を類似した質感を表現できる。凹凸構造41の高低差に上限を設定することにより、個々の単位要素48が観察されることを抑制できる。 In the specific example described above, the height difference of the uneven structure 41 formed by the unit elements 48 may be 0.3 μm or more, 0.5 μm or more, or 1 μm or more. The height difference of the uneven structure 41 formed by the unit elements 48 may be 0.20 μm or less, 10 μm or less, or 5 μm or less. The height difference of the uneven structure 41 is the difference between the highest position and the lowest position along the third direction D3. By setting a lower limit for the height difference of the uneven structure 41, ambient light is diffusely reflected efficiently, and the linear pattern 35 can be clearly displayed. As a result, the linear pattern layer 40 using the resin has excellent glossiness and can express a texture similar to that of metal. By setting an upper limit for the height difference of the uneven structure 41, it is possible to suppress the individual unit elements 48 from being observed.
 以上に説明してきた第1の実施の形態において、加飾シート30は線状模様層40を含む。線状模様層40は複数の線状要素45を含む。加飾シート30の全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である。各線状要素45は二次元配列された単位要素48を含む。二次元配列された単位要素48によれば、線状要素45による導光作用やレンズ効果を抑制できる。画像100の輪郭が滲むことを抑制できる。したがって、加飾シート30を用いることによって、シャープな画像を表示できる。 In the first embodiment described above, the decorative sheet 30 includes the linear pattern layer 40. Linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 . The total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30 is 5% or more and 90% or less. Each linear element 45 includes unit elements 48 arranged two-dimensionally. The two-dimensionally arranged unit elements 48 can suppress the light guiding action and lens effect of the linear elements 45 . It is possible to suppress blurring of the contour of the image 100 . Therefore, by using the decorative sheet 30, a sharp image can be displayed.
 以上に説明してきた第1の実施の形態において、加飾シート30は線状模様層40を含む。線状模様層40は複数の線状要素45を含む。加飾シート30の全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である。線状要素45は、その長手方向における中間部に、長手方向に非平行な側壁42A、換言すると長手方向を向く側壁42Aを含む。線状要素45の長手方向における中間部に位置し且つ長手方向に非平行な側壁42Aによれば、線状要素45による導光作用やレンズ効果を抑制できる。画像100の輪郭が滲むことを抑制できる。したがって、加飾シート30を用いることによって、シャープな画像を表示できる。 In the first embodiment described above, the decorative sheet 30 includes the linear pattern layer 40. Linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 . The total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30 is 5% or more and 90% or less. The linear element 45 includes, at its longitudinal intermediate portion, side walls 42A non-parallel to the longitudinal direction, in other words side walls 42A facing the longitudinal direction. The side wall 42A that is positioned at the intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 and that is non-parallel to the longitudinal direction can suppress the light guiding action and lens effect of the linear element 45 . It is possible to suppress blurring of the contour of the image 100 . Therefore, by using the decorative sheet 30, a sharp image can be displayed.
 以上に説明してきた第1の実施の形態において、加飾シート30は線状模様層40を含む。線状模様層40は、一方向に配列された複数の線状要素45を含む。各線状要素45は、一方向に直交する他方向に延びる。各線状要素45は、二次元配列された単位要素48を含む。単位要素48は単位凸部48A又は単位凹部48Bである。一方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素45の間で、単位凹部48Bの配置割合は異なる。単位凹部48Bの配置割合が異なるので、隣り合う線状要素45が互いから区別される。二次元配列された単位要素48によれば、種々の方向から光を観察者に向けて反射できる。したがって、環境光を有効に活用して、線状要素45の集合としての線状模様35を明瞭に観察可能にできる。樹脂を用いた線状模様層40が、種々の光沢感を表現できるので、金属の質感、木目模様等の自然物の質感、布の質感等と類似する質感を再現できる。 In the first embodiment described above, the decorative sheet 30 includes the linear pattern layer 40. The linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 arranged in one direction. Each linear element 45 extends in the other direction perpendicular to the one direction. Each linear element 45 includes unit elements 48 arranged two-dimensionally. The unit element 48 is a unit convex portion 48A or a unit concave portion 48B. The arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B differs between two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in one direction. Adjacent linear elements 45 are distinguished from each other because the arrangement ratio of the unit concave portions 48B is different. The two-dimensionally arranged unit elements 48 can reflect light from various directions toward the observer. Therefore, the ambient light can be effectively used to clearly observe the linear pattern 35 as a set of linear elements 45 . Since the linear pattern layer 40 using resin can express various glossiness, it is possible to reproduce the texture similar to the texture of metal, the texture of natural objects such as grain patterns, the texture of cloth, and the like.
 以上に説明してきた第1の実施の形態において、加飾シート30は線状模様層40を含む。線状模様層40は、一方向に配列された複数の線状要素45を含む。各線状要素45は、一方向に直交する他方向に延びる。各線状要素45は、二次元配列された単位要素48を含む。単位要素48は単位凸部48A又は単位凹部48Bである。一方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素45の間で、線状要素45の他方向に沿った十点平均粗さRzは異なる。線状要素45のRzは、JISB0601-1994に規定された十点平均粗さRzである。線状要素45の十点平均粗さRzが異なるので、各線状要素45での拡散反射率が異なる。したがって、隣り合う線状要素45が、互いに異なるマット感またはグロス感を表現し、互いから区別される。したがって、環境光を有効に活用して、線状要素45の集合としての線状模様35を明瞭に観察可能にできる。樹脂を用いた線状模様層40が、種々の光沢感を表現できるので、金属の質感、木目模様等の自然物の質感、布の質感等と類似する質感を再現できる。 In the first embodiment described above, the decorative sheet 30 includes the linear pattern layer 40. The linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 arranged in one direction. Each linear element 45 extends in the other direction perpendicular to the one direction. Each linear element 45 includes unit elements 48 arranged two-dimensionally. The unit element 48 is a unit convex portion 48A or a unit concave portion 48B. Between two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in one direction, the ten-point average roughness Rz along the other direction of the linear element 45 is different. Rz of the linear element 45 is the ten-point average roughness Rz specified in JISB0601-1994. Since the ten-point average roughness Rz of the linear elements 45 is different, the diffuse reflectance of each linear element 45 is different. Therefore, adjacent linear elements 45 express different matte or glossy textures and are distinguished from each other. Therefore, the ambient light can be effectively used to clearly observe the linear pattern 35 as a set of linear elements 45 . Since the linear pattern layer 40 using resin can express various glossiness, it is possible to reproduce the texture similar to the texture of metal, the texture of natural objects such as grain patterns, the texture of cloth, and the like.
 以上に説明してきた第1の実施の形態において、加飾シート30は線状模様層40を含む。線状模様層40は、一方向に配列された複数の線状要素45を含む。各線状要素45は、一方向に直交する他方向に延びる。各線状要素45は、二次元配列された単位要素48を含む。単位要素48は単位凸部48A又は単位凹部48Bである。一方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素45の間で、平均高さは異なる。平均高さが異なるので、隣り合う線状要素45が互いから区別される。二次元配列された単位要素48によれば、種々の方向から光を観察者に向けて反射できる。したがって、環境光を有効に活用して、線状要素45の集合としての線状模様35を明瞭に観察可能にできる。樹脂を用いた線状模様層40が、種々の光沢感を表現できるので、金属の質感、木目模様等の自然物の質感、布の質感等と類似する質感を再現できる。 In the first embodiment described above, the decorative sheet 30 includes the linear pattern layer 40. The linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 arranged in one direction. Each linear element 45 extends in the other direction perpendicular to the one direction. Each linear element 45 includes unit elements 48 arranged two-dimensionally. The unit element 48 is a unit convex portion 48A or a unit concave portion 48B. Two linear elements 45 adjacent to each other in one direction have different average heights. Adjacent linear elements 45 are distinguished from each other by the different average heights. The two-dimensionally arranged unit elements 48 can reflect light from various directions toward the observer. Therefore, the ambient light can be effectively used to clearly observe the linear pattern 35 as a set of linear elements 45 . Since the linear pattern layer 40 using resin can express various glossiness, it is possible to reproduce the texture similar to the texture of metal, the texture of natural objects such as grain patterns, the texture of cloth, and the like.
 従来の加飾シートでは、線状模様を明瞭に表示できないという問題があった。第1の実施の形態による加飾シート30及び加飾部材20によれば、上述してきたように、線状模様35を明瞭に表示でき、従来の課題を解決できる。線状模様35を明瞭に表示可能な第1の実施の形態による加飾シート30及び加飾部材20は、光源装置12又は表示装置16と組み合わせて使用される必要はない。線状模様35を明瞭に表示可能な第1の実施の形態による加飾シート30及び加飾部材20は、表示システム10に使用されなくてもよい。線状模様35を明瞭に表示可能な第1の実施の形態による加飾シート30及び加飾部材20は、上述した表示システム10の適用対象に対して適用可能である。このような加飾部材20及び加飾シート30において、熱可塑性樹脂部64は、透明でもよいし、着色されていてもよい。  Conventional decorative sheets had the problem of not being able to clearly display linear patterns. According to the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 according to the first embodiment, as described above, the linear pattern 35 can be clearly displayed, and the conventional problems can be solved. The decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 according to the first embodiment, which can clearly display the linear pattern 35, need not be used in combination with the light source device 12 or the display device 16. The decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 according to the first embodiment that can clearly display the linear pattern 35 may not be used in the display system 10 . The decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 according to the first embodiment, which can clearly display the linear pattern 35, can be applied to the display system 10 described above. In the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30, the thermoplastic resin portion 64 may be transparent or colored.
 具体例を参照しながら一実施の形態を説明してきたが、上述の具体例が一実施の形態を限定しない。上述した一実施の形態は、その他の様々な具体例で実施でき、その要旨を逸脱しない範囲で、種々の省略、変更、追加等を行うことができる。 Although one embodiment has been described with reference to specific examples, the above specific examples do not limit one embodiment. The embodiment described above can be implemented in various other specific examples, and various omissions, changes, additions, etc. can be made without departing from the scope of the invention.
 以下、図面を参照しながら、変形の一例について説明する。以下の説明および以下の説明で用いる図面では、上述した具体例と同様に構成され得る部分について、上述の具体例における対応する部分に対して用いた符号と同一の符号を用い、重複する説明を省略する。 An example of deformation will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following description and the drawings used in the following description, the same reference numerals as those used for the corresponding portions in the above-described specific example are used for portions that can be configured in the same manner as in the above-described specific example, and redundant description is omitted. omitted.
 加飾シート30及び加飾部材20の層構成は、種々の変形が可能である。例えば、意匠層60、接合層62及び熱可塑性樹脂部64のいずれか一以上を、加飾シート30から省略してもよい。図24に示すように、加飾シート30が遮光パターンシート66を含んでもよい。図25及び図26に示すように、加飾シート30及び加飾部材20から遮光パターンシート66を省略してもよい。図示を省略するが、線状模様層40は、加飾部材20又は加飾シート30の最表面を形成する保護層を含んでもよい。線状模様層40は、上述してきた複数の線状要素を含む凹凸ベース層と、凹凸ベース層に積層された保護層と、を含んでもよい。保護層は、凹凸ベース層の凹凸面に沿って薄く形成されてもよい。保護層は、凹凸ベース層との間に屈折率界面を形成するようにして、凹凸ベース層の凹凸面を埋めるように設けられてもよい。保護層は、硬化型樹脂組成物の硬化物を含むハードコート層でもよい。加飾シート30及び加飾部材20に含まれる構成要素の配置も適宜変更可能である。 Various modifications of the layer structure of the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 are possible. For example, one or more of the design layer 60 , the bonding layer 62 and the thermoplastic resin portion 64 may be omitted from the decorative sheet 30 . As shown in FIG. 24, the decorative sheet 30 may include a light shielding pattern sheet 66. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the light shielding pattern sheet 66 may be omitted from the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20. FIG. Although illustration is omitted, the linear pattern layer 40 may include a protective layer forming the outermost surface of the decorative member 20 or the decorative sheet 30 . The linear pattern layer 40 may include a concavo-convex base layer containing the plurality of linear elements described above, and a protective layer laminated on the concavo-convex base layer. The protective layer may be thinly formed along the uneven surface of the uneven base layer. The protective layer may be provided so as to fill the uneven surface of the uneven base layer so as to form a refractive index interface with the uneven base layer. The protective layer may be a hard coat layer containing a cured product of a curable resin composition. The arrangement of the components included in the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 can also be changed as appropriate.
 加飾シート30及び加飾部材20の配置や、加飾シート30及び加飾部材20に含まれる構成要素の配置も適宜変更可能である。例えば、図1、図24~図26に示された加飾部材20や加飾シート30を、第3方向D3において逆向きに配置してもよい。 The arrangement of the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 and the arrangement of the components included in the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 shown in FIGS. 1 and 24 to 26 may be arranged in the opposite direction in the third direction D3.
 図1等に示された例において、光源装置12又は表示装置16に加飾部材20が重ねられることで、表示システム10が構成された。図25や図26に示すように、光源装置12又は表示装置16に加飾シート30が重ねられることで、表示システム10が構成されてもよい。図示された例において、加飾シート30は、光源装置12又は表示装置16に第3方向D3から重ねられている。 In the example shown in FIG. 1 and the like, the display system 10 is configured by stacking the decorative member 20 on the light source device 12 or the display device 16 . As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 , the display system 10 may be configured by stacking the decorative sheet 30 on the light source device 12 or the display device 16 . In the illustrated example, the decorative sheet 30 is overlaid on the light source device 12 or the display device 16 from the third direction D3.
 図1に示すように、加飾部材20及び加飾シート30は平板状でもよい。図27に示すように、加飾部材20及び加飾シート30は、立体形状、言い換えると三次元形状を有してもよい。図27に示された例において、加飾部材20及び加飾シート30は、第1方向D1における両側で屈曲している。 As shown in FIG. 1, the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 may be flat. As shown in FIG. 27, the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 may have a three-dimensional shape, in other words, a three-dimensional shape. In the example shown in FIG. 27, the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 are bent on both sides in the first direction D1.
 加飾シート30への三次元形状の付与は、真空成形や圧空成形等によって実施されてもよい。この例において、真空成形や圧空成形等の予備成形された加飾シート30を、インサート成形することによって、三次元形状を有する加飾部材20を作製してもよい。予備成形されていない加飾シート30をインモールド成形に用いることによって、三次元形状を有する加飾部材20を作製してもよい。加飾シート30をTOM成形に用いて、三次元形状を有する加飾部材20を作製してもよい。TOM成形は、Three dimension Overlay Methodであり、三次元表面加飾成形とも呼称され得る。 A three-dimensional shape may be imparted to the decorative sheet 30 by vacuum forming, pressure forming, or the like. In this example, the decorating member 20 having a three-dimensional shape may be produced by insert-molding the decorating sheet 30 preformed by vacuum forming, pressure forming, or the like. The decorating member 20 having a three-dimensional shape may be produced by using the decorating sheet 30 that has not been preformed for in-mold molding. The decorative sheet 30 may be used for TOM molding to produce the decorative member 20 having a three-dimensional shape. TOM molding is a three-dimensional overlay method, and can also be called three-dimensional surface decoration molding.
 図2に示された例において、熱可塑性樹脂部64は平板状である。射出成形で作製される熱可塑性樹脂部64は、立体的形状、言い換えると三次元形状を有してもよい。加飾部材20を固定するために用いられる部分、例えばネジ等の固定部材を取り付けられる部分を、熱可塑性樹脂部64が含んでもよい。 In the example shown in FIG. 2, the thermoplastic resin portion 64 is flat. The thermoplastic resin part 64 produced by injection molding may have a three-dimensional shape, in other words, a three-dimensional shape. The thermoplastic resin portion 64 may include a portion used for fixing the decorative member 20, for example, a portion to which a fixing member such as a screw is attached.
 上述した加飾シート30の製造方法において、版90を用いて樹脂賦型層80を作製し、樹脂賦型層80から加飾シート30を作製する例を示した。樹脂賦型層80を作製することなく、版90から加飾シート30を直接製造してもよい。すなわち、樹脂賦型層80が線状模様層40を構成してもよい。 In the manufacturing method of the decorative sheet 30 described above, an example of producing the resin-imprinted layer 80 using the plate 90 and producing the decorative sheet 30 from the resin-imprinted layer 80 is shown. The decorative sheet 30 may be directly manufactured from the plate 90 without forming the resin imprinting layer 80 . That is, the resin imprint layer 80 may constitute the linear pattern layer 40 .
<第1の実施の形態の実施例>
 以下、実施例を用いて第1の実施の形態をより詳細に説明するが、第1の実施の形態はこの実施例に限定されるものではない。
<Example of the first embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment will be described in more detail using examples, but the first embodiment is not limited to these examples.
 実施例1~3に係る加飾部材と、比較例1及び2に係る加飾シートと、を作製した。作製された実施例及び比較例に係る加飾シートは、図25に示された加飾シートと同様に、意匠層、接合層及び線状模様層を有していた。実施例1~3及び比較例2では、版を作製し、この版を用いて基材及び樹脂賦型層の積層体を作製し、この積層体から加飾シート積層体を作製し、加飾シート積層体から基材及び樹脂賦型層を剥がすことによって、加飾シートを製造した。比較例1では、基材及び樹脂賦型層の積層体に代えて、紙やすりで表面をけがいた樹脂フィルムを用意し、樹脂フィルムから加飾シート積層体を作製し、加飾シート積層体から樹脂フィルムを剥がすことによって、加飾シートを製造した。 Decorative members according to Examples 1 to 3 and decorative sheets according to Comparative Examples 1 and 2 were produced. The produced decorative sheets according to Examples and Comparative Examples had a design layer, a joining layer and a linear pattern layer, like the decorative sheet shown in FIG. In Examples 1 to 3 and Comparative Example 2, a plate was produced, a laminate of a base material and a resin imprinting layer was produced using this plate, a decorative sheet laminate was produced from this laminate, and decorated. A decorative sheet was produced by peeling off the substrate and the resin transfer layer from the sheet laminate. In Comparative Example 1, instead of the laminate of the substrate and the resin imprinting layer, a resin film whose surface was scratched with sandpaper was prepared. A decorative sheet was produced by peeling off the resin film.
<実施例1>
 版の作製は、図9~図11を参照して説明した上述の方法を採用した。図10に示された画像データを製造対象のヘアライン模様とした。図10に示された画像データは、ポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルムをけがくことによって作製したヘアラインシートの画像データである。
<Example 1>
The above-described method described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11 was used to prepare the plate. The image data shown in FIG. 10 was used as the hairline pattern to be manufactured. The image data shown in FIG. 10 are image data of a hairline sheet produced by marking a polyethylene terephthalate film.
 画像データをAdobe Photoshop2021を用いて誤差拡散法によるモノクロ2階調化を行った。入力画像データは3200pixel/inch、出力も3200pixel/inchとし、その後3200pixel/inchを12800pixel/inchに変更することで第1区域および第2区域の配置パターンを作成した。線状要素の配列方向に沿った幅は、40~100μm程度であった。  The image data was converted to monochrome 2 gradation using the error diffusion method using Adobe Photoshop 2021. The input image data was 3200 pixels/inch and the output was also 3200 pixels/inch. Then, by changing 3200 pixels/inch to 12800 pixels/inch, the arrangement pattern of the first area and the second area was created. The width along the arrangement direction of the linear elements was about 40 to 100 μm.
 第2区域の配置パターンにて、金属板の表面に凹部を形成した。凹部は、フォトリソグラフィー技術を用いたエッチングにより形成した。金属板は銅板とした。凹部の形成後、銅板の表面をクロムめっき処理した。 A concave portion was formed on the surface of the metal plate according to the arrangement pattern of the second area. The recess was formed by etching using a photolithographic technique. A copper plate was used as the metal plate. After forming the recesses, the surface of the copper plate was plated with chrome.
 以上により、版を製造した。製造された版は、上述した構成を有していた。すなわち、製造された版は、複数の版線状要素を含んでいた。各版線状要素は、版線状凸部又は版線状凹部であった。各版線状要素は二次元配列された版単位要素を含んでいた。版単位要素は、第1区域に位置する版単位凸部又は第2区域に位置する版単位凹部であった。版単位要素は、版線状要素の長手方向及び版線状要素の配列方向に配列されていた。版単位要素は、版線状要素の長手方向を向く側壁と、版線状要素の配列方向を向く側壁と、を有していた。 With the above, the plate was manufactured. The plate produced had the configuration described above. That is, the plate produced contained a plurality of plate linear elements. Each plate-like element was either a plate-like protrusion or a plate-like recess. Each plate-like element contained a two-dimensional array of plate-unit elements. The plate unit elements were plate unit protrusions located in the first areas or plate unit recesses located in the second areas. The plate-like elements were arranged in the longitudinal direction of the plate-like elements and in the arranging direction of the plate-like elements. The plate-like element had a side wall facing the longitudinal direction of the plate-like element and a side wall facing the arrangement direction of the plate-like element.
 版を用いた基材及び樹脂賦型層を含む積層体の製造は、図12を参照して説明した上述の製造方法を採用した。基材として、ポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルムを用いた。樹脂賦型層は、紫外線硬化性樹脂を用いて作製した。製造された樹脂賦型層は、上述した構成を有していた。すなわち、製造された樹脂賦型層は、複数の第2線状要素を含んでいた。各第2線状要素は、第2線状凸部又は第2線状凹部であった。各第2線状要素は二次元配列された第2単位要素を含んでいた。第2単位要素は、第2単位凸部又は第2単位凹部であった。第2単位要素は、第2線状要素の長手方向及び第2線状要素の配列方向に配列されていた。第2単位要素は、第2線状要素の長手方向を向く側壁と、第2線状要素の配列方向を向く側壁と、を有していた。 The above-described manufacturing method described with reference to FIG. 12 was adopted for manufacturing the laminate including the substrate and the resin transfer layer using a plate. A polyethylene terephthalate film was used as the substrate. The resin imprinting layer was produced using an ultraviolet curable resin. The manufactured resin-imparted layer had the structure described above. That is, the manufactured resin-imprinted layer contained a plurality of second linear elements. Each second linear element was either a second linear protrusion or a second linear recess. Each second linear element contained a two-dimensional array of second unit elements. The second unit element was the second unit protrusion or the second unit recess. The second unit elements were arranged in the longitudinal direction of the second linear elements and in the arrangement direction of the second linear elements. The second unit element had a side wall facing the longitudinal direction of the second linear element and a side wall facing the arrangement direction of the second linear element.
 加飾シート積層体の製造は、図14~図16を参照して説明した製造方法を採用した。線状模様層は、紫外線硬化性樹脂を用いて作製した。接合層は、熱可塑性樹脂を用いて作製した。意匠層は、印刷により作製した。意匠層は、黒色の一様な層であった。製造された線状模様層は、上述した構成を有していた。すなわち、製造された線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含んでいた。各線状要素は、線状凸部又は線状凹部であった。各線状要素は二次元配列された単位要素を含んでいた。単位要素は、単位凸部又は単位凹部であった。単位要素は、線状要素の長手方向及び線状要素の配列方向に配列されていた。単位要素は、線状要素の長手方向を向く側壁と、線状要素の配列方向を向く側壁と、を有していた。配列方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素の間で、単位凹部の配置割合は異なっていた。配列方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素の間で、平均高さは異なっていた。線状模様層の単位要素の最大長さは、50μm程度であった。線状模様層の単位要素による凹凸構造の高低差は、3μm程度であった。 The manufacturing method described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16 was adopted for manufacturing the decorative sheet laminate. The linear pattern layer was produced using an ultraviolet curable resin. The joining layer was produced using a thermoplastic resin. The design layer was produced by printing. The design layer was a uniform black layer. The produced linear pattern layer had the structure described above. That is, the produced linear pattern layer contained a plurality of linear elements. Each linear element was a linear protrusion or a linear depression. Each linear element contained a two-dimensional array of unit elements. A unit element was a unit convex portion or a unit concave portion. The unit elements were arranged in the longitudinal direction of the linear elements and in the arrangement direction of the linear elements. The unit element had a side wall facing the longitudinal direction of the linear elements and a side wall facing the arrangement direction of the linear elements. The arrangement ratio of unit recesses was different between two linear elements adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction. The average height was different between two linear elements adjacent to each other in the array direction. The maximum length of the unit element of the linear pattern layer was about 50 μm. The height difference of the concave-convex structure of the unit element of the linear pattern layer was about 3 μm.
<実施例2>
 実施例2に係る加飾シートの製造方法は、版の作製時に凹部を形成した金属板にブラスト処理を行い、ブラスト処理後の金属板をクロムめっき処理した点のみにおいて、実施例1に係る加飾シートの製造方法と異なった。ブラスト処理を除き、実施例2に係る加飾シートは、実施例1に係る加飾シートと、同一の製造方法及び同一の製造条件を採用した。実施例2において、版の版面、樹脂賦型層の凹凸構造および線状模様層の凹凸構造には、ブラスト処理に起因した微細な凹凸が形成されていた。
<Example 2>
The manufacturing method of the decorative sheet according to Example 2 is different from that of Example 1 except that the metal plate having the recesses formed therein is blasted when the plate is produced, and the metal plate after blasting is chromium plated. It was different from the manufacturing method of the decorative sheet. Except for the blasting treatment, the decorative sheet according to Example 2 employs the same manufacturing method and manufacturing conditions as those of the decorative sheet according to Example 1. In Example 2, fine irregularities due to blasting were formed on the plate surface of the plate, the irregular structure of the resin imprinting layer, and the irregular structure of the linear pattern layer.
<実施例3>
 実施例3に係る加飾シートの製造方法は、ブラスト処理の条件のみにおいて、実施例2に係る加飾シートの製造方法と異なった。ブラスト処理の条件を除き、実施例3に係る加飾シートの製造方法は実施例2に係る加飾シートの製造方法と同一であった。実施例3で採用したブラスト処理の条件は、実施例2で採用したブラスト処理の条件よりも過酷であった。
<Example 3>
The manufacturing method of the decorative sheet according to Example 3 was different from the manufacturing method of the decorative sheet according to Example 2 only in the blasting conditions. The method for manufacturing the decorative sheet according to Example 3 was the same as the method for manufacturing the decorative sheet according to Example 2, except for the blasting conditions. The blasting conditions employed in Example 3 were more severe than the blasting conditions employed in Example 2.
<比較例1>
 比較例1では、基材及び樹脂賦型層の積層体に代えて、紙やすりで表面をけがいた樹脂フィルムを用意した。樹脂フィルムは、厚み50μmのポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルムの表面をけがくことにより、作製した。樹脂フィルム上に、線状模様層、接合層および意匠層を作製し、加飾シート積層体を得た。線状模様層、接合層および意匠層の作製方法は、実施例1における樹脂賦型層上に線状模様層、接合層および意匠層を作製する方法と、方法、条件、材料を含めて、同一とした。加飾シート積層体から樹脂フィルムを剥がすことによって、比較例1に係る加飾シートが得られた。比較例1の加飾シートの線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を有していた。線状要素の長手方向に沿った長さは、図10に示された製造対象となるヘアライン模様をなす線状要素の長手方向に沿った長さと同程度であった。線状要素の配列方向に沿った幅は、図10に示された製造対象となるヘアライン模様をなす線状要素の配列方向に沿った幅と同程度であった。
<Comparative Example 1>
In Comparative Example 1, instead of the laminate of the substrate and the resin imprinting layer, a resin film whose surface was scratched with sandpaper was prepared. The resin film was produced by scribing the surface of a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 50 μm. A linear pattern layer, a bonding layer and a design layer were formed on the resin film to obtain a decorative sheet laminate. The method for producing the linear pattern layer, the bonding layer, and the design layer includes the method, method, conditions, and materials for producing the linear pattern layer, the bonding layer, and the design layer on the resin molding layer in Example 1. assumed to be the same. A decorative sheet according to Comparative Example 1 was obtained by peeling off the resin film from the decorative sheet laminate. The linear pattern layer of the decorative sheet of Comparative Example 1 had a plurality of linear elements. The length along the longitudinal direction of the linear element was approximately the same as the length along the longitudinal direction of the linear element forming the hairline pattern to be manufactured shown in FIG. The width along the arrangement direction of the linear elements was approximately the same as the width along the arrangement direction of the linear elements forming the hairline pattern to be manufactured shown in FIG.
<比較例2>
 比較例2に係る加飾シートの製造方法は、図10に示された画像データを二値化した点のみにおいて、実施例1に係る加飾シートの製造方法と異なった。比較例2では、画像データを二値化していることから、版の版線状要素は、略一定の高さの有する版線状凸部、又は略一定の高さの有する版線状凹部となった。すなわち、版線状要素は、二次元配列された版単位要素を含んでいなかった。比較例2において、樹脂賦型層は、略一定の高さを有する複数の第2線状要素を有していた。第2線状要素は、二次元配列された第2単位要素を含んでいなかった。比較例2において、線状模様層は、略一定の高さを有する複数の線状要素を有していた。線状要素は、二次元配列された単位要素を含んでいなかった。比較例2において、線状要素の長手方向に沿った長さは、図10に示された製造対象となるヘアライン模様をなす線状要素の長手方向に沿った長さと同程度であった。線状要素の配列方向に沿った幅は、図10に示された製造対象となるヘアライン模様をなす線状要素の配列方向に沿った幅と同程度であった。
<Comparative Example 2>
The decorative sheet manufacturing method according to Comparative Example 2 differs from the decorative sheet manufacturing method according to Example 1 only in that the image data shown in FIG. 10 is binarized. In Comparative Example 2, since the image data is binarized, the plate line-shaped elements of the plate are plate line-shaped convex portions having a substantially constant height, or plate line-shaped concave portions having a substantially constant height. became. That is, the plate linear elements did not contain two-dimensionally arranged plate unit elements. In Comparative Example 2, the resin-imparted layer had a plurality of second linear elements with substantially constant heights. The second linear elements did not include second unit elements arranged two-dimensionally. In Comparative Example 2, the linear pattern layer had a plurality of linear elements with substantially constant heights. The linear elements did not contain two-dimensionally arranged unit elements. In Comparative Example 2, the length of the linear element along the longitudinal direction was approximately the same as the length along the longitudinal direction of the linear element forming the hairline pattern to be manufactured shown in FIG. The width along the arrangement direction of the linear elements was approximately the same as the width along the arrangement direction of the linear elements forming the hairline pattern to be manufactured shown in FIG.
 比較例1及び比較例2では、実施例1と同様に、版の製造においてブラスト処理を用いなかった。実施例1~3、比較例1及び2において、加飾シートの製造において、被覆層を用いなかった。 In Comparative Examples 1 and 2, as in Example 1, blasting was not used in the production of plates. In Examples 1 to 3 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2, no coating layer was used in manufacturing the decorative sheets.
<評価1>
 実施例1~3並びに比較例1及び2に係る加飾シートを直射日光があたらないようにして日向に配置し、加飾シートの線状模様を観察した。50cm離れた位置から加飾シートを観察して、ヘアライン模様が明瞭に観察できるか否かを評価した。評価結果を表1の「評価1(明所)」の欄に記載した。種々の方向からヘアライン模様を観察できた例に、「A」を付した。ヘアライン模様が明瞭に観察できない観察方向があった例に、「B」を付した。
<Evaluation 1>
The decorative sheets according to Examples 1 to 3 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 were placed in the sun without being exposed to direct sunlight, and the linear patterns of the decorative sheets were observed. The decorative sheet was observed from a distance of 50 cm to evaluate whether or not the hairline pattern could be clearly observed. The evaluation results are shown in the column of "Evaluation 1 (light)" in Table 1. "A" was assigned to examples in which the hairline pattern could be observed from various directions. "B" was assigned to an example in which there was an observation direction in which the hairline pattern could not be clearly observed.
<評価2>
 実施例1~3並びに比較例1及び2に係る加飾シートを日陰に配置し、加飾シートの線状模様を観察した。50cm離れた位置から加飾シートを観察して、ヘアライン模様が明瞭に観察できるか否かを評価した。評価結果を表1の「評価2(暗所)」の欄に記載した。種々の方向からヘアライン模様を観察できた例に、「A」を付した。ヘアライン模様が明瞭に観察できない観察方向があった例に、「B」を付した。
<Evaluation 2>
The decorative sheets according to Examples 1 to 3 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 were placed in the shade, and the linear patterns of the decorative sheets were observed. The decorative sheet was observed from a distance of 50 cm to evaluate whether or not the hairline pattern could be clearly observed. The evaluation results are shown in the column of “Evaluation 2 (dark place)” in Table 1. "A" was assigned to examples in which the hairline pattern could be observed from various directions. "B" was assigned to an example in which there was an observation direction in which the hairline pattern could not be clearly observed.
<評価3>
 実施例1~3並びに比較例1及び2に係る加飾シートを、遮光パターンシート及び光源装置を有する表示装置と組合せて、図25に示された表示システムを作製した。光源装置は、発光ダイオードであった。表示装置は、正方形形状の画像を表示可能であった。画像がなす正方形形状の辺は、線状要素の長手方向および配列方向に延びていた。表示装置を動作させて画像を表示した状態において、加飾シート上の滲みが観察されるか否かを確認した。評価結果を表1の「評価3(滲み)」の欄に記載した。目立った滲みが観察されず、画像がシャープに観察された例に、「A」を付した。滲みが観察されて、画像がぼやけて観察された例に、「B」を付した。
<Evaluation 3>
A display system shown in FIG. 25 was produced by combining the decorative sheets according to Examples 1 to 3 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 with a display device having a light shielding pattern sheet and a light source device. The light source device was a light emitting diode. The display device was capable of displaying square-shaped images. The sides of the square formed by the image extended in the longitudinal direction and the arrangement direction of the linear elements. It was confirmed whether or not bleeding on the decorative sheet was observed in a state in which the display device was operated to display an image. The evaluation results are shown in the column of “Evaluation 3 (Bleeding)” in Table 1. An example in which no conspicuous bleeding was observed and a sharp image was observed was given "A". "B" was assigned to examples in which bleeding was observed and the image was observed to be blurred.
<第2の実施の形態>
 第2の実施の形態は、線状模様層40に含まれる線状要素45の構成において、第1の実施の形態と異なる。第2の実施の形態は、線状要素45の構成以外において、第1の実施の形態と同様に構成されてもよい。第2の実施の形態の説明及び添付図面において、第1の実施の形態の対応する構成と同一の符号を用いている。
<Second Embodiment>
The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the linear elements 45 included in the linear pattern layer 40 . The second embodiment may be configured similarly to the first embodiment except for the configuration of the linear element 45. FIG. In the description and accompanying drawings of the second embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the corresponding components of the first embodiment are used.
 図30、図42、図43、及び図44に示すように、第2の実施の形態において、表示システム10は、加飾部材20又は加飾シート30と、光源装置12又は表示装置16と、を含んでもよい。第2の実施の形態における光源装置12及び表示装置16は、それぞれ、第1の実施の形態で説明した光源装置12及び表示装置16と同一でもよい。光源装置12及び表示装置16は、加飾部材20及び加飾シート30によって、第3方向D3から少なくとも部分的に覆われている。表示システム10によれば、加飾シート30によって周囲との調和を確保しながら、光源装置12及び表示装置16を設置できる。 As shown in FIGS. 30, 42, 43, and 44, in the second embodiment, the display system 10 includes a decorative member 20 or a decorative sheet 30, a light source device 12 or a display device 16, may include The light source device 12 and the display device 16 in the second embodiment may be the same as the light source device 12 and the display device 16 described in the first embodiment, respectively. The light source device 12 and the display device 16 are at least partially covered with the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 from the third direction D3. According to the display system 10 , the light source device 12 and the display device 16 can be installed while ensuring harmony with the surroundings by the decorative sheet 30 .
 第1の実施の形態で説明したように、光源装置12及び表示装置16の点灯時、図4に示すように表示システム10は表示を行うことができる。第1の実施の形態で説明したように、光源装置12及び表示装置16の点灯時、図3に示すように、表示システム10は線状模様層40により線状模様35を表示できる。図3~図5Dを参照しながら第1の実施の形態で説明したように、第2の実施の形態による加飾部材20又は加飾シート30の線状模様層40は、ヘアライン模様、スピン模様、木目模様、又は織物模様を表示してもよい。第2の実施の形態による表示システム10、加飾部材20又は加飾シート30は、第1の実施の形態で説明したように、種々の用途に適用され得る。 As described in the first embodiment, when the light source device 12 and the display device 16 are turned on, the display system 10 can display as shown in FIG. As described in the first embodiment, when the light source device 12 and the display device 16 are turned on, the display system 10 can display the linear pattern 35 by the linear pattern layer 40 as shown in FIG. As described in the first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5D, the linear pattern layer 40 of the decorative member 20 or the decorative sheet 30 according to the second embodiment includes hairline patterns, spin patterns, , grain pattern, or weave pattern. The display system 10, the decorative member 20, or the decorative sheet 30 according to the second embodiment can be applied to various uses as described in the first embodiment.
 第2の実施の形態による加飾部材20は、加飾シート30及び熱可塑性樹脂部64を含んでもよい。第2の実施の形態において、熱可塑性樹脂部64は、第1の実施の形態で説明した熱可塑性樹脂部64を用いてもよい。加飾部材20は、第1の実施の形態と同様に、加飾シート30及び熱可塑性樹脂部64以外の構成を含んでもよい。第2の実施の形態において、加飾部材20及び加飾シート30は、図30、図42、図43、及び図44に示すように、線状模様層40に加えて、接合層62、意匠層60、遮光パターンシート66、及び表面保護層の一以上を含んでもよい。第2の実施の形態における接合層62、意匠層60、遮光パターンシート66、及び表面保護層は、それぞれ、第1の実施の形態で説明した構成を有してもよい。 The decorative member 20 according to the second embodiment may include the decorative sheet 30 and the thermoplastic resin portion 64. In the second embodiment, the thermoplastic resin portion 64 described in the first embodiment may be used as the thermoplastic resin portion 64 . The decorative member 20 may include components other than the decorative sheet 30 and the thermoplastic resin portion 64, as in the first embodiment. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 30, 42, 43, and 44, the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 include a linear pattern layer 40, a bonding layer 62, a design One or more of the layer 60, the light-shielding pattern sheet 66, and the surface protective layer may be included. The bonding layer 62, the design layer 60, the light-shielding pattern sheet 66, and the surface protective layer in the second embodiment may each have the configuration described in the first embodiment.
 第2の実施の形態における加飾部材20及び加飾シート30は、第1の実施の形態において説明した透過特性を有してもよい。第2の実施の形態における加飾部材20及び加飾シート30は、第1の実施の形態において説明した厚みや大きさ等の寸法を有してもよい。 The decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 in the second embodiment may have the transmission properties described in the first embodiment. The decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 in the second embodiment may have dimensions such as thickness and size described in the first embodiment.
 第2の実施の形態における加飾部材20及び加飾シート30は、第1の実施の形態において説明した光学特性を有してもよい。例えば、加飾部材20及び加飾シート30の全光線透過率は、第1の実施の形態に係る加飾部材20及び加飾シート30の全光線透過率と同様でもよい。加飾シート30が遮光パターンシート66を含む場合、全光線透過率は、透過領域66bにおいて測定された全光線透過率となる。 The decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 in the second embodiment may have the optical properties described in the first embodiment. For example, the total light transmittance of the decorating member 20 and the decorating sheet 30 may be the same as the total light transmittance of the decorating member 20 and the decorating sheet 30 according to the first embodiment. When the decorative sheet 30 includes the light shielding pattern sheet 66, the total light transmittance is the total light transmittance measured in the transmission region 66b.
 図30に示すように、加飾シート30は線状模様層40を含んでいる。線状模様層40は、線状模様35を表示する。線状模様35は、線状の模様である。線状模様層40は、複数の線状要素45を含んでいる。複数の線状要素45は、一方向に配置されている。一方向は、線状要素45の配列方向である。各線状要素45は、一方向に交差する他方向、例えば直交する他方向に延びている。各線状要素45は長手方向を有し、他方向が長手方向となる。各線状要素45は、長手方向である他方向に細長く延びている。複数の線状要素45は、概ね平行に延びる。複数の線状要素45の集合により、線状模様35を表現する。 As shown in FIG. 30, the decorative sheet 30 includes a linear pattern layer 40. As shown in FIG. The linear pattern layer 40 displays the linear pattern 35 . The linear pattern 35 is a linear pattern. Linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 . A plurality of linear elements 45 are arranged in one direction. One direction is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . Each linear element 45 extends in the other direction that intersects with one direction, for example, the other direction that intersects perpendicularly. Each linear element 45 has a longitudinal direction, the other direction being the longitudinal direction. Each linear element 45 elongates in the other longitudinal direction. A plurality of linear elements 45 extend generally parallel. A linear pattern 35 is represented by a set of a plurality of linear elements 45 .
 線状要素45が所定の方向(他方向)に延びるとは、線状要素45がその全長に沿った任意の位置において、厳密な意味で所定の方向(他方向)に延びていることを要しない。線状要素45の各位置で延びる方向が所定の方向(他方向)に対してなす角度が、±15°以下となっていることが好ましく、±10°以下となっていることがより好ましく、±5°以下となっていることが更に好ましい。線状要素45が曲線状である場合、線状要素45の各位置での延びる方向とは、当該位置における線状要素45への接線方向を意味する。ヘアライン模様に関して線状要素45が所定の方向(他方向)に延びるとは、線状要素45の両端を結ぶ方向が所定の方向(他方向)に対してなす角度が、±10°以下となっていることが好ましく、±5°以下となっていることがより好ましく、±3°以下となっていることが更に好ましい。 The linear element 45 extending in a predetermined direction (another direction) means that the linear element 45 extends in a predetermined direction (another direction) at any position along its entire length in a strict sense. do not. The angle formed by the extending direction at each position of the linear element 45 with respect to a predetermined direction (other direction) is preferably ±15° or less, more preferably ±10° or less, It is more preferable that the angle is ±5° or less. When the linear element 45 is curved, the direction in which the linear element 45 extends at each position means the tangential direction to the linear element 45 at that position. When the linear elements 45 extend in a predetermined direction (another direction) with respect to the hairline pattern, the angle formed by the direction connecting both ends of the linear elements 45 with respect to the predetermined direction (another direction) is ±10° or less. ±5° or less is more preferable, and ±3° or less is even more preferable.
 線状要素45が細長く延びるとは、線状要素45の全長の幅に対する比が、2以上であることを意味し、10以上であることが好ましく、20以上であることがより好ましい。線状要素45の全長は、線状要素45の長手方向(他方向)に沿った長さ(μm)である。線状要素45の幅は、線状要素45の配列方向(一方向9に沿った長さ(μm)である。 That the linear elements 45 are elongated means that the ratio of the total length to the width of the linear elements 45 is 2 or more, preferably 10 or more, more preferably 20 or more. The total length of the linear element 45 is the length (μm) along the longitudinal direction (other direction) of the linear element 45 . The width of the linear elements 45 is the length (μm) along the direction of arrangement of the linear elements 45 (the one direction 9).
 線状要素45の長手方向(他方向)に沿った長さは、第1の実施の形態で説明した長さと同一にしてもよい。線状要素45の配列方向(一方向)に沿った幅は、第1の実施の形態で説明した幅と同一にしてもよい。 The length along the longitudinal direction (other direction) of the linear element 45 may be the same as the length described in the first embodiment. The width along the arrangement direction (one direction) of the linear elements 45 may be the same as the width described in the first embodiment.
 各線状要素45は、線状凸部45A又は線状凹部45Bである。線状凸部45A及び線状凹部45Bは、配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に交互に配置されている。加飾シート30の法線方向(図示された例において、第3方向D3)における線状要素45の平均位置(平均高さ)の比較により、配列方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素45は、線状凸部45A又は線状凹部45Bとして特定される。加飾シート30の法線方向における基準位置(基準高さ)を設定し、当該基準高さを基準として、線状凸部45A及び線状凹部45Bは区別される。加飾シート30の法線方向において、平均位置(平均高さ)が基準位置よりも観察者に接近した高い線状要素45が、線状凸部45Aとなる。加飾シート30の法線方向において、平均位置(平均高さ)が基準位置よりも観察者から離れた低い線状要素45が、線状凹部45Bとなる。基準位置は、線状模様層40についての加飾シート30の法線方向における平均位置(平均高さ)である。 Each linear element 45 is a linear protrusion 45A or a linear recess 45B. The linear protrusions 45A and the linear recesses 45B are alternately arranged in the arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). By comparing the average position (average height) of the linear elements 45 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 (the third direction D3 in the illustrated example), two linear elements 45 adjacent in the arrangement direction are: They are identified as linear protrusions 45A or linear recesses 45B. A reference position (reference height) in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is set, and the linear protrusions 45A and the linear recesses 45B are distinguished based on the reference height. Linear elements 45 whose average position (average height) is closer to the observer than the reference position in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 are linear projections 45A. Linear elements 45 whose average position (average height) is lower than the reference position in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 and which are farther from the observer are linear concave portions 45B. The reference position is the average position (average height) of the linear pattern layer 40 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 .
 線状模様層40についての加飾シート30の法線方向における平均位置(平均高さ)は、第1の実施の形態で説明した方法により、特定される。線状要素45についての加飾シート30の法線方向における平均位置(平均高さ)は、第1の実施の形態で説明した方法により、特定される。 The average position (average height) of the linear pattern layer 40 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is specified by the method described in the first embodiment. The average position (average height) of the linear elements 45 in the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is specified by the method described in the first embodiment.
 図30に示された例において、線状模様層40は、シート状のベース部43と、ベース部43から第3方向D3に突出した線状凸部45Aを含んでいる。第2方向D2に隣り合う二つの線状凸部45Aの間に線状凹部45Bが設けられることによって、ベース部43が露出している。後述するように、樹脂賦型によって、ベース部43及び線状凸部45Aが一体的に成形されてもよい。すなわち、ベース部43及び線状凸部45Aが継ぎ目無しで接続してもよい。 In the example shown in FIG. 30, the linear pattern layer 40 includes a sheet-like base portion 43 and linear protrusions 45A projecting from the base portion 43 in the third direction D3. The base portion 43 is exposed by providing the linear concave portion 45B between the two linear convex portions 45A adjacent to each other in the second direction D2. As will be described later, the base portion 43 and the linear convex portion 45A may be integrally molded by resin molding. That is, the base portion 43 and the linear convex portion 45A may be seamlessly connected.
 後述するように、加飾シート30を介して画像を透過観察する際、図45に示すように、画像の輪郭が滲むといった不具合が生じる。画像の輪郭が滲むと画像の輪郭が不明瞭となり、シャープな画像を表示できない。画像はぼけて観察される。 As will be described later, when an image is transparently observed through the decorative sheet 30, as shown in FIG. 45, the contour of the image blurs. When the contour of the image blurs, the contour of the image becomes unclear and a sharp image cannot be displayed. The image is observed blurry.
 画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制する観点から、線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったRzに上限を設けてもよい。Rzは、JISB0601-1994に準拠した十点平均粗さ(μm)である。線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったRzは、3.2μm以下でもよいし、2.5μm以下でもよいし、2.4μm以下でもよい。このようにRzの上限を設けることにより、画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制できる。 From the viewpoint of suppressing blurring of the outline of the image, an upper limit may be set for Rz along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . Rz is the ten-point average roughness (μm) according to JISB0601-1994. Rz along one direction in which the linear elements 45 are arranged may be 3.2 μm or less, 2.5 μm or less, or 2.4 μm or less. By setting the upper limit of Rz in this way, it is possible to suppress blurring of the contour of the image.
 画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制する観点から、線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったRaに上限を設けてもよい。Raは、JISB0601-1994に準拠した算術平均粗さ(μm)である。線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったRaは、1.4μm以下でもよいし、1.1μm以下でもよいし、0.9μm以下でもよい。このようにRaの上限を設けることにより、画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制できる。 From the viewpoint of suppressing blurring of the outline of the image, an upper limit may be set for Ra along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . Ra is the arithmetic mean roughness (μm) conforming to JISB0601-1994. Ra along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45, may be 1.4 μm or less, 1.1 μm or less, or 0.9 μm or less. By setting the upper limit of Ra in this way, it is possible to suppress blurring of the outline of the image.
 画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制する観点から、線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったPVに上限を設けてもよい。PVは、JISB0601-1994に準拠した最大谷深さ(μm)である。線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったPVは、4.7μm以下でもよいし、3.9μm以下でもよいし、3.8μm以下でもよい。このようにPVの上限を設けることにより、画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制できる。 From the viewpoint of suppressing blurring of the outline of the image, an upper limit may be set for the PV along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . PV is the maximum valley depth (μm) conforming to JISB0601-1994. The PV along one direction in which the linear elements 45 are arranged may be 4.7 μm or less, 3.9 μm or less, or 3.8 μm or less. By setting the upper limit of the PV in this way, it is possible to suppress blurring of the outline of the image.
 画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制する観点から、線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったrmsに上限を設けてもよい。rmsは、JISB0601-1994に準拠した二乗平均粗さ(μm)である。線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったrmsは、1.5μm以下でもよいし、1.2m以下でもよいし、1.1μm以下でもよい。このようにrmsの上限を設けることにより、画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制できる。 From the viewpoint of suppressing blurring of the outline of the image, an upper limit may be set for rms along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . rms is the root mean square roughness (μm) according to JISB0601-1994. The rms along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45, may be 1.5 μm or less, 1.2 m or less, or 1.1 μm or less. By setting the upper limit of rms in this way, it is possible to suppress blurring of the contour of the image.
 以上の表面性状を有する線状模様層40において、線状要素45によって形成される側壁42の、加飾シート30の法線方向(図示された例において、第3方向D3)に沿った、高さは、低くなり易い。加飾シート30の法線方向に沿った高さの低い側壁42は、強いレンズ効果を奏しにくくなる。また、線状要素45は、加飾シート30の法線方向(図示された例において、第3方向D3)に対して大きく傾斜した側壁42を有し易い。加飾シート30の法線方向に対して大きく傾斜した側壁42は、法線方向に対して傾斜した方向に光を集光するレンズ効果を奏しにくくなる。このように側壁42によるレンズ効果が弱められることにより、本来画像が表示されるべき領域の周囲に光が広がることが抑制される。これにより、画像の輪郭の滲みが抑制されると推察される。 In the linear pattern layer 40 having the surface properties described above, the side walls 42 formed by the linear elements 45 have a height along the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 (the third direction D3 in the illustrated example). height tends to be low. A low side wall 42 along the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 is less likely to exhibit a strong lens effect. Further, the linear element 45 tends to have the side wall 42 greatly inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 (the third direction D3 in the illustrated example). Side walls 42 that are greatly inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 are less likely to exhibit a lens effect of concentrating light in a direction inclined with respect to the normal direction. By weakening the lens effect of the side walls 42 in this way, the spread of light around the area where the image should be displayed is suppressed. It is presumed that this suppresses blurring of the contour of the image.
 側壁42の高さが低いと、線状要素45の一対の側壁42で反射を繰り返すことが抑制される。すなわち、線状要素45での導光作用が弱められる。また、加飾シート30の法線方向に対して側壁42が大きく傾斜すると、線状要素45の一対の側壁42で反射を繰り返すことが抑制される。すなわち、線状要素45での導光作用が弱められる。このように線状要素45での導光作用が弱められることにより、本来画像が表示されるべき領域の周囲に光が広がることが抑制される。これにより、画像の輪郭の滲みが抑制されると推察される。 If the height of the sidewalls 42 is low, repeated reflection on the pair of sidewalls 42 of the linear element 45 is suppressed. That is, the light guiding action of the linear element 45 is weakened. Further, when the side walls 42 are greatly inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30, repeated reflections on the pair of side walls 42 of the linear element 45 are suppressed. That is, the light guiding action of the linear element 45 is weakened. By weakening the light guiding action of the linear elements 45 in this way, the spread of light around the area where the image should originally be displayed is suppressed. It is presumed that this suppresses blurring of the contour of the image.
 図31A及び図31Bは、このような表面性状を有する線状模様層40の具体例を示している。図31A及び図31Bは、共に、加飾シート30の主切断面にて線状模様層40を示している。図31Aに示された例において、線状模様層40の線状要素45は、点線で示された断面矩形状の線状凸部45A及び線状凹部45Bを面取りした形状を有している。図31Aに示された線状模様層40の線状要素45は、なだらかに湾曲した線状凸部45A又は線状凹部45Bとなっている。図31Aに示された線状模様層40は、樹脂賦形に用いられる版(型)の版面(型面)に樹脂組成物の塗布膜を形成することによって、作製され得る。後述する例のように、樹脂賦形に用いられる版(型)としての樹脂賦型層80の凹凸構造81に樹脂組成物の被覆層72を形成することによって、図31Aに示された線状模様層40は作製され得る。 31A and 31B show specific examples of the linear pattern layer 40 having such surface properties. 31A and 31B both show the linear pattern layer 40 on the main cut surface of the decorative sheet 30. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 31A, the linear element 45 of the linear pattern layer 40 has a shape obtained by chamfering linear protrusions 45A and linear recesses 45B having rectangular cross sections indicated by dotted lines. The linear elements 45 of the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 31A are gently curved linear protrusions 45A or linear recesses 45B. The linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 31A can be produced by forming a coating film of a resin composition on a plate surface (mold surface) of a plate (mold) used for resin shaping. As in the example described later, by forming a coating layer 72 of a resin composition on the concave-convex structure 81 of a resin molding layer 80 as a plate (mold) used for resin molding, the linear shape shown in FIG. 31A is obtained. A patterned layer 40 may be produced.
 図31Bに示された線状模様層40は、図31Aに示された線状模様層40と同様に、点線で示された断面矩形状の線状凸部45A及び線状凹部45Bをなだらかにした形状を有している。さらに、図31Bに示された線状模様層40は、表面に微細な凹凸を有している。微細な凹凸のピッチは、線状要素45の配列ピッチよりも短い。微細な凹凸は、線状要素45の配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に配列されている。微細な凹凸は、線状要素45の長手方向(図示された例において、第1方向D1)にも配列されてもよい。微細な凹凸の高低差は、線状要素45の高低差よりも小さい。図31Bに示された線状模様層40は、版面(型面)をブラスト処理された版(型)を用いた樹脂賦形によって、作製され得る。 In the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 31B, similarly to the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 31A, linear protrusions 45A and linear recesses 45B having rectangular cross sections indicated by dotted lines are smoothly formed. It has a shape. Furthermore, the linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 31B has fine unevenness on the surface. The pitch of fine unevenness is shorter than the arrangement pitch of the linear elements 45 . The fine unevenness is arranged in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). The fine unevenness may also be arranged in the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 (in the illustrated example, the first direction D1). The height difference of the fine unevenness is smaller than the height difference of the linear elements 45 . The linear pattern layer 40 shown in FIG. 31B can be produced by resin shaping using a plate (mold) whose plate surface (mold surface) has been blasted.
 線状模様35を明瞭に表示する観点から、線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったRzに下限を設けてもよい。Rzは、上述にように、JISB0601-1994に準拠した十点平均粗さ(μm)である。線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったRzは、0.5μm以上でもよいし、1.2μm以上でもよい。このようにRzの下限を設けることにより、線状模様35を明瞭に表示できる。 From the viewpoint of clearly displaying the linear pattern 35, a lower limit may be set for Rz along one direction, which is the direction in which the linear elements 45 are arranged. Rz is the ten-point average roughness (μm) conforming to JISB0601-1994, as described above. Rz along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45, may be 0.5 μm or more, or may be 1.2 μm or more. By setting the lower limit of Rz in this manner, the linear pattern 35 can be clearly displayed.
 線状模様35を明瞭に表示する観点から、線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったRaに下限を設けてもよい。粗さRaは、上述にように、JISB0601-1994に準拠した算術平均粗さ(μm)である。線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったRaは、0.2μm以上でもよいし、0.6μm以上でもよい。このようにRaの下限を設けることにより、線状模様35を明瞭に表示できる。 From the viewpoint of clearly displaying the linear pattern 35, a lower limit may be set for Ra along one direction in which the linear elements 45 are arranged. Roughness Ra is the arithmetic mean roughness (μm) conforming to JISB0601-1994, as described above. Ra along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45, may be 0.2 μm or more, or may be 0.6 μm or more. By setting the lower limit of Ra in this manner, the linear pattern 35 can be displayed clearly.
 線状模様35を明瞭に表示する観点から、線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったPVに下限を設けてもよい。PVは、上述にように、JISB0601-1994に準拠した最大谷深さ(μm)である。線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったPVは、0.9μm以上でもよいし、2.2μm以上でもよい。このようにPVの下限を設けることにより、線状模様35を明瞭に表示できる。 From the viewpoint of clearly displaying the linear pattern 35, a lower limit may be set for the PV along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45. PV is the maximum valley depth (μm) conforming to JISB0601-1994, as described above. PV along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45, may be 0.9 μm or more, or may be 2.2 μm or more. By setting the lower limit of the PV in this way, the linear pattern 35 can be clearly displayed.
 線状模様35を明瞭に表示する観点から、線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったrmsに下限を設けてもよい。rmsは、上述にように、JISB0601-1994に準拠した二乗平均粗さ(μm)である。線状要素45の配列方向である一方向に沿ったrmsは、0.2μm以上でもよいし、0.6μm以上でもよい。このようにrmsの下限を設けることにより、線状模様35を明瞭に表示できる。 From the viewpoint of clearly displaying the linear pattern 35, a lower limit may be set for the rms along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45. rms is the root-mean-square roughness (μm) according to JISB0601-1994, as described above. The rms along one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45, may be 0.2 μm or more, or may be 0.6 μm or more. By setting the lower limit of rms in this way, the linear pattern 35 can be clearly displayed.
 画像の輪郭の滲みを抑制する観点から、側壁傾斜角度θに下限を設けてもよい。側壁傾斜角度θは、線状要素45の配列方向に隣り合う線状凸部45A及び線状凹部45Bの間に位置する側壁42の法線方向に対する傾斜角度の大きさを表す指標となる。側壁傾斜角度θに下限を設定することにより、加飾シート30の法線方向に対して側壁42が大きく傾斜する。側壁傾斜角度θに下限を設定することにより、加飾シート30の法線方向に沿った側壁42の高さを低くできる。これらにより、側壁42のレンズ効果を弱めることができ且つ線状要素45での導光作用を弱めることができる。具体的には、側壁傾斜角度θを、66°以上としてもよく、73°以上としてもよく、76°以上としてもよい。 A lower limit may be set for the side wall inclination angle θ from the viewpoint of suppressing blurring of the contour of the image. The sidewall inclination angle θ is an index representing the inclination angle of the sidewalls 42 positioned between the linear protrusions 45A and the linear recesses 45B adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 with respect to the normal direction. By setting the lower limit of the side wall inclination angle θ, the side wall 42 is greatly inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 . By setting the lower limit of the side wall inclination angle θ, the height of the side wall 42 along the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 can be reduced. As a result, the lens effect of the side wall 42 can be weakened, and the light guiding action of the linear element 45 can be weakened. Specifically, the sidewall inclination angle θ may be 66° or more, 73° or more, or 76° or more.
 線状模様35を明瞭に表示する観点から、側壁傾斜角度θに上限を設けてもよい。側壁傾斜角度θは、87°以下でもよい。このように側壁傾斜角度θの上限を設けることにより、線状模様35を明瞭に表示できる。 From the viewpoint of clearly displaying the linear pattern 35, an upper limit may be set for the side wall inclination angle θ. The sidewall inclination angle θ may be 87° or less. By thus setting the upper limit of the sidewall inclination angle θ, the linear pattern 35 can be clearly displayed.
 図31A及び図31Bに示すように、側壁傾斜角度θは、加飾シート30の主切断面における、線状模様層40上となる第1位置P1及び第2位置P2を通過する直線SLと、法線方向D3と、の間の角度(°)である。側壁傾斜角度θは、0°以上90°以下の角度となる。加飾シート30の主切断面は、加飾シートの法線方向と、線状要素45の配列方向である一方向と、の両方に沿った断面である。第1位置P1は、主切断面が横切る線状凸部45Aの最高位置HPと、当該線状凸部45Aに隣り合う線状凹部45Bの最低位置LPとの高低差HDの10%だけ、最高位置HPから低い線状模様層40上の位置である。第2位置P2は、高低差HDの10%だけ最低位置LPから高い線状模様層40上の位置である。 As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the side wall inclination angle θ is determined by a straight line SL passing through a first position P1 and a second position P2 on the linear pattern layer 40 on the main cut surface of the decorative sheet 30, is the angle (°) between the normal direction D3 and The sidewall inclination angle θ is 0° or more and 90° or less. The main cutting plane of the decorative sheet 30 is a cross section along both the normal direction of the decorative sheet and one direction in which the linear elements 45 are arranged. The first position P1 is the highest by 10% of the height difference HD between the highest position HP of the linear protrusion 45A crossed by the main cutting plane and the lowest position LP of the linear recess 45B adjacent to the linear protrusion 45A. It is a position on the linear pattern layer 40 lower than the position HP. The second position P2 is a position on the linear pattern layer 40 higher than the lowest position LP by 10% of the height difference HD.
 第1位置P1は、線状要素45の配列方向である一方向において、最高位置HP及び最低位置LPの間に位置する。高低差HDの10%だけ最高位置HPから低い位置は、線状要素45の配列方向における最高位置HP及び最低位置LPの間に、複数存在し得る。この場合、線状要素45の配列方向において最低位置LPに最も近接した位置が、第1位置P1となる。第2位置P2は、線状要素45の配列方向である一方向において、最高位置HP及び最低位置LPの間に位置する。高低差HDの10%だけ最低位置LPから高い位置は、線状要素45の配列方向における最高位置HP及び最低位置LPの間に、複数存在し得る。この場合、線状要素45の配列方向において最高位置HPに最も近接した位置が、第2位置P2となる。 The first position P1 is positioned between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in one direction, which is the direction in which the linear elements 45 are arranged. A plurality of positions lower than the highest position HP by 10% of the height difference HD may exist between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . In this case, the position closest to the lowest position LP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 is the first position P1. The second position P2 is located between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . A plurality of positions higher than the lowest position LP by 10% of the height difference HD can exist between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . In this case, the position closest to the highest position HP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 is the second position P2.
 線状模様層40の表面性状の指標となる上述のRz、Ra、PV、rmsおよび側壁傾斜角度θは、測定対象となる線状模様層40内における一辺が1076μmである正方形領域の各辺を3等分して九つの小領域に区画し、各小領域の約中央となる位置にて測定した合計九つの測定値の平均値として特定される。Rz、Ra、PV、rmsは、ザイゴ株式会社製の走査型白色干渉計(NewView6300)を用いて測定された値とする。この測定装置における測定領域は1076μm四方とし、うねり成分の除去には、測定装置に設定された「cylinder」を採用する。側壁傾斜角度θは、ザイゴ株式会社製の走査型白色干渉計(New View6300)を用いて計測された線状模様層40の表面形状から、算出される。 The aforementioned Rz, Ra, PV, rms, and side wall inclination angle θ, which serve as indicators of the surface properties of the linear pattern layer 40, are obtained by dividing each side of a square region having a side length of 1076 μm in the linear pattern layer 40 to be measured. It is divided into three equal parts and partitioned into nine small areas, and is specified as the average value of a total of nine measured values measured at approximately the center of each small area. Rz, Ra, PV, and rms are values measured using a scanning white light interferometer (NewView6300) manufactured by Zygo Corporation. The measurement area in this measuring device is 1076 μm square, and the “cylinder” set in the measuring device is used to remove the waviness component. The sidewall inclination angle θ is calculated from the surface shape of the linear pattern layer 40 measured using a scanning white light interferometer (New View 6300) manufactured by Zygo Corporation.
 加飾シート30は、構成要素間の密着性改善を目的として、接合層62を含んでもよい。図2に示された例において、接合層62は、線状模様層40及び意匠層60との密着性を改善している。接合層62は、アクリル樹脂やエキポシ樹脂等の種々の接着材や粘着材を用いて形成され得る。接合層62の厚さは、例えば、1μm以上80μm以下でもよい。接合層62は、省略されてもよい。 The decorative sheet 30 may include a bonding layer 62 for the purpose of improving adhesion between constituent elements. In the example shown in FIG. 2 , the bonding layer 62 improves adhesion between the linear pattern layer 40 and the design layer 60 . The bonding layer 62 can be formed using various adhesives and adhesives such as acrylic resin and epoxy resin. The thickness of the bonding layer 62 may be, for example, 1 μm or more and 80 μm or less. The bonding layer 62 may be omitted.
 第2の実施の形態における加飾シート30は、第1の実施の形態における加飾シート30と同様に、線状模様層以外の層を含んでもよい。加飾シート30は、意匠性を向上させる目的で意匠層60を含んでもよい。第2の実施の形態における意匠層60は、第1の実施の形態で説明した意匠層60と同一でもよい。加飾シート30は、第1の実施の形態で説明した接合層62を含んでもよい。 The decorative sheet 30 in the second embodiment may include layers other than the linear pattern layer, like the decorative sheet 30 in the first embodiment. The decorative sheet 30 may include a design layer 60 for the purpose of improving designability. The design layer 60 in the second embodiment may be the same as the design layer 60 described in the first embodiment. The decorative sheet 30 may include the bonding layer 62 described in the first embodiment.
 次に、加飾部材20及び加飾シート30の製造方法の一例について説明する。まず、加飾シート30の製造に用いられる版90の作製方法について説明する。次に、版90を用いた加飾シート30の作製方法について説明する。その後、加飾シート30から加飾部材20を作製する方法について説明する。 Next, an example of a method for manufacturing the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 will be described. First, a method for manufacturing the plate 90 used for manufacturing the decorative sheet 30 will be described. Next, a method for manufacturing the decorative sheet 30 using the plate 90 will be described. After that, a method for producing the decorative member 20 from the decorative sheet 30 will be described.
 製造対象となる線状模様35に応じた版90を作製する。図32は、版90の一例を示している。版90は、図9に示されたロール版でもよい。版90は、円筒形状の外形状を有する。版90は、円筒形状の中心軸線CAを中心として回転可能に保持される。版90は、円筒形状の外周面に版面91を有する。版面91は、転写すべき線状模様に対応した凹凸面となっている。版面91は、線状模様35を表示する線状模様層40の凹凸構造41に対応した凹凸面となっている。 A plate 90 corresponding to the linear pattern 35 to be manufactured is produced. FIG. 32 shows an example of the plate 90. As shown in FIG. Plate 90 may be the roll plate shown in FIG. The plate 90 has a cylindrical outer shape. The plate 90 is held rotatably around the cylindrical central axis CA. The plate 90 has a plate surface 91 on its cylindrical outer peripheral surface. The plate surface 91 is an uneven surface corresponding to the linear pattern to be transferred. The plate surface 91 is an uneven surface corresponding to the uneven structure 41 of the linear pattern layer 40 displaying the linear pattern 35 .
 図示された例において、版90の版面91は、中心軸線CAと平行な軸方向に配列された複数の版線状要素92を含む。各版線状要素92は、版線状凸部92A又は版線状凹部92Bである。版線状凸部92Aは、中心軸線CAに直交する径方向において中心軸線CAから離れる外側へ突出している。版線状凹部92Bは、中心軸線CAに直交する径方向において中心軸線CAに近接する内側へ凹んでいる。版線状凸部92A及び版線状凹部92Bは軸方向に交互に配置されている。版線状要素92は、中心軸線CAを中心とした円周方向に細長く延びる。 In the illustrated example, the plate surface 91 of the plate 90 includes a plurality of plate linear elements 92 arranged in an axial direction parallel to the central axis CA. Each plate-like element 92 is a plate-like protrusion 92A or a plate-like recess 92B. The plate line-shaped convex portion 92A protrudes outward away from the central axis CA in the radial direction perpendicular to the central axis CA. The stencil-shaped concave portion 92B is recessed inward and close to the central axis CA in the radial direction perpendicular to the central axis CA. The plate linear projections 92A and the plate linear recesses 92B are alternately arranged in the axial direction. The plate-like elements 92 are elongated in the circumferential direction about the central axis CA.
 版90の版面91は、製造対象となる線状模様35に応じて作製される。例えば、画像データを用いた次の方法にて版90を作製してもよい。まず、線状模様35に関する画像データ95を用意する。図10は、画像データ95の一例を示している。図10に示すように、画像データ95は、多階調グレースケール画像データでもよい。多階調グレースケール画像データは、3階調以上のデータである。例えば、製造対象となる線状模様35をグレースケールにてスキャンすることによって、画像データ95を用意できる。画像データ95は、二値化された画像データでもよい。 The plate surface 91 of the plate 90 is manufactured according to the linear pattern 35 to be manufactured. For example, the plate 90 may be produced by the following method using image data. First, image data 95 regarding the linear pattern 35 is prepared. FIG. 10 shows an example of the image data 95. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the image data 95 may be multi-tone grayscale image data. Multi-gradation grayscale image data is data of three or more gradations. For example, the image data 95 can be prepared by scanning the linear pattern 35 to be manufactured in grayscale. The image data 95 may be binarized image data.
 図10に示された画像データ95は、ヘアライン模様に関するデータである。画像データ95の各画素の階調に応じて、当該画素に相当する版90の区域における高さを決定する。これにより、線状模様35の画像データ95と同一の広がりをもった領域内を小さな区域に分割し、且つ、小区域に高さ情報を割り当てることができる。 The image data 95 shown in FIG. 10 is data relating to the hairline pattern. Depending on the gradation of each pixel of the image data 95, the height of the area of the plate 90 corresponding to that pixel is determined. As a result, the area coextensive with the image data 95 of the linear pattern 35 can be divided into small areas, and height information can be assigned to the small areas.
 次に、画像データ95と同一の広がりをもった領域に割り当てられた高さ分布を実現することにより、版90を作製できる。高さ分布は、金属板に凹部を形成することによって実現され得る。高さ分布は、金属板の表面をエッチングすることにより、当該金属板に付与されてもよい。例えば、フォトリソグラフィー技術を用いたエッチングによって凹部を形成することにより、高さ分布を金属板に形成してもよい。形成された凹部が、版面91の各版線状要素92を構成する。高さ分布は、金属板の表面をレーザー描画することにより、当該金属板に付与されてもよい。 Next, the plate 90 can be produced by realizing the height distribution assigned to the area coextensive with the image data 95 . Height distribution can be achieved by forming recesses in the metal plate. The height distribution may be imparted to the metal plate by etching the surface of the metal plate. For example, the height distribution may be formed in the metal plate by forming recesses by etching using a photolithographic technique. The formed recesses constitute each plate linear element 92 of the plate surface 91 . The height distribution may be imparted to the metal plate by laser writing the surface of the metal plate.
 以上のようにして金属板に凹部を形成することによって、版面91の凹凸が作製される。版面91を形成する金属板は銅板でもよい。銅板等の金属板が円柱状コアの外周面に取り付けられることによって、当該金属板が版面91を構成する。銅板の表面は、凹凸面の形成が終了した後、クロムめっき処理されてもよい。 By forming recesses in the metal plate as described above, the unevenness of the plate surface 91 is produced. The metal plate forming the printing plate 91 may be a copper plate. By attaching a metal plate such as a copper plate to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical core, the metal plate constitutes the plate surface 91 . The surface of the copper plate may be chrome plated after the formation of the uneven surface is completed.
 凹部が形成された金属面をブラスト処理してもよい。ブラスト処理は、上述したクロムめっき処理の前に実施される。ブラスト処理を行うことによって、版面91の凹凸をなだらかにすることができ、且つ、版面91に微細な凹凸を形成できる。版面91に付与される微細な凹凸のピッチは、版単位要素93の配列ピッチよりも短くてもよい。版面91に付与される微細な凹凸の高低差は、版線状要素92の高低差よりも小さくてもよい。微細な凹凸の程度は、ブラスト処理に用いられる研磨材の種類、大きさ、形状や、研磨材の噴射条件等によって、調整可能である。版面91に微細な凹凸を付与することにより、図31Bに示すように、線状要素45の表面に微細な凹凸を付与できる。後述するように、線状要素45の微細な凹凸により、線状要素45によるレンズ効果や導光作用を弱めることができる。 You may blast the metal surface on which the concave portion is formed. The blasting treatment is performed before the chrome plating treatment described above. By performing blasting, the unevenness of the plate surface 91 can be smoothed, and fine unevenness can be formed on the plate surface 91 . The pitch of the fine unevenness provided on the plate surface 91 may be shorter than the arrangement pitch of the plate-unit elements 93 . The height difference of the fine unevenness imparted to the plate surface 91 may be smaller than the height difference of the plate linear elements 92 . The degree of fine unevenness can be adjusted by the type, size, and shape of the abrasive used in the blasting process, the ejection conditions of the abrasive, and the like. By imparting fine unevenness to the plate surface 91, fine unevenness can be imparted to the surface of the linear element 45 as shown in FIG. 31B. As will be described later, the fine unevenness of the linear elements 45 can weaken the lens effect and light guiding action of the linear elements 45 .
 以上にようにして、版90が作製される。次に作製された版90を利用して、加飾シート30を作製する。 The plate 90 is produced as described above. Next, using the produced plate 90, the decorative sheet 30 is produced.
 以下に説明する例において、版90を用いて樹脂賦型層80が作製される。樹脂賦型層80には、版面91の凹凸を転写した凹凸構造81が付与される。凹凸構造81は、版面91と相補的な構成を有する。具体的には、次のようにして、樹脂賦型層80が版90を用いて作製されてもよい。 In the example described below, the plate 90 is used to fabricate the resin imprint layer 80 . An uneven structure 81 obtained by transferring the unevenness of the plate surface 91 is provided to the resin imprinting layer 80 . Concavo-convex structure 81 has a configuration complementary to plate surface 91 . Specifically, the resin transfer layer 80 may be produced using the plate 90 as follows.
 中心軸線CAを中心として版90を回転させる。版90に向けて、長尺の基材70を供給する。図32に示すように、基材70及び版90の間に、未硬化の硬化性樹脂組成物を供給する。基材70として、樹脂製のフィルム、例えばポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルムが用いられてもよい。硬化性樹脂組成物として、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物が例示される。電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物として、紫外線硬化性樹脂組成物が例示される。硬化性樹脂組成物は、版90及び基材70の間において、硬化処理される。例えば、基材70を透過した紫外線が、紫外線硬化性樹脂組成物に照射される。硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物により、樹脂賦型層80が作製される。樹脂賦型層80は、基材70に接合している。 The plate 90 is rotated around the central axis CA. A long base material 70 is supplied toward the plate 90 . As shown in FIG. 32, an uncured curable resin composition is supplied between the substrate 70 and the plate 90 . As the substrate 70, a resin film such as a polyethylene terephthalate film may be used. As the curable resin composition, an ionizing radiation curable resin composition is exemplified. As an ionizing radiation curable resin composition, an ultraviolet curable resin composition is exemplified. The curable resin composition is cured between the plate 90 and the substrate 70 . For example, the ultraviolet curable resin composition is irradiated with ultraviolet rays that have passed through the base material 70 . A resin transfer layer 80 is produced from the cured product of the curable resin composition. The resin imprinting layer 80 is bonded to the base material 70 .
 樹脂賦型層80は、版線状要素92に対応した複数の第2線状要素82を含む。第2線状要素82は、版線状要素92に対応して形成される。複数の第2線状要素82は、一方向に配列される。各第2線状要素82は、一方向に直交する他方向に細長く延びる。第2線状要素82は、第2線状凸部82A又は第2線状凹部82Bである。版線状凸部92Aに対応して、第2線状凹部82Bが形成される。版線状凹部92Bに対応して、第2線状凸部82Aが形成される。第2線状凸部82A及び第2線状凹部82Bは、一方向に交互に配置される。 The resin imprint layer 80 includes a plurality of second linear elements 82 corresponding to the plate linear elements 92 . The second linear elements 82 are formed corresponding to the plate linear elements 92 . The plurality of second linear elements 82 are arranged in one direction. Each second linear element 82 elongates in the other direction orthogonal to the one direction. The second linear element 82 is a second linear protrusion 82A or a second linear recess 82B. A second linear concave portion 82B is formed corresponding to the plate linear convex portion 92A. A second linear protrusion 82A is formed corresponding to the plate linear recess 92B. The second linear protrusions 82A and the second linear recesses 82B are alternately arranged in one direction.
 図32に示された例において、基材70は版90の版面91から離れている。樹脂賦型層80は、基材70に接合したシート状のランド部84を含む。ランド部84は、第2線状凸部82Aと一体的に成形されている。ランド部84は、第2線状凹部82Bが設けられた位置において、二つの第2線状凸部82Aの間に露出する。 In the example shown in FIG. 32, the base material 70 is separated from the plate surface 91 of the plate 90. The resin imprint layer 80 includes a sheet-like land portion 84 bonded to the base material 70 . The land portion 84 is formed integrally with the second linear convex portion 82A. The land portion 84 is exposed between the two second linear convex portions 82A at the position where the second linear concave portion 82B is provided.
 その後、図33に示すように、版90から剥がした樹脂賦型層80の版90に接触していた面に、第1樹脂組成物を供給して、第1樹脂組成物の塗膜を形成する。第1樹脂組成物の塗膜を乾燥または硬化することによって、被覆層72を形成する。被覆層72の表面には、樹脂賦型層80の凹凸構造81に対応した凹凸が残っている。被覆層72は、熱可塑性樹脂を含んでもよい。被覆層72は、硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を含んでもよい。硬化性樹脂組成物は、熱硬化性樹脂組成物でもよいし、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物でもよい。被覆層72は、シリコーン等の剥離性を有した材料を含んでもよい。被覆層72が剥離性材料を含むことにより、被覆層72は、離型層73として機能する。ただし、被覆層72の作製を省略して、線状模様層40を樹脂賦型層80上に形成してもよい。 After that, as shown in FIG. 33 , the first resin composition is supplied to the surface of the resin transfer layer 80 peeled off from the plate 90 that was in contact with the plate 90 to form a coating film of the first resin composition. do. The coating layer 72 is formed by drying or curing the coating film of the first resin composition. Concavities and convexities corresponding to the concavo-convex structure 81 of the resin imprinting layer 80 remain on the surface of the coating layer 72 . The coating layer 72 may contain a thermoplastic resin. The coating layer 72 may contain a cured product of a curable resin composition. The curable resin composition may be a thermosetting resin composition or an ionizing radiation curable resin composition. The coating layer 72 may contain a material having releasability such as silicone. The coating layer 72 functions as a release layer 73 by containing the peelable material. However, the production of the coating layer 72 may be omitted and the linear pattern layer 40 may be formed on the resin imprinting layer 80 .
 樹脂賦型層80の凹凸構造81を被覆する被覆層72によれば、図31Aに示すように、樹脂賦型層80の凹凸構造81を転写することによって作製された線状模様層40の凹凸構造41をなだらかにできる。凹凸構造41のなだらかさは、被覆層72の厚み、第1樹脂組成物の粘度、乾燥速度、硬化速度等によって調整され得る。凹凸構造41をなだらかにすることにより、樹脂賦型層80を用いて作製される線状模様層40において、線状要素45によるレンズ効果や導光作用を弱めることができる。被覆層72の厚みは、樹脂賦型層80の凹凸構造81の高低差HDの10%以上でもよく、20%以上でもよく、30%以上でも良く、40%以上でもよい。被覆層72の厚みを凹凸構造81の高低差HDの10%以上とすることにより、線状要素45によるレンズ効果や導光作用を弱めることができる。 According to the coating layer 72 covering the uneven structure 81 of the resin imprinting layer 80, as shown in FIG. The structure 41 can be smoothed. The smoothness of the uneven structure 41 can be adjusted by the thickness of the coating layer 72, the viscosity of the first resin composition, the drying speed, the curing speed, and the like. By smoothing the concave-convex structure 41 , the lens effect and light guiding action of the linear elements 45 can be weakened in the linear pattern layer 40 produced using the resin imprinting layer 80 . The thickness of the coating layer 72 may be 10% or more, 20% or more, 30% or more, or 40% or more of the height difference HD of the uneven structure 81 of the resin molding layer 80 . By setting the thickness of the coating layer 72 to 10% or more of the height difference HD of the uneven structure 81, the lens effect and the light guiding action of the linear elements 45 can be weakened.
 次に、図34に示すように、樹脂賦型層80及び被覆層72上に、第2樹脂組成物を供給して、第2樹脂組成物の塗膜を形成する。第2樹脂組成物は、硬化性樹脂組成物でもよい。硬化性樹脂組成物は、熱硬化性樹脂組成物でもよいし、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物でもよい。電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物として、紫外線硬化性樹脂組成物が例示される。硬化性樹脂組成物は、樹脂賦型層80及び被覆層72上で硬化される。硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物により、線状模様層40が作製される。なお、このタイミングにおける硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化処理は、完全な硬化としてもよいし、半硬化でもよい。このタイミングでの効果処理を半硬化とした場合、後のいずれかタイミングで硬化処理を行ってもよい。作製された線状模様層40は、樹脂賦型層80又は被覆層72に接合している。第2樹脂組成物は、第1の実施の形態で説明した第2樹脂組成物と同一としてもよい。例えば、第2樹脂組成物が、電子線硬化性樹脂組成物と、紫外線吸収剤及び光安定剤の少なくとも一方と、を含んでもよい。 Next, as shown in FIG. 34, a second resin composition is supplied onto the resin imprinting layer 80 and the coating layer 72 to form a coating film of the second resin composition. The second resin composition may be a curable resin composition. The curable resin composition may be a thermosetting resin composition or an ionizing radiation curable resin composition. As an ionizing radiation curable resin composition, an ultraviolet curable resin composition is exemplified. The curable resin composition is cured on the resin transfer layer 80 and the coating layer 72 . The linear pattern layer 40 is produced from the cured product of the curable resin composition. The curing treatment of the curable resin composition at this timing may be complete curing or semi-curing. If the effect treatment at this timing is semi-curing, the curing treatment may be performed at any later timing. The produced linear pattern layer 40 is bonded to the resin imprinting layer 80 or the coating layer 72 . The second resin composition may be the same as the second resin composition described in the first embodiment. For example, the second resin composition may contain an electron beam-curable resin composition and at least one of an ultraviolet absorber and a light stabilizer.
 樹脂賦型層80の凹凸構造81に対応した凹凸構造41が、線状模様層40に付与される。第2線状要素82に対応して、線状模様層40の線状要素45が形成される。第2線状凸部82Aに対応して、線状模様層40の線状凹部45Bが形成される。第2線状凹部82Bに対応して、線状模様層40の線状凸部45Aが形成される。 A concave-convex structure 41 corresponding to the concave-convex structure 81 of the resin molding layer 80 is applied to the linear pattern layer 40 . Linear elements 45 of the linear pattern layer 40 are formed corresponding to the second linear elements 82 . Linear recesses 45B of the linear pattern layer 40 are formed corresponding to the second linear protrusions 82A. Linear protrusions 45A of the linear pattern layer 40 are formed corresponding to the second linear recesses 82B.
 図34に示された例において、硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物によって、ベース部43も形成されている。ベース部43は、線状凸部45Aと一体的に成形されている。ベース部43は、線状凹部45Bが設けられた位置において、二つの線状凸部45Aの間に露出する。 In the example shown in FIG. 34, the base portion 43 is also formed by the cured product of the curable resin composition. The base portion 43 is formed integrally with the linear convex portion 45A. The base portion 43 is exposed between the two linear convex portions 45A at the position where the linear concave portion 45B is provided.
 その後、図35に示すように、線状模様層40に重ねて接合層62が形成される。接合層62は、線状模様層40上に樹脂組成物を供給して当該樹脂組成物の塗膜を形成し、塗膜を乾燥または硬化することによって、作製されてもよい。続いて、図36に示すように、接合層62に重ねて意匠層60を形成する。意匠層60は、グラビア印刷によって形成されてもよい。 After that, as shown in FIG. 35, a bonding layer 62 is formed over the linear pattern layer 40 . The bonding layer 62 may be produced by supplying a resin composition onto the linear pattern layer 40 to form a coating film of the resin composition, and drying or curing the coating film. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36, the design layer 60 is formed over the joining layer 62 . The design layer 60 may be formed by gravure printing.
 以上のようにして、樹脂賦型層80に重ねて加飾シート30が形成される。加飾シート30は、樹脂賦型層80及び被覆層72に接合している。加飾シート30は、樹脂賦型層80とともに、加飾シート積層体25を構成する。図示された例において、加飾シート積層体25は、加飾シート30、被覆層72、樹脂賦型層80及び基材70を、第3方向D3に順に含む。次に、加飾シート30を用いて加飾部材20を作製する。 As described above, the decorative sheet 30 is formed over the resin molding layer 80 . The decorative sheet 30 is bonded to the resin molding layer 80 and the coating layer 72 . The decorative sheet 30 constitutes the decorative sheet laminate 25 together with the resin imprint layer 80 . In the illustrated example, the decorative sheet laminate 25 includes the decorative sheet 30, the coating layer 72, the resin molding layer 80 and the substrate 70 in order in the third direction D3. Next, the decorative member 20 is produced using the decorative sheet 30 .
 図37に示すように、射出成形装置110を準備する。射出成形装置110は成形型111を含む。成形型111は、第1型111A及び第2型111Bを含む。第1型111A及び第2型111Bは、図37に示すように互いから離間でき、図38に示すように互いに接近できる。図38に示すように、第1型111A及び第2型111Bが互いに接触した閉型状態において、第1型111A及び第2型111Bの間にキャビティ112が形成される。成形型111は、キャビティ112に通じるゲート113を有している。ゲート113は、図示しない射出樹脂114の供給装置に接続している。ゲート113を通じてキャビティ112内に、射出樹脂114が供給される。第1型111A及び第2型111Bは、図示しないヒーターによって加熱され、高温に維持されている。 An injection molding device 110 is prepared as shown in FIG. Injection molding apparatus 110 includes mold 111 . Mold 111 includes a first mold 111A and a second mold 111B. The first mold 111A and the second mold 111B can be separated from each other as shown in FIG. 37 and can be close to each other as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 38, a cavity 112 is formed between the first die 111A and the second die 111B in the closed state in which the first die 111A and the second die 111B are in contact with each other. Mold 111 has a gate 113 leading to cavity 112 . The gate 113 is connected to a supply device for the injection resin 114 (not shown). An injection resin 114 is supplied into the cavity 112 through the gate 113 . The first mold 111A and the second mold 111B are heated by a heater (not shown) and maintained at a high temperature.
 図38に示すように、成形型111内のキャビティ112に加飾シート積層体25を収容する。図示された例において、加飾シート30がキャビティ112内に露出するようにして、加飾シート積層体25を第2型111Bに配置する。次に、図39に示すように、溶融した射出樹脂114が、ゲート113を介して、キャビティ112内に射出される。射出樹脂114は、キャビティ112内で冷却され、加飾シート30に溶着して固化する。固化した射出樹脂114から、加飾シート30に接合した熱可塑性樹脂部64が得られる。熱可塑性樹脂部64の材料は、上述した通りである。 As shown in FIG. 38, the decorative sheet laminate 25 is accommodated in the cavity 112 within the molding die 111 . In the illustrated example, the decorative sheet laminate 25 is arranged in the second mold 111B such that the decorative sheet 30 is exposed in the cavity 112. As shown in FIG. Next, as shown in FIG. 39, molten injection resin 114 is injected into cavity 112 through gate 113 . The injected resin 114 is cooled in the cavity 112, welded to the decorative sheet 30 and solidified. The thermoplastic resin portion 64 joined to the decorative sheet 30 is obtained from the solidified injected resin 114 . The material of the thermoplastic resin portion 64 is as described above.
 その後、図40に示すように、第1型111A及び第2型111Bが互いから離れる。熱可塑性樹脂部64は第1型111Aに接合している。一方、基材70は第2型111Bに固定されていてもよい。この例によれば、図40及び図41に示すように、基材70及び樹脂賦型層80は、第1型111A及び第2型111Bが離れることにともない、加飾シート30から剥される。被覆層72が離型層73として機能することにより、剥離が促進される。 After that, as shown in FIG. 40, the first die 111A and the second die 111B are separated from each other. The thermoplastic resin portion 64 is joined to the first mold 111A. On the other hand, the base material 70 may be fixed to the second mold 111B. According to this example, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the base material 70 and the resin transfer layer 80 are separated from the decorative sheet 30 as the first mold 111A and the second mold 111B are separated. . Peeling is promoted by the coating layer 72 functioning as a release layer 73 .
 以上により、加飾シート30及び加飾部材20が製造される。なお、線状模様層40が半硬化状態で作製されている場合、成形型111から取り出された加飾部材20に対し、線状模様層40の硬化処理を行ってよい。接合層62及び意匠層60の少なくとも一方を形成した後に、線状模様層40の硬化処理を行ってよい。また、図29A~図29Dを参照して第1の実施の形態で説明したように、加飾シート積層体25にパターン積層物26を形成してもよい。この例によれば、加飾部材20に凹部27を形成できる、凹部27の寸法等の構成は、第1の実施の形態で説明した寸法等の構成と同一にしてもよい。 As described above, the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 are manufactured. When the linear pattern layer 40 is produced in a semi-cured state, the linear pattern layer 40 may be hardened on the decorative member 20 removed from the mold 111 . After forming at least one of the bonding layer 62 and the design layer 60, the linear pattern layer 40 may be cured. Also, as described in the first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 29A to 29D, the pattern laminate 26 may be formed on the decorative sheet laminate 25. FIG. According to this example, the configuration such as the dimensions of the recess 27 that can form the recess 27 in the decorative member 20 may be the same as the configuration such as the dimension described in the first embodiment.
 図示された表示システム10の作用について説明する。 The operation of the illustrated display system 10 will be described.
 光源装置12又は表示装置16が非動作状態にある場合、第1の実施の形態と同様の作用効果が得られる。すなわち、線状模様層40が線状模様35を表示する。線状模様は、ヘアライン模様、スピン模様、木目模様、又は織物模様でもよい。意匠層60や意匠を表示してもよい。 When the light source device 12 or the display device 16 is in a non-operating state, the same effects as in the first embodiment are obtained. That is, the linear pattern layer 40 displays the linear pattern 35 . The linear pattern may be a hairline pattern, a spin pattern, a wood grain pattern, or a woven pattern. The design layer 60 and the design may be displayed.
 光源装置12が動作状態において点灯すると、第1の実施の形態と同様の作用効果が得られる。光源装置12及び遮光パターンシート66の組合せにより、透過領域66bの形状に対応した形状を有する画像を表示できる。表示装置16は、観察者によって観察される画像を表示する。 When the light source device 12 is turned on in the operating state, the same effect as in the first embodiment is obtained. By combining the light source device 12 and the light shielding pattern sheet 66, an image having a shape corresponding to the shape of the transmissive area 66b can be displayed. A display device 16 displays an image to be viewed by an observer.
 第1の実施の形態で言及したように、従来の表示システム、加飾部材、及び加飾シートでは、図45に示すように、画像の輪郭に滲み101が生じた。滲み101が生じると、画像の輪郭が不明瞭となり、画像がぼける。従来の加飾シートは、シャープな画像を表示できない。 As mentioned in the first embodiment, in the conventional display system, decorative member, and decorative sheet, bleeding 101 occurred in the outline of the image, as shown in FIG. When bleeding 101 occurs, the outline of the image becomes unclear and the image becomes blurred. Conventional decorative sheets cannot display sharp images.
 本件発明者等が鋭意検討を重ねたところ、次の事項が滲み101の発生要因の一つであると推定された。従来の加飾シートにおいて、線状要素は、加飾シートの法線方向に切り立った側壁を有する。樹脂賦型により作製された加飾シートでは、側壁の外輪郭は、僅かに傾斜し且つ曲面状となる。この結果、側壁は、当該側壁を介して線状要素から放出される光に対し、レンズ効果を及ぼし得る。側壁でのレンズ効果によって、線状要素から配列方向へ出射する光が或る程度集光され、画像100に対して線状要素の配列方向に広がる滲み101として観察され得ると推察された。 As a result of extensive studies by the inventors, it was estimated that the following matter is one of the causes of bleeding 101. In the conventional decorative sheet, the linear elements have steep side walls in the normal direction of the decorative sheet. In the decorative sheet produced by resin molding, the outer contour of the side wall is slightly inclined and curved. As a result, the sidewalls can exert a lens effect on the light emitted from the linear element through the sidewalls. It was presumed that the light emitted from the linear elements in the arrangement direction is condensed to some extent by the lens effect on the side wall, and can be observed as blurring 101 spreading in the arrangement direction of the linear elements with respect to the image 100 .
 各線状要素は配列方向に対面する一対の側壁を含む。側壁が法線方向に立ち上がっていると、線状要素内を進む光は、側壁において反射、とりわけ全反射を、繰り返し得る。このようにして、画像光が、線状要素の長手方向に線状要素内を進む。線状要素での導光作用によって、線状要素に沿って画像光が広がり、画像100に対して線状要素の長手方向に広がる滲み101として観察され得ると推察された。 Each linear element includes a pair of side walls that face each other in the arrangement direction. If the sidewalls rise in the normal direction, the light traveling through the linear element can repeatedly reflect, especially total internal reflection, at the sidewalls. In this way, the image light travels through the linear element in the longitudinal direction of the linear element. It was speculated that the image light spreads along the linear element due to the light guide action in the linear element, and can be observed as blurring 101 that spreads in the longitudinal direction of the linear element with respect to the image 100 .
 第2の実施の形態の加飾シート30において、線状模様層40は複数の線状要素45を含む。複数の線状要素45は、一方向である配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に配置されている。各線状要素45は、一方向に直交する他方向である長手方向(図示された例において、第1方向D1)に延びる。JISB0601-1994に規定された十点平均粗さRzであって、線状要素45の配列方向に沿った十点平均粗さRzは、3.2μm以下でもよいし、2.5μm以下でもよいし、2.4μm以下でもよい。 In the decorative sheet 30 of the second embodiment, the linear pattern layer 40 includes multiple linear elements 45 . The plurality of linear elements 45 are arranged in one arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). Each linear element 45 extends in the longitudinal direction (the first direction D1 in the illustrated example) that is the other direction orthogonal to the one direction. The ten-point average roughness Rz defined in JISB0601-1994, and the ten-point average roughness Rz along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 3.2 μm or less, or 2.5 μm or less. , 2.4 μm or less.
 十点平均粗さRzの上限が規定された表面性状を有する線状模様層40では、線状要素45の側壁の高さが制限される。また、Rzの上限が規定された表面性状を有する線状模様層40では、加飾シート30の法線方向に対して側壁42が大きく傾斜し易くなる。これらにより、線状要素45が画像光を集光して線状要素45の配列方向に誘導することが抑制される。すなわち、画像光に対する線状要素45の側壁でのレンズ効果が弱められる。これにより、線状要素45の配列方向に画像100から広がる滲み101の発生を抑制できる。線状要素45の配列方向を向く画像100の輪郭を明瞭にできる。 In the linear pattern layer 40 having a surface texture for which the upper limit of the ten-point average roughness Rz is specified, the height of the sidewalls of the linear elements 45 is restricted. In addition, in the linear pattern layer 40 having a surface texture for which the upper limit of Rz is defined, the sidewalls 42 tend to be greatly inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 . These prevent the linear elements 45 from condensing the image light and guiding it in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . That is, the lens effect on the side wall of the linear element 45 with respect to the image light is weakened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bleeding 101 that spreads from the image 100 in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . The outline of the image 100 facing the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 can be made clear.
 また、加飾シート30の法線方向に対して側壁42が大きく傾斜すると、線状要素45の一対の側壁で反射を繰り返すことが抑制される。線状要素45の側壁42の高さが制限されることによっても、線状要素45の一対の側壁で反射を繰り返すことが抑制される。すなわち、一対の側壁間で反射を繰り返すことに起因した線状要素45での導光作用が弱められる。これにより、線状要素45の長手方向に画像100から広がる滲み101の発生を抑制できる。線状要素45の長手方向を向く画像100の輪郭を明瞭にできる。 Further, when the side walls 42 are greatly inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30, repeated reflections on the pair of side walls of the linear elements 45 are suppressed. By restricting the height of the sidewalls 42 of the linear element 45, repeated reflections on the pair of sidewalls of the linear element 45 are also suppressed. In other words, the light guiding action of the linear element 45 due to repeated reflection between the pair of side walls is weakened. This can suppress the occurrence of blurring 101 spreading from the image 100 in the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 . The outline of the image 100 facing the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 can be clarified.
 以上のように線状要素45の配列方向に沿ったRzに上限を設定するとともに、JISB0601-1994に規定されたRaに上限を設定してもよい。この場合、滲みをより効果的に抑制できる。線状要素45の配列方向に沿ったRaは、1.4μm以下でもよいし、1.1μm以下でもよいし、0.9μm以下でもよい。このようにRzとともにRaを調整することによっても滲みを抑制できる。 As described above, an upper limit may be set for Rz along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 and an upper limit for Ra defined in JISB0601-1994. In this case, bleeding can be suppressed more effectively. Ra along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 1.4 μm or less, 1.1 μm or less, or 0.9 μm or less. Bleeding can also be suppressed by adjusting Ra together with Rz in this way.
 線状要素45の配列方向に沿ったRzに上限を設定するとともに、JISB0601-1994に規定されたPVに上限を設定してもよい。線状要素45の配列方向に沿ったPVは、4.7μm以下でもよいし、3.9μm以下でもよいし、3.8μm以下でもよい。このようにRzとともにPVを調整することによっても滲みを抑制できる。 An upper limit may be set for Rz along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 and an upper limit for PV defined in JISB0601-1994. The PV along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 4.7 μm or less, 3.9 μm or less, or 3.8 μm or less. Bleeding can also be suppressed by adjusting PV together with Rz in this way.
 線状要素45の配列方向に沿ったRzに上限を設定するとともに、JISB0601-1994に規定されたrmsに上限を設定してもよい。線状要素45の配列方向に沿ったrmsは、1.5μm以下でもよいし、1.2m以下でもよいし、1.1μm以下でもよい。このようにRzとともにrmsを調整することによっても滲みを抑制できる。 An upper limit may be set for Rz along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45, and an upper limit may be set for rms defined in JISB0601-1994. The rms along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 1.5 μm or less, 1.2 m or less, or 1.1 μm or less. Bleeding can also be suppressed by adjusting rms together with Rz in this way.
 また、第2の実施の形態の加飾シート30において、線状模様層40は複数の線状要素45を含む。複数の線状要素45は、一方向である配列方向(図示された例において、第2方向D2)に配置されている。各線状要素45は、一方向に直交する他方向である長手方向(図示された例において、第1方向D1)に延びる。複数の線状要素45は、配列方向に交互に配置された線状凸部45A及び線状凹部45Bを含む。配列方向に隣り合う線状凸部45A及び線状凹部45Bを横切る主切断面にて特定される側壁傾斜角度θは、66°以上でもよく、73°以上でもよく、76°以上でよい。 Further, in the decorative sheet 30 of the second embodiment, the linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45. The plurality of linear elements 45 are arranged in one arrangement direction (the second direction D2 in the illustrated example). Each linear element 45 extends in the longitudinal direction (the first direction D1 in the illustrated example) that is the other direction orthogonal to the one direction. The plurality of linear elements 45 includes linear protrusions 45A and linear recesses 45B alternately arranged in the arrangement direction. A side wall inclination angle θ specified by a main cutting plane crossing linear protrusions 45A and linear recesses 45B adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction may be 66° or more, 73° or more, or 76° or more.
 図31A及び図31Bに示すように、側壁傾斜角度θは、加飾シート30の主切断面における、線状模様層40上となる第1位置P1及び第2位置P2を通過する直線SLと、法線方向D3と、の間の角度(°)である。側壁傾斜角度θは、0°以上90°以下の角度となる。加飾シート30の主切断面は、加飾シートの法線方向と、線状要素45の配列方向と、の両方に沿った断面である。第1位置P1は、主切断面が横切る線状凸部45Aの最高位置HPと、当該線状凸部45Aに隣り合う線状凹部45Bの最低位置LPとの高低差HDの10%だけ、最高位置HPから低い線状模様層40上の位置である。第2位置P2は、高低差HDの10%だけ最低位置LPから高い線状模様層40上の位置である。 As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the side wall inclination angle θ is determined by a straight line SL passing through a first position P1 and a second position P2 on the linear pattern layer 40 on the main cut surface of the decorative sheet 30, is the angle (°) between the normal direction D3 and The sidewall inclination angle θ is 0° or more and 90° or less. The main cutting plane of the decorative sheet 30 is a cross section along both the normal direction of the decorative sheet and the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . The first position P1 is the highest by 10% of the height difference HD between the highest position HP of the linear protrusion 45A crossed by the main cutting plane and the lowest position LP of the linear recess 45B adjacent to the linear protrusion 45A. It is a position on the linear pattern layer 40 lower than the position HP. The second position P2 is a position on the linear pattern layer 40 higher than the lowest position LP by 10% of the height difference HD.
 第1位置P1は、線状要素45の配列方向である一方向において、最高位置HP及び最低位置LPの間に位置する。高低差HDの10%だけ最高位置HPから低い位置は、線状要素45の配列方向における最高位置HP及び最低位置LPの間に、複数存在し得る。この場合、線状要素45の配列方向において最低位置LPに最も近接した位置が、第1位置P1となる。第2位置P2は、線状要素45の配列方向である一方向において、最高位置HP及び最低位置LPの間に位置する。高低差HDの10%だけ最低位置LPから高い位置は、線状要素45の配列方向における最高位置HP及び最低位置LPの間に、複数存在し得る。この場合、線状要素45の配列方向において最高位置HPに最も近接した位置が、第2位置P2となる。 The first position P1 is positioned between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in one direction, which is the direction in which the linear elements 45 are arranged. A plurality of positions lower than the highest position HP by 10% of the height difference HD may exist between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . In this case, the position closest to the lowest position LP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 is the first position P1. The second position P2 is located between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in one direction, which is the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . A plurality of positions higher than the lowest position LP by 10% of the height difference HD can exist between the highest position HP and the lowest position LP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . In this case, the position closest to the highest position HP in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 is the second position P2.
 このように特定される側壁傾斜角度θが66°以上であると、線状要素45の側壁が加飾部材20の法線方向に対して大きく傾斜する。また、側壁傾斜角度θが66°以上であると、加飾シート30の法線方向に沿った側壁42の高さを低くできる。これらにより、線状要素45が画像光を集光して線状要素45の配列方向に誘導することが抑制される。すなわち、画像光に対する線状要素45の側壁でのレンズ効果が弱められる。これにより、線状要素45の配列方向に画像100から広がる滲み101の発生を抑制できる。線状要素45の配列方向を向く画像100の輪郭を明瞭にできる。 When the sidewall inclination angle θ specified in this way is 66° or more, the sidewall of the linear element 45 is greatly inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative member 20 . Further, when the side wall inclination angle θ is 66° or more, the height of the side wall 42 along the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30 can be reduced. These prevent the linear elements 45 from condensing the image light and guiding it in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . That is, the lens effect on the side wall of the linear element 45 with respect to the image light is weakened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bleeding 101 that spreads from the image 100 in the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 . The outline of the image 100 facing the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 can be made clear.
 また、また、加飾シート30の法線方向に対して側壁42が大きく傾斜すると、線状要素45の一対の側壁で反射を繰り返すことが抑制される。線状要素45の側壁42の高さが制限されることによっても、線状要素45の一対の側壁で反射を繰り返すことが抑制される。側壁傾斜角度θが66°以上であることにより、一対の側壁間で反射を繰り返すことに起因した線状要素45での導光作用が弱められる。これにより、線状要素45の長手方向に画像100から広がる滲み101の発生を抑制できる。線状要素45の長手方向を向く画像100の輪郭を明瞭にできる。 Further, when the side walls 42 are greatly inclined with respect to the normal direction of the decorative sheet 30, repeated reflections on the pair of side walls of the linear elements 45 are suppressed. By restricting the height of the sidewalls 42 of the linear element 45, repeated reflections on the pair of sidewalls of the linear element 45 are also suppressed. When the side wall inclination angle θ is 66° or more, the light guiding action of the linear element 45 caused by repeated reflection between the pair of side walls is weakened. This can suppress the occurrence of blurring 101 spreading from the image 100 in the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 . The outline of the image 100 facing the longitudinal direction of the linear element 45 can be clarified.
 以上により、第2の実施の形態による加飾シート30によれば、光源装置12又は表示装置16の動作状態において、画像の輪郭が滲むことを抑制できる。これにより、画像の輪郭が明瞭となり、画像の輪郭のぼけを抑制できる。表示システム10はシャープな画像を表示できる。 As described above, according to the decorative sheet 30 according to the second embodiment, blurring of the outline of the image can be suppressed in the operating state of the light source device 12 or the display device 16 . As a result, the outline of the image becomes clear, and blurring of the outline of the image can be suppressed. Display system 10 is capable of displaying sharp images.
 滲み101を抑制する観点から、図31Bに示すように、線状模様層40の表面に微細な凹凸を形成してもよい。図31Bに示すように、線状要素45の表面に微細な凹凸を付与することによれば、線状要素によるレンズ効果や導光作用を効果的に弱めることができる。 From the viewpoint of suppressing bleeding 101, fine unevenness may be formed on the surface of the linear pattern layer 40 as shown in FIG. 31B. As shown in FIG. 31B, by providing fine unevenness to the surface of the linear element 45, the lens effect and light guiding action of the linear element can be effectively weakened.
 一方、線状模様35を明瞭に表示する観点から、線状要素45の側壁の高さに下限を設定してもよい。この観点から、JISB0601-1994に規定されたRzであって、線状要素45の配列方向に沿ったRzは、0.5μm以上でもよいし、1.2μm以上でもよい。このようにRzに下限を設けることにより、線状模様35を明瞭に表示できる。 On the other hand, from the viewpoint of clearly displaying the linear pattern 35, a lower limit may be set for the height of the sidewalls of the linear elements 45. From this point of view, the Rz defined in JISB0601-1994 along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 0.5 μm or more, or may be 1.2 μm or more. By thus setting a lower limit for Rz, the linear pattern 35 can be clearly displayed.
 JISB0601-1994に規定されたRaであって、線状要素45の配列方向に沿ったRaは、0.2μm以上でもよいし、0.6μm以上でもよい。このようにRaに下限を設けることにより、線状模様35を明瞭に表示できる。 Ra defined in JISB0601-1994, and Ra along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 0.2 μm or more, or 0.6 μm or more. By thus setting a lower limit for Ra, the linear pattern 35 can be displayed clearly.
 JISB0601-1994に規定されたPVであって、線状要素45の配列方向に沿ったPVは、0.9μm以上でもよいし、2.2μm以上でもよい。このようにPVに下限を設けることにより、線状模様35を明瞭に表示できる。 The PV defined in JISB0601-1994, and the PV along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 0.9 μm or more, or may be 2.2 μm or more. By thus setting the lower limit of the PV, the linear pattern 35 can be displayed clearly.
 JISB0601-1994に規定されたrmsであって、線状要素45の配列方向に沿ったrmsは、0.2μm以上でもよいし、0.6μm以上でもよい。このようにrmsに下限を設けることにより、線状模様35を明瞭に表示できる。 The rms defined in JISB0601-1994 and the rms along the arrangement direction of the linear elements 45 may be 0.2 μm or more, or may be 0.6 μm or more. By setting the lower limit of rms in this way, the linear pattern 35 can be clearly displayed.
 線状模様35を明瞭に表示する観点から、側壁傾斜角度θに上限を設定してもよい。側壁傾斜角度θは、87°以下でもよい。このように側壁傾斜角度θに上限を設けることにより、線状模様35を明瞭に表示できる。 From the viewpoint of clearly displaying the linear pattern 35, an upper limit may be set for the side wall inclination angle θ. The sidewall inclination angle θ may be 87° or less. By thus setting an upper limit for the side wall inclination angle θ, the linear pattern 35 can be clearly displayed.
 以上に説明してきた第2の実施の形態において、加飾シート30は線状模様層40を含む。線状模様層40は複数の線状要素45を含む。複数の線状要素45は一方向に配置されている。各線状要素45は、一方向に直交する他方向に延びる。加飾シート30の全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である。JISB0601-1994に規定されたRzであって、一方向に沿ったRzは、3.2μm以下である。このようなRzを有する線状模様層40によれば、線状要素45による導光作用やレンズ効果を抑制できる。画像100の輪郭が滲むことを抑制できる。したがって、加飾シート30を用いることによって、シャープな画像を表示できる。 In the second embodiment described above, the decorative sheet 30 includes the linear pattern layer 40. Linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 . A plurality of linear elements 45 are arranged in one direction. Each linear element 45 extends in the other direction perpendicular to the one direction. The total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30 is 5% or more and 90% or less. Rz defined in JISB0601-1994, and Rz along one direction is 3.2 μm or less. According to the linear pattern layer 40 having such Rz, it is possible to suppress the light guiding action and lens effect of the linear elements 45 . It is possible to suppress blurring of the contour of the image 100 . Therefore, by using the decorative sheet 30, a sharp image can be displayed.
 以上に説明してきた第2の実施の形態において、加飾シート30は線状模様層40を含む。線状模様層40は複数の線状要素45を含む。複数の線状要素45は一方向に配置されている。各線状要素45は、一方向に直交する他方向に延びる。複数の線状要素45は、一方向に交互に配置された線状凸部45A及び線状凹部45Bを含む。加飾シート30の全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である。一方向に隣り合う線状凸部45A及び線状凹部45Bを横切る主切断面にて特定される側壁傾斜角度θは66°以上である。このような側壁傾斜角度θを有する線状模様層40によれば、線状要素45による導光作用やレンズ効果を抑制できる。画像100の輪郭が滲むことを抑制できる。したがって、加飾シート30を用いることによって、シャープな画像を表示できる。 In the second embodiment described above, the decorative sheet 30 includes the linear pattern layer 40. Linear pattern layer 40 includes a plurality of linear elements 45 . A plurality of linear elements 45 are arranged in one direction. Each linear element 45 extends in the other direction perpendicular to the one direction. The plurality of linear elements 45 includes linear protrusions 45A and linear recesses 45B alternately arranged in one direction. The total light transmittance of the decorative sheet 30 is 5% or more and 90% or less. A side wall inclination angle θ specified by a main cutting plane crossing the linear convex portion 45A and the linear concave portion 45B adjacent to each other in one direction is 66° or more. According to the linear pattern layer 40 having such a side wall inclination angle θ, it is possible to suppress the light guiding action and lens effect of the linear elements 45 . It is possible to suppress blurring of the contour of the image 100 . Therefore, by using the decorative sheet 30, a sharp image can be displayed.
 具体例を参照しながら第2の実施の形態を説明してきたが、上述の具体例が第2の実施の形態を限定しない。上述した一実施の形態は、その他の様々な具体例で実施でき、その要旨を逸脱しない範囲で、種々の省略、変更、追加等を行うことができる。 Although the second embodiment has been described with reference to specific examples, the above specific examples do not limit the second embodiment. The embodiment described above can be implemented in various other specific examples, and various omissions, changes, additions, etc. can be made without departing from the scope of the invention.
 以下、図面を参照しながら、変形の一例について説明する。以下の説明および以下の説明で用いる図面では、上述した具体例と同様に構成され得る部分について、上述の具体例における対応する部分に対して用いた符号と同一の符号を用い、重複する説明を省略する。 An example of deformation will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following description and the drawings used in the following description, the same reference numerals as those used for the corresponding portions in the above-described specific example are used for portions that can be configured in the same manner as in the above-described specific example, and redundant description is omitted. omitted.
 加飾シート30及び加飾部材20の層構成は、種々の変形が可能である。例えば、接合層62及び意匠層60のいずれか一方を、加飾シート30から省略してもよい。図42に示すように、加飾シート30が遮光パターンシート66を含んでもよい。図43及び図44に示すように、加飾シート30及び加飾部材20から遮光パターンシート66を省略してもよい。図示を省略するが、線状模様層40は、加飾部材20又は加飾シート30の最表面を形成する保護層を含んでもよい。線状模様層40は、上述してきた複数の線状要素を含む凹凸ベース層と、凹凸ベース層に積層された保護層と、を含んでもよい。保護層は、凹凸ベース層の凹凸面に沿って薄く形成されてもよい。保護層は、凹凸ベース層との間に屈折率界面を形成するようにして、凹凸ベース層の凹凸面を埋めるように設けられてもよい。保護層は、硬化型樹脂組成物の硬化物を含むハードコート層でもよい。加飾シート30及び加飾部材20に含まれる構成要素の配置も適宜変更可能である。 Various modifications of the layer structure of the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 are possible. For example, either one of the bonding layer 62 and the design layer 60 may be omitted from the decorative sheet 30 . As shown in FIG. 42, the decorative sheet 30 may include a light shielding pattern sheet 66. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the light shielding pattern sheet 66 may be omitted from the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20. FIG. Although illustration is omitted, the linear pattern layer 40 may include a protective layer forming the outermost surface of the decorative member 20 or the decorative sheet 30 . The linear pattern layer 40 may include a concavo-convex base layer containing the plurality of linear elements described above, and a protective layer laminated on the concavo-convex base layer. The protective layer may be thinly formed along the uneven surface of the uneven base layer. The protective layer may be provided so as to fill the uneven surface of the uneven base layer so as to form a refractive index interface with the uneven base layer. The protective layer may be a hard coat layer containing a cured product of a curable resin composition. The arrangement of the components included in the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 can also be changed as appropriate.
 他の変形例として、第1の実施の形態で説明した変形例を第2の実施の形態に適用してもよい。例えば、加飾シート30及び加飾部材20の配置や、加飾シート30及び加飾部材20に含まれる構成要素の配置も適宜変更可能である。加飾部材20や加飾シート30を、第3方向D3において逆向きに配置してもよい。図43や図44に示すように、光源装置12又は表示装置16に加飾シート30が重ねられることで、表示システム10が構成されてもよい。図27に示すように、加飾部材20及び加飾シート30は、立体形状、言い換えると三次元形状を有してもよい。真空成形や圧空成形等の予備成形された加飾シート30を、インサート成形することによって、三次元形状を有する加飾部材20を作製してもよい。加飾シート30をインモールド成形に用いてもよい。加飾シート30をTOM成形に用いてもよい。射出成形で作製される熱可塑性樹脂部64は、立体的形状、言い換えると三次元形状を有してもよい。樹脂賦型層80を作製することなく、版90から加飾シート30を直接製造してもよい。すなわち、樹脂賦型層80が線状模様層40を構成してもよい。 As another modified example, the modified example described in the first embodiment may be applied to the second embodiment. For example, the arrangement of the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 and the arrangement of the components included in the decorative sheet 30 and the decorative member 20 can be changed as appropriate. The decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 may be arranged in the opposite direction in the third direction D3. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 , the display system 10 may be configured by stacking the decorative sheet 30 on the light source device 12 or the display device 16 . As shown in FIG. 27, the decorative member 20 and the decorative sheet 30 may have a three-dimensional shape, in other words, a three-dimensional shape. The decorating member 20 having a three-dimensional shape may be produced by insert-molding the preformed decorating sheet 30 by vacuum forming, pressure forming, or the like. The decorative sheet 30 may be used for in-mold molding. The decorative sheet 30 may be used for TOM molding. The thermoplastic resin part 64 produced by injection molding may have a three-dimensional shape, in other words, a three-dimensional shape. The decorative sheet 30 may be directly manufactured from the plate 90 without forming the resin imprinting layer 80 . That is, the resin imprint layer 80 may constitute the linear pattern layer 40 .
<第2の実施の形態の実施例>
 以下、実施例を用いて第2の実施の形態をより詳細に説明するが、第2の実施の形態はこの実施例に限定されるものではない。
<Example of Second Embodiment>
The second embodiment will be described in more detail below using examples, but the second embodiment is not limited to these examples.
 実施例11~17に係る加飾シート及び比較例11に係る加飾シートを作製した。実施例11~17及び比較例11に係る加飾シートは、図43に示された加飾シートと同様に、意匠層、接合層及び線状模様層を有していた。 A decorative sheet according to Examples 11 to 17 and a decorative sheet according to Comparative Example 11 were produced. The decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11 had a design layer, a bonding layer and a linear pattern layer, like the decorative sheet shown in FIG.
 実施例および比較例において、版を作製し、この版を用いて基材及び樹脂賦型層の積層体を作製し、この積層体から加飾シート積層体を作製し、加飾シート積層体から基材及び樹脂賦型層を剥がすことによって、加飾シートを製造した。 In Examples and Comparative Examples, a plate was prepared, a laminate of a base material and a resin imprinting layer was prepared using this plate, a decorative sheet laminate was prepared from this laminate, and a decorative sheet laminate was prepared from the laminate. A decorative sheet was produced by peeling off the base material and the resin imprinting layer.
 版の作製は、上述の製造方法を採用した。画像データを共通する製造対象のヘアライン模様とし、このヘアライン模様はデザイナーが作製した。製造対象となるヘアライン模様は、100mm×100mmの寸法を有していた。製造対象となるヘアライン模様において、線状要素はヘアライン模様の全長、すなわち100mmに亘って延びていた。線状要素の配列方向に沿った幅は、20μm程度であった。 The production method described above was used to make the plate. The image data was used as a common hairline pattern to be manufactured, and this hairline pattern was created by a designer. The hairline pattern to be manufactured had dimensions of 100 mm×100 mm. In the hairline pattern to be manufactured, the linear elements extended over the entire length of the hairline pattern, that is, 100 mm. The width along the arrangement direction of the linear elements was about 20 μm.
 実施例11~13に係る加飾シートの製造に用いた版については、ブラスト処理を行った。実施例11~13に係る加飾シートの製造には、ブラスト処理の程度が異なる別の版を用いた。実施例14~17及び比較例11に係る加飾シートの製造に用いた版については、ブラスト処理は行っていない。実施例14~17及び比較例11に係る加飾シートの製造には、共通する版を用いた。ブラスト処理を除き、版の製造条件は、実施例11~17及び比較例11に係る加飾シートの間で共通とした。 The plates used for manufacturing the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 13 were subjected to blasting. Different plates with different degrees of blasting were used to manufacture the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 13. The plates used for manufacturing the decorative sheets according to Examples 14 to 17 and Comparative Example 11 were not subjected to blasting. A common plate was used for manufacturing the decorative sheets according to Examples 14 to 17 and Comparative Example 11. Except for the blasting process, the plate manufacturing conditions were the same for the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11.
 実施例14~17及び比較例11に係る加飾シートの製造に用いた版において、版面に形成された版線状要素による凹凸構造の高低差は、5μm程度であった。実施例11~13に係る加飾シートの製造に用いた版は、ブラスト処理前の状態において、版面に形成された版線状要素による凹凸構造の高低差は、5μm程度であった。 In the plates used to manufacture the decorative sheets according to Examples 14 to 17 and Comparative Example 11, the height difference of the concave-convex structure due to the plate linear elements formed on the plate surface was about 5 μm. Before the blasting process, the plates used for producing the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 13 had a height difference of about 5 μm in the concave-convex structure due to the plate linear elements formed on the plate surface.
 版を用いた基材及び樹脂賦型層を含む積層体の製造は、図32及び図33を参照して説明した上述の製造方法を採用した。基材として、実施例11~17及び比較例11に係る加飾シートの間で共通するポリエチレンテレフタレート製フィルムを用いた。樹脂賦型層は、実施例11~17及び比較例11に係る加飾シートの間で同一の紫外線硬化性樹脂を用いて作製した。 The above-described manufacturing method described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33 was adopted for manufacturing the laminate including the base material and the resin transfer layer using a plate. As a substrate, a polyethylene terephthalate film common to the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11 was used. The same UV curable resin was used for the resin imprinting layers of the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11.
 実施例11~13及び比較例11に係る加飾シートの製造において、図33を参照して説明した被覆層を用いなかった。実施例14~17に係る加飾シートの製造において、図33を参照して説明した被覆層を用いた。実施例14~17に係る加飾シートの間で、被覆層の厚みは異なっていた。被覆層は、熱硬化性樹脂を用いて作製した。 In manufacturing the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 13 and Comparative Example 11, the coating layer described with reference to FIG. 33 was not used. In manufacturing the decorative sheets according to Examples 14 to 17, the coating layer described with reference to FIG. 33 was used. The decorative sheets according to Examples 14 to 17 differed in the thickness of the coating layer. The coating layer was produced using a thermosetting resin.
 加飾シート積層体の製造は、図34~図36を参照して説明した製造方法を採用した。実施例11~17及び比較例11に係る加飾シートの間で、線状模様層、接合層及び意匠層の製造方法および製造条件は共通とした。線状模様層は、紫外線硬化性樹脂を用いて作製した。接合層は、熱可塑性樹脂を用いて作製した。意匠層は、印刷により作製した。 The manufacturing method described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36 was adopted for manufacturing the decorative sheet laminate. The decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11 used the same manufacturing method and manufacturing conditions for the linear pattern layer, the bonding layer, and the design layer. The linear pattern layer was produced using an ultraviolet curable resin. The joining layer was produced using a thermoplastic resin. The design layer was produced by printing.
<比較例11>
 上述のとおり、比較例11において、図9及び図10を参照して説明した方法により版を作製し、次に図32を参照して説明した方法により基材及び樹脂賦型層の積層体を作製し、その後図34~図36を参照して説明した方法により加飾シート積層体を作製し、次に加飾シート積層体から基材及び樹脂賦型層を剥がすことによって、加飾シートが製造された。版の製造においてブラスト処理を用いていない。加飾シートの製造において被覆層を用いなかった。
<Comparative Example 11>
As described above, in Comparative Example 11, a plate was produced by the method described with reference to FIGS. After that, a decorative sheet laminate is produced by the method described with reference to FIGS. manufactured. No blasting is used in plate manufacture. No coating layer was used in the production of the decorative sheet.
<実施例11~13>
 実施例11~13に係る加飾シートの製造方法は、版の製造方法がブラスト処理を含む点のみにおいて、比較例11に係る加飾シートの製造方法と異なった。ブラスト処理を除き、実施例11~13に係る加飾シートは、比較例11に係る加飾シートと、同一の製造方法及び同一の製造条件を採用した。
<Examples 11 to 13>
The decorative sheet manufacturing methods of Examples 11 to 13 differed from the decorative sheet manufacturing method of Comparative Example 11 only in that the plate manufacturing method included blasting. Except for the blasting treatment, the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 13 employ the same manufacturing method and the same manufacturing conditions as the decorative sheet according to Comparative Example 11.
 実施例11~13に係る加飾シートの間で、ブラスト処理の条件を変更した。実施例11~13に係る加飾シートの間で、ガラスビーズの噴射条件およびガラスビーズの種類が異なっていた。 The blasting conditions were changed between the decorative sheets according to Examples 11-13. Among the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 13, the conditions for jetting glass beads and the types of glass beads differed.
 実施例11で採用したブラスト処理の程度を、次のように評価した。版の製造に用いた銅板と同一の平坦な銅板の表面に、実施例11で採用したブラスト処理を行った。ブラスト処理された銅板を、版と同様にクロムめっき処理した。この銅板のブラスト処理で形成された微細凹凸面に、未硬化の紫外線硬化性樹脂を塗布し、塗布膜を硬化することにより、透明拡散板を作製した。透明拡散板の透過ヘイズを測定した。透過ヘイズの測定には、ヘイズメーター(株式会社村上色彩技術研究所製、製品番号:HM-150)を用いた。実施例11で用いたブラスト処理により作製された透明拡散板の透過ヘイズは、48%であった。 The degree of blasting adopted in Example 11 was evaluated as follows. The blasting treatment employed in Example 11 was performed on the surface of the same flat copper plate as the copper plate used to make the plate. The blasted copper plate was chromium plated in the same manner as the plate. An uncured ultraviolet curable resin was applied to the fine uneven surface formed by blasting the copper plate, and the coating film was cured to produce a transparent diffuser plate. The transmission haze of the transparent diffusion plate was measured. A haze meter (manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory, product number: HM-150) was used to measure the transmission haze. The transmission haze of the transparent diffusion plate produced by blasting used in Example 11 was 48%.
<実施例14~17>
 実施例14~17に係る加飾シートの製造方法は、線状模様層の作製前に樹脂賦型層の凹凸構造をなす表面に被覆層を形成した点のみにおいて、比較例に係る加飾シートの製造方法と異なる。被覆層の形成を除き、実施例14~17に係る加飾シートは、比較例11に係る加飾シートと、同一の製造方法及び同一の製造条件を採用した。
<Examples 14 to 17>
The methods for manufacturing the decorative sheets according to Examples 14 to 17 differed from the decorative sheets according to the comparative examples only in that a coating layer was formed on the uneven surface of the resin imprinting layer before the formation of the linear pattern layer. different from the manufacturing method of The decorative sheets according to Examples 14 to 17 employ the same manufacturing method and the same manufacturing conditions as the decorative sheet according to Comparative Example 11, except for the formation of the coating layer.
 実施例14~17に係る加飾シートの間で、被覆層の厚みを変更した。実施例14の被覆層の厚みは1μmであった。実施例15の被覆層の厚みは2μmであった。実施例16の被覆層の厚みは5μmであった。実施例17の被覆層の厚みは10μmであった。樹脂賦型層の凹凸構造の高低差が5μmであった。実施例14の被覆層の厚みは、樹脂賦型層の凹凸構造の高低差の10%であった。実施例15の被覆層の厚みは、樹脂賦型層の凹凸構造の高低差の20%であった。実施例16の被覆層の厚みは、樹脂賦型層の凹凸構造の高低差の100%であった。実施例17の被覆層の厚みは、樹脂賦型層の凹凸構造の高低差の200%であった。 The thickness of the coating layer was changed between the decorative sheets according to Examples 14-17. The thickness of the coating layer of Example 14 was 1 μm. The thickness of the coating layer of Example 15 was 2 μm. The thickness of the coating layer of Example 16 was 5 μm. The thickness of the coating layer of Example 17 was 10 μm. The height difference of the concave-convex structure of the resin imprinting layer was 5 μm. The thickness of the coating layer of Example 14 was 10% of the height difference of the uneven structure of the resin imprinting layer. The thickness of the coating layer of Example 15 was 20% of the height difference of the concave-convex structure of the resin imprinting layer. The thickness of the coating layer of Example 16 was 100% of the height difference of the uneven structure of the resin imprinting layer. The thickness of the coating layer of Example 17 was 200% of the height difference of the uneven structure of the resin imprinting layer.
<表面性状>
 実施例11~17及び比較例11に係る加飾シートについて、JISB0601-1994に規定されたRz、Ra、PV、rmsを、線状要素の配列方向に沿って測定した。Rz、Ra、PV、rmsの測定には、ザイゴ株式会社製の走査型白色干渉計(型番NewView6300)を用いた。実施例11~17及び比較例11に係る加飾シートについて、側壁傾斜角度θを測定した。側壁傾斜角度θは、ザイゴ株式会社製の走査型白色干渉計(型番NewView6300)を用いて計測された線状模様層の表面形状から、算出した。表1に測定結果を示す。表2に示された各測定結果は、測定対象となる加飾シート内における一辺が約1000μmである正方形領域の各辺を3等分して九つの小領域に区画し、各小領域の約中央となる位置にて測定した合計九つの測定値の平均値である。
<Surface texture>
For the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11, Rz, Ra, PV, and rms specified in JISB0601-1994 were measured along the direction in which the linear elements were arranged. A scanning white light interferometer (model number NewView6300) manufactured by Zygo Corporation was used to measure Rz, Ra, PV, and rms. The side wall inclination angle θ of the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11 was measured. The sidewall inclination angle θ was calculated from the surface shape of the linear pattern layer measured using a scanning white light interferometer (model number NewView6300) manufactured by Zygo Corporation. Table 1 shows the measurement results. Each measurement result shown in Table 2 was obtained by dividing each side of a square area having a side of about 1000 μm in the decorative sheet to be measured into three equal parts and dividing each side into nine small areas. It is the average value of a total of nine measurements taken at the central position.
<評価結果>
 実施例11~17及び比較例11に係る加飾シートを、遮光パターンシート及び光源装置を有する表示装置と組合せて、図43に示された表示システムを作製した。光源装置は、発光ダイオードであった。表示装置は、正方形形状の画像を表示可能であった。画像がなす正方形形状の辺は、線状要素の長手方向および配列方向に延びていた。
<Evaluation results>
A display system shown in FIG. 43 was produced by combining the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11 with a display device having a light shielding pattern sheet and a light source device. The light source device was a light emitting diode. The display device was capable of displaying square-shaped images. The sides of the square formed by the image extended in the longitudinal direction and the arrangement direction of the linear elements.
 表示装置を動作させて画像を表示した状態において、加飾シート上に生じる滲みを観察した。画像の輪郭から広がり出た滲みの長さを、顕微鏡で拡大観察した。実施例11~17及び比較例11に係る加飾シートにおいて、線状要素の長手方向に画像の外輪郭から広がる滲みの長さと、線状要素の配列方向に画像の外輪郭から広がる滲みの長さとは、概ね同一であった。線状要素の配列方向に画像の外輪郭から広がる滲みの長さL1(図45参照)の各例についての測定結果を表2に示す。 Bleeding on the decorative sheet was observed while the display device was operated to display an image. The length of the bleeding extending from the contour of the image was magnified and observed with a microscope. In the decorative sheets according to Examples 11 to 17 and Comparative Example 11, the length of bleeding spreading from the outer contour of the image in the longitudinal direction of the linear elements and the length of bleeding spreading from the outer contour of the image in the arrangement direction of the linear elements were roughly the same. Table 2 shows measurement results for each example of the bleeding length L1 (see FIG. 45) that spreads from the outer contour of the image in the arrangement direction of the linear elements.
D1:第1方向、D2:第2方向、D3:第3方向、10:表示システム、12:光源装置、12a:発光面、16:表示装置、16a:表示面、20:加飾部材、25:加飾シート積層体、30:加飾シート、35:線状模様、40:線状模様層、41:凹凸構造、42A:側壁、42B:側壁、43:ベース部、45:線状要素、45A:線状凸部、45B:線状凹部、46:線状領域、48:単位要素、48A:単位凸部、48B:単位凹部、49:単位領域、60:意匠層、62:接合層、64:熱可塑性樹脂部、66:遮光パターンシート、66a:遮光領域、66b:透過領域、70:基材、72:被覆層、73:離型層、80:樹脂賦型層、81:凹凸構造、82:第2線状要素、82A:第2線状凸部、82B:第2線状凹部、83:第2単位要素、83A:第2単位凸部、83B:第2単位凹部、90:版、91:版面、92:版線状要素、92A:版線状凸部、92B:版線状凹部、93:版単位要素、93A:版単位凸部、93B:版単位凹部、95:多階調グレースケール画像データ、96:画素、97:画素領域、98:サブ領域、99a:第1区域、99b:第2区域、100:画像、101:滲み D1: first direction, D2: second direction, D3: third direction, 10: display system, 12: light source device, 12a: light emitting surface, 16: display device, 16a: display surface, 20: decorative member, 25 : Decorative sheet laminate 30: Decorative sheet 35: Linear pattern 40: Linear pattern layer 41: Concavo-convex structure 42A: Side wall 42B: Side wall 43: Base part 45: Linear element 45A: linear convex portion, 45B: linear concave portion, 46: linear region, 48: unit element, 48A: unit convex portion, 48B: unit concave portion, 49: unit region, 60: design layer, 62: bonding layer, 64: thermoplastic resin part, 66: light-shielding pattern sheet, 66a: light-shielding region, 66b: transmissive region, 70: base material, 72: coating layer, 73: release layer, 80: resin imprinting layer, 81: uneven structure , 82: second linear element, 82A: second linear convex portion, 82B: second linear concave portion, 83: second unit element, 83A: second unit convex portion, 83B: second unit concave portion, 90: Plate, 91: plate surface, 92: plate linear element, 92A: plate linear convex portion, 92B: plate linear concave portion, 93: plate unit element, 93A: plate unit convex portion, 93B: plate unit concave portion, 95: multi Gradation grayscale image data, 96: pixel, 97: pixel area, 98: sub-area, 99a: first area, 99b: second area, 100: image, 101: bleeding

Claims (51)

  1.  線状模様層を備え、
     前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
     各線状要素は、二次元配列された単位要素を含み、
     全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である、加飾シート。
    Equipped with a linear pattern layer,
    The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
    Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
    A decorative sheet having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
  2.  線状模様層を備え、
     前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
     前記線状要素は、その長手方向における中間部に、前記長手方向に非平行な側壁を含む、
     全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である、加飾シート。
    Equipped with a linear pattern layer,
    The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
    The linear element includes a side wall non-parallel to the longitudinal direction at an intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction,
    A decorative sheet having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
  3.  線状模様層を備え、
     前記線状模様層は、一方向に配列された複数の線状要素を含み、
     各線状要素は、二次元配列された単位要素を含み、
     前記単位要素は、単位凸部又は単位凹部である、加飾シート。
    Equipped with a linear pattern layer,
    The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements arranged in one direction,
    Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
    The decorative sheet, wherein the unit elements are unit protrusions or unit recesses.
  4.  前記線状模様層は、ヘアライン模様、スピン模様、木目模様、又は織物模様を表示する、請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the linear pattern layer displays a hairline pattern, a spin pattern, a wood grain pattern, or a woven pattern.
  5.  前記単位要素の最大長さは、1μm以上50μm以下である、請求項1又は3に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to claim 1 or 3, wherein the unit element has a maximum length of 1 μm or more and 50 μm or less.
  6.  前記単位要素によって構成される凹凸構造の高低差は、0.3μm以上20μm以下である、請求項1又は3に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to claim 1 or 3, wherein the uneven structure formed by the unit elements has a height difference of 0.3 µm or more and 20 µm or less.
  7.  前記線状要素の配列方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素の間で、JISB0601-1994に規定された十点平均粗さRzであって前記線状要素の長手方向に沿った前記十点平均粗さRzは、異なる、請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。 Between two linear elements adjacent in the arrangement direction of the linear elements, the ten-point average roughness Rz specified in JISB0601-1994 and the ten-point average roughness along the longitudinal direction of the linear elements The decorative sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the heights Rz are different.
  8.  前記単位要素は、単位凸部又は単位凹部であり、
     前記線状要素の配列方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素の間で、前記単位凹部の配置割合は異なる、請求項1又は3に記載の加飾シート。
    The unit element is a unit convex portion or a unit concave portion,
    4. The decorative sheet according to claim 1, wherein the arrangement ratio of the unit recesses differs between two linear elements adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction of the linear elements.
  9.  前記線状要素の配列方向に隣り合う二つの線状要素の間で、平均高さは異なる、請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein two linear elements adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction of the linear elements have different average heights.
  10.  前記線状要素は、その長手方向に分散した側壁を含む、請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the linear elements include side walls distributed in the longitudinal direction thereof.
  11.  前記線状要素は、その配列方向に分散した側壁を含む、請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the linear elements include side walls dispersed in the direction of their arrangement.
  12.  JISB0601-1994に規定された十点平均粗さRzであって前記線状要素の長手方向に沿った当該線状要素の前記十点平均粗さRzは、5.5μm以下である、請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。 Claim 1, wherein the ten-point average roughness Rz defined in JISB0601-1994 and the ten-point average roughness Rz of the linear element along the longitudinal direction of the linear element is 5.5 μm or less. 4. The decorative sheet according to any one of -3.
  13.  各単位要素は、単位凸部または単位凹部である、請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein each unit element is a unit convex portion or a unit concave portion.
  14.  各線状要素内における前記単位凹部の割合は、40%以下または60%以上である、請求項13に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to claim 13, wherein the ratio of the unit recesses in each linear element is 40% or less or 60% or more.
  15.  前記単位要素は、第1配列方向および前記第1配列方向と非平行な第2配列方向に配列され、
     前記単位凹部の割合が40%以下である線状要素において、前記単位凹部と前記第1配列方向に隣り合う前記単位要素は前記単位凸部であり、前記単位凹部と前記第2配列方向に隣り合う前記単位要素は前記単位凸部であり、
     前記単位凹部の割合が60%以上である線状要素において、前記単位凸部と前記第1配列方向に隣り合う前記単位要素は前記単位凹部であり、前記単位凸部と前記第2配列方向に隣り合う前記単位要素は前記単位凹部である、請求項14に記載の加飾シート。
    the unit elements are arranged in a first arrangement direction and a second arrangement direction non-parallel to the first arrangement direction;
    In the linear element in which the proportion of the unit recesses is 40% or less, the unit elements adjacent to the unit recesses in the first arrangement direction are the unit protrusions, and are adjacent to the unit recesses in the second arrangement direction. The matching unit element is the unit protrusion,
    In the linear element in which the ratio of the unit concave portion is 60% or more, the unit element adjacent to the unit convex portion in the first arrangement direction is the unit concave portion, and the unit convex portion and the unit convex portion are arranged in the second arrangement direction. 15. The decorative sheet according to claim 14, wherein the adjacent unit elements are the unit recesses.
  16.  前記単位要素は、配列方向に配列され、
     前記配列方向に沿った断面において特定される壁部傾斜角度は、66°以上である、請求項1又は3に記載の加飾シート。
    The unit elements are arranged in an array direction,
    The decorative sheet according to claim 1 or 3, wherein a wall portion inclination angle specified in a cross section along the arrangement direction is 66° or more.
  17.  前記線状要素の長手方向に沿った長さは、20μm以上2m以下であり、
     前記線状要素の前記長手方向に直交する方向に沿った幅は、10μm以上1000μm以下である、請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
    The length of the linear element along the longitudinal direction is 20 μm or more and 2 m or less,
    The decorative sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the linear element has a width of 10 µm or more and 1000 µm or less along the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction.
  18.  前記線状模様層と重ねられた遮光パターンシートを備え、
     前記遮光パターンシートは、可視光遮光性を有した遮光領域と、可視光透過性を有した透過領域と、を含む、請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。
    A light-shielding pattern sheet superimposed on the linear pattern layer,
    The decorative sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the light-shielding pattern sheet includes a light-shielding region having a property of blocking visible light and a transmitting region having a property of transmitting visible light.
  19.  前記線状模様層は、電子線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を含む、請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the linear pattern layer contains a cured product of an electron beam curable resin composition.
  20.  前記線状模様層は、光安定剤及び紫外線吸収剤の一以上を含む、請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the linear pattern layer contains one or more of a light stabilizer and an ultraviolet absorber.
  21.  請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の加飾シートと、
     前記加飾シートに接合した熱可塑性樹脂部と、を備える、加飾部材。
    A decorative sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 3;
    A decorative member comprising: a thermoplastic resin portion joined to the decorative sheet.
  22.  線状模様層と、線状模様層と重ねられた熱可塑性樹脂部と、を備え、
     前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
     各線状要素は、二次元配列された単位要素を含み、
     前記熱可塑性樹脂部は、熱可塑性樹脂を含み、
     全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である、加飾部材。
    comprising a linear pattern layer and a thermoplastic resin part superimposed on the linear pattern layer,
    The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
    Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
    The thermoplastic resin portion contains a thermoplastic resin,
    A decorative member having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
  23.  線状模様層と、線状模様層と重ねられた熱可塑性樹脂部と、を備え、
     前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
     前記線状要素は、その長手方向における中間部に、前記長手方向に非平行な側壁を含み、
     前記熱可塑性樹脂部は、熱可塑性樹脂を含み、
     全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である、加飾部材。
    comprising a linear pattern layer and a thermoplastic resin part superimposed on the linear pattern layer,
    The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
    the linear element includes a side wall non-parallel to the longitudinal direction at an intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction;
    The thermoplastic resin portion contains a thermoplastic resin,
    A decorative member having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
  24.  線状模様層と、線状模様層と重ねられた熱可塑性樹脂部と、を備え、
     前記線状模様層は、一方向に配列された複数の線状要素を含み、
     各線状要素は、二次元配列された単位要素を含み、
     前記単位要素は、単位凸部又は単位凹部である、加飾部材。
    comprising a linear pattern layer and a thermoplastic resin part superimposed on the linear pattern layer,
    The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements arranged in one direction,
    Each linear element includes unit elements arranged two-dimensionally,
    The decorative member, wherein the unit elements are unit protrusions or unit recesses.
  25.  請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載された加飾シート又は請求項22~24のいずれか一項に記載された加飾部材と、
     前記加飾シート又は前記加飾部材と重ねられた表示装置又は光源装置と、を備える、表示システム。
    The decorative sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 3 or the decorative member according to any one of claims 22 to 24;
    A display system comprising: a display device or a light source device superimposed on the decorative sheet or the decorative member.
  26.  線状模様を表示する加飾シートの製造に用いられる版を、金属面に凹部を形成することにより製造する、版の製造方法であって、
     線状模様についての多階調グレースケール画像データを用意する工程と、
     画像データの各画素に対応する画素領域を設定し、各画素領域を複数のサブ領域に区分けし、各サブ領域を第1区域および第2区域にいずれかに割り振る工程と、
     前記第2区域の配置パターンにて前記金属面に前記凹部を形成する工程と、を備え、
     各画素領域における第2区域の割合は、当該画素の階調に応じて決定する、版の製造方法。
    A plate manufacturing method for manufacturing a plate used for manufacturing a decorative sheet displaying a linear pattern by forming recesses in a metal surface,
    preparing multi-tone grayscale image data for the linear pattern;
    setting a pixel region corresponding to each pixel of image data, dividing each pixel region into a plurality of sub-regions, and allocating each sub-region to either a first region or a second region;
    forming the recesses in the metal surface in the arrangement pattern of the second regions;
    A printing plate manufacturing method, wherein the proportion of the second area in each pixel area is determined according to the gradation of the pixel.
  27.  前記凹部が形成された前記金属面をブラスト処理する工程を、備える、請求項26に記載の版の製造方法。 The method for manufacturing a plate according to claim 26, comprising the step of blasting the metal surface on which the recesses are formed.
  28.  請求項26又は27に記載された製造方法により製造された版を用いて樹脂賦形層を作製する工程を備える、加飾シートの製造方法。 A method for producing a decorative sheet, comprising a step of producing a resin imprint layer using a plate produced by the production method according to claim 26 or 27.
  29.  前記版から剥がした前記樹脂賦形層を第2版として用い、前記樹脂賦形層に樹脂組成物を供給して、前記樹脂組成物を硬化することにより、線状模様層を作製する工程を備える、請求項28に記載の加飾シートの製造方法。 A step of producing a linear pattern layer by using the resin-shaped layer peeled off from the plate as a second plate, supplying a resin composition to the resin-shaped layer, and curing the resin composition. 29. The method for manufacturing a decorative sheet according to claim 28, comprising:
  30.  前記版から剥がした前記樹脂賦形層の前記版に接触していた面に、第1樹脂組成物を供給し、前記第1樹脂組成物から被覆層を作製する工程と、
     前記被覆層上に第2樹脂組成物を供給して、前記第2樹脂組成物を硬化することにより、線状模様層を作製する工程と、を備える、請求項28に記載の加飾シートの製造方法。
    A step of supplying a first resin composition to the surface of the resin imprinting layer peeled off from the plate that was in contact with the plate, and producing a coating layer from the first resin composition;
    The decorative sheet according to claim 28, comprising the step of supplying a second resin composition onto the coating layer and curing the second resin composition to produce a linear pattern layer. Production method.
  31.  請求項28に記載された製造方法により製造された加飾シートを、キャビティ内に配置する工程と、
     前記加飾シートが配置された前記キャビティ内に加熱された熱可塑性樹脂を供給し、前記加飾シートと接合した熱可塑性樹脂部を作製する工程と、を備える、加飾部材の製造方法。
    placing the decorative sheet manufactured by the manufacturing method according to claim 28 in the cavity;
    A method of manufacturing a decorative member, comprising: supplying a heated thermoplastic resin into the cavity in which the decorative sheet is arranged to produce a thermoplastic resin portion joined to the decorative sheet.
  32.  線状模様層を備え、
     前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
     前記複数の線状要素は、一方向に配列され、
     各線状要素は、前記一方向に交差する他方向に延び、
     JISB0601-1994に規定された十点平均粗さRzであって前記一方向に沿った前記十点平均粗さRzは、3.2μm以下であり、
     全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である、加飾シート。
    Equipped with a linear pattern layer,
    The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
    The plurality of linear elements are arranged in one direction,
    Each linear element extends in the other direction intersecting the one direction,
    The ten-point average roughness Rz defined in JISB0601-1994 and along the one direction is 3.2 μm or less,
    A decorative sheet having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
  33.  前記一方向に沿った前記十点平均粗さRzは、0.5μm以上である、請求項32に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to claim 32, wherein the ten-point average roughness Rz along the one direction is 0.5 µm or more.
  34.  前記線状模様層は、前記一方向に交互に配置された線状凸部及び線状凹部を含み、
     前記一方向に隣り合う線状凸部及び線状凹部を横切る断面にて特定される側壁傾斜角度は、66°以上であり、
     前記断面は、前記加飾シートの法線方向および前記一方向の両方に沿った断面であり、
     前記側壁傾斜角度は、前記断面において、前記線状模様層上となる第1位置および第2位置を通過する直線と、前記法線方向と、の間の角度であり、
     前記第1位置は、前記断面が横切る前記線状凸部の最高位置と前記線状凸部に隣り合う前記線状凹部の最低位置との高低差の10%だけ、前記最高位置から低い前記線状模様層上の位置であり、
     前記第2位置は、前記高低差の10%だけ前記最低位置から高い前記線状模様層上の位置であり、
     前記第1位置および前記第2位置は、前記一方向において、前記最高位置および前記最低位置の間に位置する、請求項32に記載の加飾シート。
    The linear pattern layer includes linear protrusions and linear recesses alternately arranged in the one direction,
    A side wall inclination angle specified in a cross section across the linear protrusions and linear recesses adjacent to each other in one direction is 66° or more,
    The cross section is a cross section along both the normal direction of the decorative sheet and the one direction,
    The side wall inclination angle is an angle between a straight line passing through a first position and a second position on the linear pattern layer and the normal direction in the cross section,
    The first position is the line lower than the highest position by 10% of the height difference between the highest position of the linear protrusion crossed by the cross section and the lowest position of the linear recess adjacent to the linear protrusion. is the position on the pattern layer,
    The second position is a position on the linear pattern layer higher than the lowest position by 10% of the height difference,
    33. The decorative sheet according to claim 32, wherein said first position and said second position are positioned between said highest position and said lowest position in said one direction.
  35.  線状模様層を備える加飾シートであって、
     全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下であり、
     前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
     前記複数の線状要素は、一方向に配置され、
     各線状要素は、前記一方向に交差する他方向に延び、
     前記複数の線状要素は、一方向に交互に配置された線状凸部及び線状凹部を含み、
     前記一方向に隣り合う線状凸部および線状凹部を横切る断面にて特定される側壁傾斜角度は、66°以上であり、
     前記断面は、前記加飾シートの法線方向および前記一方向の両方に沿った断面であり、
     前記側壁傾斜角度は、前記断面において、前記線状模様層上となる第1位置および第2位置を通過する直線と、前記法線方向と、の間の角度であり、
     前記第1位置は、前記断面が横切る前記線状凸部の最高位置と前記線状凸部に隣り合う前記線状凹部の最低位置との高低差の10%だけ、前記最高位置から低い前記線状模様層上の位置であり、
     前記第2位置は、前記高低差の10%だけ前記最低位置から高い前記線状模様層上の位置であり、
     前記第1位置および前記第2位置は、前記一方向において、前記最高位置および前記最低位置の間に位置する、加飾シート。
    A decorative sheet comprising a linear pattern layer,
    The total light transmittance is 5% or more and 90% or less,
    The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
    The plurality of linear elements are arranged in one direction,
    Each linear element extends in the other direction intersecting the one direction,
    The plurality of linear elements include linear protrusions and linear recesses alternately arranged in one direction,
    A side wall inclination angle specified in a cross section that crosses the linear protrusions and linear recesses that are adjacent to each other in one direction is 66° or more,
    The cross section is a cross section along both the normal direction of the decorative sheet and the one direction,
    The side wall inclination angle is an angle between a straight line passing through a first position and a second position on the linear pattern layer and the normal direction in the cross section,
    The first position is the line lower than the highest position by 10% of the height difference between the highest position of the linear protrusion crossed by the cross section and the lowest position of the linear recess adjacent to the linear protrusion. is the position on the pattern layer,
    The second position is a position on the linear pattern layer higher than the lowest position by 10% of the height difference,
    The decorative sheet, wherein the first position and the second position are located between the highest position and the lowest position in the one direction.
  36.  前記側壁傾斜角度は87°以下である、請求項34又は35に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to claim 34 or 35, wherein the side wall inclination angle is 87° or less.
  37.  前記線状模様層は、ヘアライン模様、スピン模様、木目模様、又は織物模様を表示する、請求項32又は35に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to claim 32 or 35, wherein the linear pattern layer displays a hairline pattern, a spin pattern, a grain pattern, or a woven pattern.
  38.  前記線状要素の前記他方向に沿った長さは、20μm以上2m以下であり、
     前記線状要素の前記一方向に沿った幅は、10μm以上1000μm以下である、請求項32又は35に記載の加飾シート。
    The length of the linear element along the other direction is 20 μm or more and 2 m or less,
    36. The decorative sheet according to claim 32 or 35, wherein the width of said linear element along said one direction is 10 µm or more and 1000 µm or less.
  39.  前記線状模様層と重ねられた遮光パターンシートを備え、
     前記遮光パターンシートは、可視光遮光性を有した遮光領域と、可視光透過性を有した透過領域と、を含む、請求項32又は35に記載の加飾シート。
    A light-shielding pattern sheet superimposed on the linear pattern layer,
    36. The decorative sheet according to claim 32 or 35, wherein the light-shielding pattern sheet includes a light-shielding region having a property of blocking visible light and a transmissive region having a property of transmitting visible light.
  40.  前記線状模様層は、電子線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を含む、請求項32又は35に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to claim 32 or 35, wherein the linear pattern layer contains a cured product of an electron beam curable resin composition.
  41.  前記線状模様層は、光安定剤及び紫外線吸収剤の一以上を含む、請求項32又は35に記載の加飾シート。 The decorative sheet according to claim 32 or 35, wherein the linear pattern layer contains one or more of a light stabilizer and an ultraviolet absorber.
  42.  請求項32又は35に記載の加飾シートと、
     前記加飾シートに接合した熱可塑性樹脂部と、を備える、加飾部材。
    a decorative sheet according to claim 32 or 35;
    A decorative member comprising: a thermoplastic resin portion joined to the decorative sheet.
  43.  線状模様層と、線状模様層と重ねられた熱可塑性樹脂部と、を備え、
     前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
     前記複数の線状要素は、一方向に配列され、
     各線状要素は、前記一方向に交差する他方向に延び、
     JISB0601-1994に規定された十点平均粗さRzであって前記一方向に沿った前記十点平均粗さRzは、3.2μm以下であり、
     全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下である、加飾部材。
    comprising a linear pattern layer and a thermoplastic resin part superimposed on the linear pattern layer,
    The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
    The plurality of linear elements are arranged in one direction,
    Each linear element extends in the other direction intersecting the one direction,
    The ten-point average roughness Rz defined in JISB0601-1994 and along the one direction is 3.2 μm or less,
    A decorative member having a total light transmittance of 5% or more and 90% or less.
  44.  線状模様層と、線状模様層と重ねられた熱可塑性樹脂部と、を備え、
     全光線透過率は、5%以上90%以下であり、
     前記線状模様層は、複数の線状要素を含み、
     前記複数の線状要素は、一方向に配置され、
     各線状要素は、前記一方向に交差する他方向に延び、
     前記複数の線状要素は、一方向に交互に配置された線状凸部及び線状凹部を含み、
     前記一方向に隣り合う線状凸部および線状凹部を横切る断面にて特定される側壁傾斜角度は、66°以上であり、
     前記断面は、前記線状模様層の法線方向および前記一方向の両方に沿った断面であり、
     前記側壁傾斜角度は、前記断面において、前記線状模様層上となる第1位置および第2位置を通過する直線と、前記法線方向と、の間の角度であり、
     前記第1位置は、前記断面が横切る前記線状凸部の最高位置と前記線状凸部に隣り合う前記線状凹部の最低位置との高低差の10%だけ、前記最高位置から低い前記線状模様層上の位置であり、
     前記第2位置は、前記高低差の10%だけ前記最低位置から高い前記線状模様層上の位置であり、
     前記第1位置および前記第2位置は、前記一方向において、前記最高位置および前記最低位置の間に位置する、加飾部材。
    comprising a linear pattern layer and a thermoplastic resin part superimposed on the linear pattern layer,
    The total light transmittance is 5% or more and 90% or less,
    The linear pattern layer includes a plurality of linear elements,
    The plurality of linear elements are arranged in one direction,
    Each linear element extends in the other direction intersecting the one direction,
    The plurality of linear elements include linear protrusions and linear recesses alternately arranged in one direction,
    A side wall inclination angle specified in a cross section that crosses the linear protrusions and linear recesses that are adjacent to each other in one direction is 66° or more,
    The cross section is a cross section along both the normal direction of the linear pattern layer and the one direction,
    The side wall inclination angle is an angle between a straight line passing through a first position and a second position on the linear pattern layer and the normal direction in the cross section,
    The first position is the line lower than the highest position by 10% of the height difference between the highest position of the linear protrusion crossed by the cross section and the lowest position of the linear recess adjacent to the linear protrusion. is the position on the pattern layer,
    The second position is a position on the linear pattern layer higher than the lowest position by 10% of the height difference,
    The decorating member, wherein the first position and the second position are located between the highest position and the lowest position in the one direction.
  45.  請求項32又は35に記載された加飾シート又は請求項43又は44に記載された加飾部材と、
     前記加飾シート又は前記加飾部材と重ねられた表示装置又は光源装置と、を備える、表示システム。
    a decorative sheet according to claim 32 or 35 or a decorative member according to claim 43 or 44;
    A display system comprising: a display device or a light source device superimposed on the decorative sheet or the decorative member.
  46.  線状模様を表示する加飾シートの製造に用いられる版の製造方法であって、
     金属面に線状の凹部を形成する工程と、
     前記凹部が形成された前記金属面をブラスト処理する工程と、を備える、版の製造方法。
    A method for manufacturing a plate used for manufacturing a decorative sheet displaying a linear pattern,
    forming linear recesses in the metal surface;
    and a step of blasting the metal surface on which the recesses are formed.
  47.  請求項46に記載された製造方法により製造された版を用いて樹脂賦型層を作製する工程を備える、加飾シートの製造方法。 A method for producing a decorative sheet, comprising a step of producing a resin transfer layer using a plate produced by the production method according to claim 46.
  48.  前記版から剥がした前記樹脂賦型層を第2版として用い、前記樹脂賦型層に樹脂組成物を供給して、前記樹脂組成物を硬化することにより、線状模様層を作製する工程を備える、請求項47に記載の加飾シートの製造方法。 A step of producing a linear pattern layer by using the resin embossing layer peeled off from the plate as a second plate, supplying a resin composition to the resin embossing layer, and curing the resin composition. 48. The method for manufacturing a decorative sheet according to claim 47, comprising:
  49.  前記版から剥がした前記樹脂賦型層の前記版に接触していた面に、第1樹脂組成物を供給し、前記第1樹脂組成物から被覆層を作製する工程と、
     前記被覆層上に第2樹脂組成物を供給して、前記第2樹脂組成物を硬化することにより、線状模様層を作製する工程と、を備え、
     前記被覆層は、前記版から前記樹脂賦型層に転写されることによって形成された凹凸構造の高低差の10%以上の厚みを有する、請求項47に記載の加飾シートの製造方法。
    a step of supplying a first resin composition to the surface of the resin transfer layer peeled off from the plate that was in contact with the plate, and producing a coating layer from the first resin composition;
    a step of supplying a second resin composition onto the coating layer and curing the second resin composition to produce a linear pattern layer;
    48. The method for producing a decorative sheet according to claim 47, wherein the coating layer has a thickness equal to or greater than 10% of the height difference of the concave-convex structure formed by transferring from the plate to the resin transfer layer.
  50.  線状の凹部が形成された版を用いて樹脂賦型層を作製する工程と
     前記版から剥がした前記樹脂賦型層の前記版に接触していた面に、第1樹脂組成物を供給し、前記第1樹脂組成物から被覆層を作製する工程と、
     前記被覆層上に第2樹脂組成物を供給して、前記第2樹脂組成物を硬化することにより、線状模様層を作製する工程と、を備え、
     前記被覆層は、前記版から前記樹脂賦型層に転写されることによって形成された凹凸構造の高低差の10%以上の厚みを有する、加飾シートの製造方法。
    A step of producing a resin imprinting layer using a plate in which linear recesses are formed; and supplying a first resin composition to the surface of the resin imprinting layer peeled off from the plate that was in contact with the plate. , a step of producing a coating layer from the first resin composition;
    a step of supplying a second resin composition onto the coating layer and curing the second resin composition to produce a linear pattern layer;
    A method for producing a decorative sheet, wherein the coating layer has a thickness equal to or greater than 10% of the height difference of the uneven structure formed by transferring from the plate to the resin transfer layer.
  51.  請求項47~50のいずれか一項に記載された製造方法により製造された加飾シートを、キャビティ内に配置する工程と、
     前記加飾シートが配置された前記キャビティ内に加熱された熱可塑性樹脂を供給し、前記加飾シートと接合した熱可塑性樹脂部を作製する工程と、を備える、加飾部材の製造方法。
    placing the decorative sheet manufactured by the manufacturing method according to any one of claims 47 to 50 in the cavity;
    A method of manufacturing a decorative member, comprising: supplying a heated thermoplastic resin into the cavity in which the decorative sheet is arranged to produce a thermoplastic resin portion joined to the decorative sheet.
PCT/JP2023/007175 2022-02-25 2023-02-27 Decorative sheet, decorative member, display system, method for manufacturing plate, method for manufacturinig decorative sheet, and method for manufacturing decorative member WO2023163192A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022-028686 2022-02-25
JP2022028690 2022-02-25
JP2022028687 2022-02-25
JP2022-028690 2022-02-25
JP2022-028687 2022-02-25
JP2022028686 2022-02-25

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023163192A1 true WO2023163192A1 (en) 2023-08-31

Family

ID=87766310

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2023/007175 WO2023163192A1 (en) 2022-02-25 2023-02-27 Decorative sheet, decorative member, display system, method for manufacturing plate, method for manufacturinig decorative sheet, and method for manufacturing decorative member

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2023163192A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH11268500A (en) * 1998-03-19 1999-10-05 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Decorative material having parallel line-like protrusion and recess pattern
JP2016068477A (en) * 2014-09-30 2016-05-09 大日本印刷株式会社 Mold
JP2017026917A (en) * 2015-07-24 2017-02-02 大日本印刷株式会社 Diffraction glossy sheet, shaping sheet, and method for manufacturing diffraction glossy sheet
WO2020194784A1 (en) * 2019-03-28 2020-10-01 パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 Display device
JP2020165229A (en) * 2019-03-29 2020-10-08 大日本印刷株式会社 Decorative material

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH11268500A (en) * 1998-03-19 1999-10-05 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Decorative material having parallel line-like protrusion and recess pattern
JP2016068477A (en) * 2014-09-30 2016-05-09 大日本印刷株式会社 Mold
JP2017026917A (en) * 2015-07-24 2017-02-02 大日本印刷株式会社 Diffraction glossy sheet, shaping sheet, and method for manufacturing diffraction glossy sheet
WO2020194784A1 (en) * 2019-03-28 2020-10-01 パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 Display device
JP2020165229A (en) * 2019-03-29 2020-10-08 大日本印刷株式会社 Decorative material

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI556990B (en) A 3d printed decorative film and products made thereof
TWI476115B (en) A method of making stereoscopic printing and the decoration plate and light box made of thereof
JP4452515B2 (en) 3D pattern decorative body
MX2011007308A (en) Three dimensional surface sheet using total reflection.
JP2008018631A (en) Brilliantly shining decorative body and its manufacturing method
US11951727B2 (en) Resin decorative part and dial plate
TWI681876B (en) Mold releasing sheet and resin leather
CN212528973U (en) Optical leather
KR20190025026A (en) Decorative sheet and decorative moldings
US11390112B2 (en) Resin decorative part and dial plate
JP4638061B2 (en) Optical sheet, method for manufacturing the optical sheet, and backlight unit using the optical sheet
WO2023163192A1 (en) Decorative sheet, decorative member, display system, method for manufacturing plate, method for manufacturinig decorative sheet, and method for manufacturing decorative member
JP2010158826A (en) Decorative sheet material
JP3211875U (en) Decorative material
JP3970250B2 (en) 3D printed material and 3D printing method
JP7440022B2 (en) image display body
WO2021085084A1 (en) Uneven structural body and layered body
JP6883057B2 (en) Decorative material
JP2019111834A5 (en)
JP5845567B2 (en) Micro lens decoration
JP5545948B2 (en) Instrument panel hairline display structure
JP2020041855A (en) Resin decorative component and dial plate
JP6743363B2 (en) Printed matter
TW201226223A (en) Object having 3D pattern motion effect
JP6641864B2 (en) Printed matter

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23760190

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1